YFP 408: What Should You Do With an Old 401(k)?


What should you do with an old 401(k)? Tim Ulbrich and Tim Baker explore your options, common pitfalls, rollover strategies, and how to make smart moves with old retirement accounts after leaving a job.

Episode Summary

When you leave a job, what happens to the retirement account you left behind? In this episode, YFP Co-Founder & CEO, Tim Ulbrich, PharmD, and YFP Co-Founder & COO, Tim Baker, CFP®, RLP®, RICP®, take a deep dive into the important financial decisions surrounding old employer-sponsored retirement plans, such as 401(k)s and 403(b)s.

Tim and Tim discuss the impact these often-overlooked accounts can have on your overall financial plan and explore your available options, whether that’s leaving the money in your former employer’s plan, rolling it over to your new employer’s plan, or transferring it to an IRA.

They break down the pros and cons of each approach, highlight common mistakes like the “set it and forget it” trap, and explain why understanding fees and account access is so important. The conversation also emphasizes the value of working with a fiduciary advisor and the serious risks of cashing out these accounts too soon.

To complement the episode, they introduce YFP’s new guide: The Best and Worst Moves to Make with an Old 401(k), designed to help you avoid costly missteps and feel confident in your next move.

Whether you’re changing jobs, planning ahead for a career transition, or simply want to be more intentional about your retirement savings, this episode will give you the clarity and guidance you need.

Key Points from the Episode

  • 00:00 Introduction and Episode Overview
  • 01:15 Sponsor Message: First Horizon
  • 02:23 Discussion Begins: What to Do with Old Employer Retirement Accounts
  • 03:35 Importance of Managing Old Retirement Accounts
  • 05:53 Options for Old 401(k) and 403(b) Accounts
  • 12:58 Pros and Cons of Leaving Money in Old Plans
  • 19:18 Rolling Over to a New 401(k)
  • 27:31 Understanding Asset Location and Allocation
  • 27:47 Rolling Over to a New Employer’s Plan
  • 28:04 Advantages and Disadvantages of Consolidation
  • 29:50 Rolling Over to an IRA: A Common Approach
  • 30:27 Investment Options and Flexibility in IRAs
  • 33:44 The Importance of Transparency in Financial Services
  • 46:23 Considering All Options for Old Retirement Accounts
  • 47:22 Conclusion and Additional Resources

Episode Highlights

 These employer-sponsored retirement plans may seem like old news, especially if you’ve been in the workforce for a while, but what you do or don’t do with them can have a lasting impact on your  financial future.” – Tim Ulbrich [00:23]

“As your career continues, a 401k or if you rolled into an IRA will be one of the largest things on your balance  sheet over time.  So it’s really important to have an intentional plan with how you’re gonna manage these assets and how do they fit in the overall picture of your ability to build wealth and then to spend that wealth like in retirement.” – Tim Baker [7:23]

 “ If you’re actively contributing to a 401k, the action of rebalancing kind of happens naturally every time you get paid and put money in if you leave that job. And that money’s  just sitting there. The market does what it does, so that  that asset loca, that asset allocation that you set will drift because you’re not actively putting money into it.” – Tim Baker [11:50]

Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: [00:00:00] Hey everybody. Tim Ulbrich here, and welcome to this week’s episode of the YFP Podcast where we strive to inspire and encourage you on your path towards achieving financial freedom. Whether you’re transitioning to a new job or just taking a closer look at your finances. One of the most overlooked but critically important pieces of your retirement plan is your old 401k or 4 0 3 B account.

Tim Ulbrich: These employer-sponsored retirement plans may seem like old news, especially if you’ve been in the workforce for a while, but what you do or don’t do with them can have a lasting impact on your financial future. In this episode, we’re diving deep into what happens after you leave a job and what your options are.

Tim Ulbrich: When it comes to your old 401k or four oh through B, we’ll tackle why it’s so important not to let these accounts fall into, set it and forget it mode. Explore the pros and cons of common rollover strategies and break down how fees, fund options, and even asset protection rules differ between the options.

Tim Ulbrich: [00:01:00] And finally, we’ll help you think through whether this is something you want to manage on your own, or if it might make sense to partner with a fiduciary advisor who can help you align this decision. With your broader financial plan and goals, before we jump in, let’s hear from today’s sponsor. First Horizon.

Tim Ulbrich: First Horizon is a paying sponsor of this episode of the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast.

Tim Ulbrich: The saving 20% for a down payment on a home feel like an uphill battle. It’s no secret that pharmacists have a lot of competing financial priorities, including high student loan debt, meaning that saving 20% for down payment on a home may take years. First Horizon offers a professional home loan option, a KAA doctor or pharmacist loan that requires a 3% down payment for a single family home.

Tim Ulbrich: Or townhome for the first time. Home buyers, 5% for non-first time home buyers has no PMI and offers a 30 year fixed rate mortgage on home loans up to 8 0 6 500 in most areas. The pharmacist’s home loan is [00:02:00] available in all states except Alaska and Hawaii, and can be used to purchase condos as well.

Tim Ulbrich: However, rates may be higher. A condo review has to be completed. To check out the requirements of Pharmacist Home Loan through First Horizon, and to start the pre-approval process, visit your financial pharmacist.com/home-loan. Again, that’s your financial pharmacist.com/home-loan. Tim Baker, welcome back to the show.

Tim Baker: Good to be back. What’s going on, Tim?

Tim Ulbrich: I am looking forward to the discussion. Uh, today we’re gonna talk about, uh, a question that really comes up often in pharmacists that both you and I have a chance to converse with, which is, you know, what, what do I do with an old employer retirement account? Uh, it could be the first job transition or the fifth job transition, but you know, often, we’ll, we’ll have these 4 0 1 Ks or these 4 0 3 Bs and.

Tim Ulbrich: Wondering, like, what, what should I do with them? Should I leave them? Should I move them? And so today we’re gonna talk about the different options, some of the pros and cons of what you might do with those accounts. [00:03:00] Um, before we get too far into it, we have a brand new guide that we’ve released, uh, titled The Best and Worst Moves to Make with an old 401k.

Tim Ulbrich: You can download that guide, which is a, a supplement to today’s episode. Go to your financial pharmacist.com/moves. Again, your financial pharmacist.com/moves. And a shout out to Jeff Kimer, uh, pharmacist at. Has collaborated with us on, on several, uh, writings. He wrote the book, fire Rx, the Pharmacist Guide of Financial Independence.

Tim Ulbrich: He helped us put together the content for this guide, uh, as well, just an, an overall, uh, community pharmacist, uh, money nerd. So shout out to Jeff for his help in, in putting together this guide, Tim, this topic probably I would suspect, is you’re, you’re conversing with, uh, pharmacists that are. Wanting to learn more about our fee only financial planning services.

Tim Ulbrich: I’ve gotta believe that this is one that comes up fairly often. Is that, is that correct?

Tim Baker: It does. One of the things that, you know, when I talk to a prospective client that is [00:04:00] in transition, it’s like, you know, I’m unsure what the best. Path is for, you know, my old 401k, or, you know, some people, you know, make the habit of collecting 4 0 1 Ks or 4 0 3 Bs, and they’re just kind of scared,

Tim Ulbrich: Mm-hmm.

Tim Baker: So, you know, what is, what’s the best, you know, path for me and what should I do with those, with those plans. So, yeah, it’s important because as you, if you think about it, Tim, like, you know, 401k, 4 0 3 B. You know, often outside of your house, and then eventually it will eclipse the value of your, your house in terms of like the, the biggest asset on your

Tim Ulbrich: Mm-hmm.

Tim Baker: is a big really over the course of your career in terms of like what to do with, you know, your, your 401k, especially when you leave an employer. Um, You know, I think it’s important to analyze and examine and just try, try to figure out what, what’s the best thing for [00:05:00] you to do.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. And especially, you know, I think about the, the job transitions that may happen, it’s, it’s rare to see someone now that’s worked with the same employer, you know, for 20, 25 years, right? So if, if you’re changing jobs every 3, 4, 5 years, which can be pretty, pretty normal, uh, you know, you’re gonna start to, to accrue several of these accounts.

Tim Ulbrich: And what are the options that we have to do with them along the way and. We’re gonna talk about 401k, 4 0 3 B interchangeably. They are similar, yet different. Uh, we’ve covered that on on previous episodes. Both of them are employer-sponsored retirement plans. Typically, we think 401k. Those that work for a for-profit, 4 0 3 B, those that work for a, a non-profit or thinking about something like A TSP for those that work for the federal government.

Tim Ulbrich: So we’re gonna use those terms interchangeably, but they’re not. Not the same thing. There are important differences, uh, between them, but for the sake of the conversation of job transitions and what do I do with these accounts, we’re gonna lump, lump both of them together. Tim, before we get into the options.

Tim Ulbrich: Let’s cast a vision for, for why this is [00:06:00] important, right? When I think about my own experiences, you know, uh, fir first job or two specifically thinking back to a memory of, of Jess’s, uh, old 4 0 3 B, that was kind of hanging out there. And, you know, after a while we, we didn’t really remember kind of what, what was there.

Tim Ulbrich: And we, we were moving on to the next account. We left it at the time being, we would eventually do a transfer, uh, and a rollover that we’ll talk about in this episode. But when I think about the, the potential. Consequences here, things come to mind like, hey, it’s, it’s outta sight, outta mind, which means we might not just be paying a attention to it like we are, uh, other accounts and, and therefore it might not be optimized in, in the same way that we’re treating our other investment accounts.

Tim Ulbrich: What, what else comes to mind for you about why, why this is important? Before we talk about functionally what we do with them, why, why is it important that we evaluate what we might do with these old accounts?

Tim Baker: I mean, I think one of the first things that we do with clients when we kind of down the path of like our financial roadmap is. We call it a get [00:07:00] organized meeting where we’re essentially taking inventory of everything that we have. so you know, it’s cash, it’s it’s credit card debt, it’s student loans, it’s investment accounts. real estate, those types of things, right? So often what can sometimes be a black box in this, especially if you, if collected 4 0 1 Ks, is like, what are these plans and how are they actually invested and what am I actually paying in fees?

Tim Ulbrich: Hmm.

Tim Baker: So visibility is, is really the first step to, to build a cohesive, comprehensive plan. And like I mentioned, as your career continues, a 401k or if you rolled into an IRA will be one of the largest things on your balance sheet

Tim Ulbrich: Mm-hmm.

Tim Baker: So it’s really important to have a, intentional plan with how you’re gonna manage these assets and how do they fit [00:08:00] in the overall picture of your ability to build wealth and then to spend that wealth like in retirement. So. You know, a for a lot of people, you know, they’ll say like, I don’t even know where these

Tim Ulbrich: Mm-hmm.

Tim Baker: Or, I have a statement, I have no idea like how it’s invested or, or what it’s, you know, and it, and it’s, it could be, it could be at one extreme of like, I just don’t know what this is to like, you know, the other extreme of like, I know it’s probably not optimized and I need some help with this.

Tim Baker: So I think it’s really important to, you know, again, have a plan for this asset and, and make sure that. It is aligned with what you’re trying to achieve,

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. When I think about the maintenance that we typically will do. With our clients on their various investment accounts, right? We’re looking at things like, you know, what’s, what’s the asset allocation according to our goals, according to our risk tolerance and capacity? And, you know, as the market does its thing over time and, and things may get outta whack, how do we rebalance those accounts?

Tim Ulbrich: How do we make sure that this is fee efficient, right? So [00:09:00] if, if that’s outta sight, outta mind, that’s the potential risk that we’re, we’re losing eyes on the intentionality of those funds. And, and one other thing I want to say here while we’re talking about this. Is that it’s not uncommon, correct me if I’m wrong, but it’s not uncommon for some financial planning firms to look at your current employer, 401k or 4 0 3 B uh, and say like, Hey, we see that, but we’re not necessarily gonna spend time helping you.

Tim Ulbrich: You manage that, which can be another, another thing to think about.

Tim Baker: Yeah, I think a quarter of advisors, if you’re working with a quarter of advisors, don’t help you with a current 401k, which I think is bonkers. Um, so to me, like if you’re, if you’re looking at a comprehensive plan, like I think that’s important to make sure. Like if I’m, you know, the, the, like when we do, you know, you don’t mention asset allocation.

Tim Baker: When we set, when we establish an asset allocation, what, whether it’s 90, 10, 90% equities, 10, 10% in bonds, or [00:10:00] 70 30 or 80, whatever it is, like to me that conversation isn’t complete until you give a 70 30 or a 90 10 or whatever it is for that held away or for that current 401k. I just think that, that, I don’t, lazy is not the word, but the reason that advisors don’t do that is ’cause they don’t get paid on those.

Tim Baker: They

Tim Ulbrich: Mm-hmm.

Tim Baker: on that. So part of this discussion is following the money. Like, you know, how, how does it, how do fees work? And, you know, what’s the scope for the fee that I’m paying? And to me, if advisors is, is unwilling to help me with a, with a, you know, a 401k, they’re not getting paid directly on.

Tim Baker: That’s, that to me is a red flag. Um. You know, you’re, if you have my best interest in mind, and this is a big part of my balance sheet, then help a brother, help a sister out. Is, is my, my viewpoint. Um, but you mentioned like asset allocation [00:11:00] is, is big, is a big part of this, but I think part of this discussion of like the options and, and what to do is also asset location and. And how an asset location is often forgotten. But I think it’s, it’s one of the things that is, is just as important as, as asset allocation. Meaning, you know, are these accounts taxable, pre-tax, Roth, that type of thing. And to me, you are confined inside of a 401k to be able to pull some levers to make sure that the percentages of where your assets are held, are. Controllable or you can affect change there. And in, in some, in some accounts you can and in others you can’t. Um, so it’s important to understand that. So, and again, one of the things you mentioned is like Reba, and just to address that really quick, know, if you’re, if you’re actively contributing to a 401k, the action of rebalancing kind of happens naturally every time you get paid and put money in if you [00:12:00] leave that job. And that money’s just sitting there. The market does what it does, so that that asset loca, that asset allocation that you set will drift because you’re not actively putting money into it. So you could drift into something that’s much, much more conservative or more likely, much, much more aggressive than what you signed up for. So that’s another thing to be aware of, is that, you know, one of the important things about this is that, you know, when you’re not actively putting dollars in. It, you tend to drift more out of, you know what you signed up for, which can be problematic, especially when the market turns sour.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. Great, great points. And, um, I’m glad you mentioned the asset location because that’s a really important one, that if, if we’re on autopilot with some of these things or we just leave them and forget ’em, we’re not necessarily thinking about those asset location questions, which will raise some important decisions like.

Tim Ulbrich: Might we or might we not do Roth conversions, you know, for example. So,

Tim Baker: Right,

Tim Ulbrich: um, really good stuff. Let, let’s talk about the various options. Option one, [00:13:00] perhaps the option, uh, that has the least amount of friction, uh, is do nothing and leave money in the old plan. So I, I leave my employer, I go to work for a new employer, and I just leave the funds in the provider that was managing the 401k for the employer That, that I just left.

Tim Ulbrich: Tim, where, where might this, or might this option not make the most sense?

Tim Baker: Yeah, if you’re, if you’re lazy or you don’t want to deal with, uh, pulling statements and everything that you know it takes to uh, an account, this might be right for you. Right? You just basically don’t do

Tim Ulbrich: Mm-hmm.

Tim Baker: Um, you still enjoy. I. The continued tax defer growth, whether it’s a traditional, um, bucket or a Roth bucket, you still get that benefit, which is great. Um, you still get potential, um, benefits of a lot of 4 0 1 Ks will have the options for like in institutional share classes, which are, can be

Tim Ulbrich: Mm-hmm.

Tim Baker: in [00:14:00] fees compared to like just a retail, you know, what you would buy on the street. Um. And one of the things that’s what’s great about, you know, keeping it at the 401k or even transferring it to a new 401k is that. 4 0 1 Ks had a little bit more protection, um, by erisa, which is the Employment Retirement Income Security Act. So under this federal law, creditors can’t touch your 401k in most cases. E you know, even in cases of like bankruptcy lawsuits or collections, they still, the I risk can still get to your money.

Tim Baker: If you’re in, in a divorce, a Quadra, a qualified domestic relations order, can still access those accounts or any type of CRI criminal risk. Restitution IRAs still have protection, but it could be limited compared. I can kind of get into that a little bit more when we talk about IRAs, but that’s, that’s the big benefit.

Tim Baker: Um, I think the cons here, you know, just like if you, if you leave it or if you move it, you’re still limited to the

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Tim Baker: by that

Tim Ulbrich: Mm-hmm.

Tim Baker: So I always talk about like, you know, [00:15:00] with a 401k, you’re in a sandbox and you only have so many toys that

Tim Ulbrich: Mm-hmm.

Tim Baker: with. And those toys are typically mutual funds. average, 4 0 1 Ks have about 20 to 25 investment options, is typically good enough to build a, you know, a diverse portfolio. But looking at many, many 4 0 1 Ks, I think you can throw out of ’em because they’re crap. And what I mean crap is like they’re typically

Tim Ulbrich: Expense ratios. Yep.

Tim Baker: Exactly, so, so you’re, you’re, you’re often stuck with just,

Tim Ulbrich: I.

Tim Baker: maybe four or five or six funds that are, that are good.

Tim Baker: Most of them, most 4 0 1 Ks will have exposure to US stocks from large, mid small, not all the time. Um, most will have exposure to internationals. They’ll have bond funds. They’ll typically have a stable like money market fund. Um, but they often, they’ll miss things like real estate. If you believe in real estate, emerging market. A lot of 4 0 1 Ks don’t have a digital [00:16:00] exposure if you believe in commodities. Um, so I think that’s one of the cons. I think also one, the big, the big con I think is like the, the possibility of higher fees, um, related to the

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Tim Baker: So we mentioned investment fees. Um. So this is the expense ratio that, the fee that the funds themselves take to

Tim Ulbrich: Mm-hmm.

Tim Baker: of a, uh, a balanced, um, ETF or a mutual fund in this case. So, a, on average the investment fees, uh, inside of a 401k are about 39 basis points or 0.39%. So if I have a hundred thousand dollars portfolio every year, $390 of that is basically being absorbed by the funds that I’m in. Um. And the other big thing that I think is a detriment to a 401k is administrative fee.

Tim Baker: So this covers the cost of running the plan, record keeping compliance, compliance tests, and maybe legal fees. Um, [00:17:00] so there’s really no getting away because, because these plans are, um. very much tested and looked at by the federal government. There’s a lot of record keeping that goes, and that typically is passed on to the participants, to the investor. So the average administrative fees for a smaller plan can range anywhere from 0.5% to 1%. So if it’s, if it’s 1% and I’m paying 30, you know, 0.39%. On, um, investment fees, that’s 1.39 or almost $1,400 of a hundred thousand dollars. As the plans get bigger, like a mid-size plan, so this is a plan that has assets of 10 to a hundred million. You know, you’re looking at 25 to 50 basis points, so a quarter of a percent to a half percent. And then larger plans, you know, you’re looking at, you know, 0.10, that type of thing, but then you add the investment. You know, the expense ratio, there could also be flat fees associated with, um, [00:18:00] administrative fees, that type of thing.

Tim Baker: So, you know, it’s important to, to understand this and this, this data is hard

Tim Ulbrich: Yes.

Tim Baker: not

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Tim Baker: statement. It’s, it’s not transparent. We talked about how poor, um, financial services can be in terms of transparency. So you could be paying anywhere from. 20 basis points, 2.2% to 1.5% and not know it.

Tim Baker: Right. Um, so it’s important that, you know, and it’s kind of like the, the, the, the rule that if your employer is bigger, typically the plan is better. Not always. If your, if your employer is smaller, typically the worse it is for a participant. Um, so fees are gonna be a big thing. And, and we, what we talked about too is like the last couple things this year, like if you’re inside of a 401k, you can’t really do Roth

Tim Ulbrich: Mm-hmm.

Tim Baker: Which I think from an asset location perspective, it really limits your, in your, your ability to

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Tim Baker: the tax, um, portion of your plan. Um, and I think just if you’re [00:19:00] keeping it there and you’re collecting 4 0 1 Ks, I think it’s harder to manage a cohesive plan that is pointing in the direction that you need to point it in and, and optimize for what you’re trying to do. So are pros, there’s obviously cons and a lot of the pros and cons will kind of. You know, we are kind of the same with the, the second option, which is kind of rolling it into your, your new 401k. Um, they’re very similar.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I think as you’re describing some of the limitations of, of a 401k, you know, we, we’ve seen in the clients that we’ve talked with and, and worked with everything from, Hey, I work for, let’s say, an independent pharmacy that doesn’t even offer. A 401k, or if they do, it might have very limited options, higher fee options, right?

Tim Ulbrich: Very small. E employer all the way up to, I work for a, a giant company where we’ve got, you know, may maybe more options, maybe not more options because of the sandbox that you were talking about, but I might have, you know, lower fees on, on the administrative side as well as the investment options. So 4 0 1 Ks are not all created equal, which, [00:20:00] which really plays into this decision.

Tim Ulbrich: What might I do with. This 401k, this old 401k in terms of either leave it or move it or put it in an IRA, and we’ll talk about here in a moment when, when you go from some of the variants, we’re talking about various 4 0 1 Ks, and you look at something like an IRA rollover, at that moment, we’re starting to level the playing field, right?

Tim Ulbrich: Because once we’re into the open market. You know, those limitations aren’t, aren’t necessarily the same that they were, uh, by any means. We’ve got more options to, to be able to choose from, which might might for some, to be fair, you know, this can be overwhelming and, and I think this is where.

Tim Baker: con.

Tim Ulbrich: It’s a con.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. And I, I, I think about some of the, the employers that I had early in my career, you know, I remember it was about 15, 20 options as you mentioned. And the visual that was coming to mind as you were talking is, you know, if we’re bowling and we got bumper lanes on, right. In terms of like, I can only, you know, mo move so far, thankfully I can’t put the ball in the gutter.

Tim Ulbrich: So if I’m overwhelmed by, you know, asset allocation decisions or choosing investments or not understanding where those investments might want [00:21:00] to go, you know, there, there’s a limited. Menu of choice, which can be valuable, but also as we start to really build the financial plan in a way that it’s, it’s custom to you and your goals and individualized to what we’re trying to achieve long term.

Tim Ulbrich: Some of those options that we have might be more valuable as well as you articulated, really trying to keep those fees down because as we’ve covered in this podcast many times before the, the erosion of the portfolio that can happen due to those fees can, can be very real over the long, long term. Tim, one other idea that just came to mind that I wanna get your thoughts on.

Tim Ulbrich: Uh, and, and probably I’m bringing my, my own personal experience bias here. ’cause I made this mistake on, uh, Jess and I made this mistake on her 4 0 3 B very early, uh, in, in our, uh, investing career is, it was a very small account, wasn’t there for a long period of time. We, we chose the option one, do nothing.

Tim Ulbrich: Uh, at that time, admittedly didn’t really have a good idea of what were the options available and it became a, a, a [00:22:00] nuisance after a while I remember getting these statements. Uh, in the mail periodically, and it was like just something we weren’t often thinking about, right? Because it was from a year ago, two years ago, whatever the timeline was.

Tim Ulbrich: And because the account was so small, I felt like the combination of outta sight outta mind and the smaller account balance, uh, drew us into the temptation of perhaps the absolute worst move to make, which is cash out that account. So I, I think, you know, if you, if you think of an account that’s relatively small.

Tim Ulbrich: And is kind of an annoyance factor outta sight, outta mind, that tendency, that risk arguably could increase. Versus if we’re able to combine that with other funds and we, we’ve set an intentional plan and strategy for those funds, I think, I think it might minimize the likelihood of making a decision like that.

Tim Baker: Yeah, and I don’t know if this is one up in you, Tim, but I, I think that. I did the same thing, but it was more of avoidance and they, they said, Hey. They basically, they were sending me [00:23:00] letters that said like, if you don’t do something with this, we’re gonna send you a check. Like, so they cashed it out for me. Um, which is obviously a, you know, something that you don’t want to do. Any, any dollars that you have the, the wall of, you know, a, a Roth or a traditional is

Tim Ulbrich: Mm-hmm.

Tim Baker: And, you know, if you extrapolate, extrapolate those dollars out over the course of a career, even if you don’t do anything with it, um, and it, you know, if we’re invested somewhat, um, appropriately, those dollars are gonna

Tim Ulbrich: Mm-hmm.

Tim Baker: and be, you know, potentially substantial by the end of a 30, 40, 50 year career. So, I mean, those are those, you know, some plans have, You have things built into the plan documents that say if they, if you’re not a

Tim Ulbrich: Right.

Tim Baker: a non participant, meaning you’ve moved on and the, the, the, um, account is this small, then they’re not

Tim Ulbrich: Mm-hmm.

Tim Baker: keep you on their books and they’re gonna basically force [00:24:00] a rollover, um, which. Then if you don’t know what you’re doing, you know, you go to cash and you’re paying the 10% penalty plus, plus the, uh, the taxes. So it might not seem that big of a deal, but I think in the grand scheme of things, it can, it can be. So, yes, absolutely. And, and, and again, I’m, I’m, I’m biased here, but I’m like, that’s

Tim Ulbrich: Mm-hmm.

Tim Baker: advisor.

Tim Baker: Just help

Tim Ulbrich: Mm-hmm. Mm-hmm.

Tim Baker: if you can get the statements, an advisor can do the rest. Um, so I think it’s really important to, um, you know, if you, if you’re. I, I, it’s frequent that I talk to, to pharmacists and they’re like, yeah, I have, you know, I have three old retirement accounts.

Tim Baker: My spouse has two old retirement accounts. We’re finally at a point where we just need to figure out, ’cause like, I’ll ask like, well, know, like, what’s your, you know, and if you, and if we add up these accounts, like there might be half a million dollars, 750,000, maybe even more. And I’m like, well, what’s your philosophy?

Tim Baker: Like, how are you managing it? And it’s like, uh. [00:25:00] Don’t

Tim Ulbrich: Mm-hmm.

Tim Baker: think, I think that, and we’ve talked about this before. A pharmacist with the count kind of money that pharmacists make and what they will amass over the, their course of their career. The sooner they answer that question or work with an advisor to help them answer the question, the more efficient and optimized they

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Tim Baker: The longer that you’re like, I don’t know, or it’s in target date funds, and again, I don’t, I’m not hating on target date funds, but target date funds typically. Don’t, are more expensive and their glide paths of how they transition for from equity to fixed income over the course of the life of the fund is typically not in line with

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. Yep.

Tim Baker: It’s just not

Tim Ulbrich: Yep.

Tim Baker: to me, the sooner that you are. On the path, you know, you’re following a roadmap from a financial perspective, the, the more efficient and it’s, you know, it’s kind of the whole adage of like, work smarter, not harder. Right? And [00:26:00] I think sometimes the dis disjointed, um, investment philosophy across multiple accounts lends itself to just being again, inefficient and wasting time and money that you don’t otherwise have to.

Tim Ulbrich: I think there’s also decision fatigue there. You know, when I think about the, the exam, the example you gave, which is not an uncommon one. You and I were talking about

Tim Baker: Mm-hmm.

Tim Ulbrich: a couple weeks ago and I wrote a blog post on this called The Accidental Millionaire, which is like, Hey, I wake up in my forties and we’ve been saving 10, 15, 20% of our account.

Tim Ulbrich: I. You know, of our income towards various investment accounts, and we wake up and we’re like, oh, wow, we’ve got north of a million dollars a, a fairly common situation. And, and naturally there’s this. Point, not of reckoning, but of like, well now what we, we haven’t really necessarily been super intentional on where we’re going, why we’re going there, what’s the asset allocation?

Tim Ulbrich: What’s the asset location? Are we on track? Are we not on track? I mean, but those unanswered questions can be exhausting and they’re all answerable questions. Right. And I think that’s to the point you’re making [00:27:00] of like, let’s figure ’em out.

Tim Baker: Yeah. I mean, I mean, in the beginning you’re just like, it’s just the start, right? And just get it rolling. And then it’s kind of, you know, you’re kind of shooting first ask questions later, but eventually you need to ask those questions of like, am I truly optimized? And again, like we’re not talking chump change, you know, the, the, the wealth that you should amass over the course of your career. Um. That should sustain you till the end of your life substantial, or it should be

Tim Ulbrich: Mm-hmm.

Tim Baker: um, you know, having a, a plan and a strategy, um, asset location, asset allocation. Again, if all those things sound like foreign to you, that’s okay,

Tim Ulbrich: Mm-hmm.

Tim Baker: you know, but I would say hire an advisor like you need it.

Tim Ulbrich: So option two is we can roll it over to our new employer. So let’s say I worked at a hospital, I had a 4 0 3 b, I left that hospital. I’m now working for another hospital. I do have an option to roll over my [00:28:00] old 4 0 3 B or old 401k to my new employer count. Now this might Tim, bring an advantage of consolidation.

Tim Ulbrich: It could bring an advantage that we have everything in one place. We can see it, we can be intentional. It’s not that out ofci outta sight, outta mind risk that we were just talking about, but it still carries all the similar, same limitations we were just talking about. Of the, of the limited options and fees within the the retirement Plan sandbox, correct?

Tim Baker: Yeah, you, you, you consolidate. So instead of collecting, you know, two or three or 4, 4 0 1 ks, you still have the one, if you leave that job, you can

Tim Ulbrich: Mm-hmm.

Tim Baker: and you still have the one. Um, you know, there are things that 4 0 1 ks offer, like loan provisions and things like that, that IRAs do not, um, that I guess can be a pro, you know, you still have the, you know, the creditor protection, um, under the, the new 401k. it can allow for easier. Backdoor Roth, IRA contributions since it keeps, you know, pre-tax

Tim Ulbrich: Mm.

Tim Baker: out of a traditional

Tim Ulbrich: Mm-hmm.

Tim Baker: So that’s a big, that would be a big plan, uh, plus as well. [00:29:00] But yeah, to your point, the cons are you’re still limited by the investment menu, that you’re still limited by the fees, which I think are substantial compared to, um, an IRA, uh, you can’t do those conversions, which I think are gonna be more important.

Tim Baker: More important down the road. And I think, again, the sooner that you can kind of figure out. How much you should have in each bucket, the easier it is to do. If you’re overly weighted and pre-tax or overly weighted in taxable or Roth, then that’s a problem, um, or can be a problem. Um, and then there’s some plans, Tim, that don’t accept rollovers.

Tim Baker: They just don’t do it. Which I think is becoming more and more rare, but they

Tim Ulbrich: Hmm.

Tim Baker: those do exist. Um, so you might be forced to, to do, you know, to either leave it or roll to an an IRA. So yeah, a lot of the same things. Pros and cons, that you know, your old 401k will follow you to the

Tim Ulbrich: Mm-hmm. Option three, Tim, then is that we could roll it over to an IRA. So we’re gonna move a old 401k, or an old 4 0 3 B, or multiple old 4 [00:30:00] 0 1 Ks. 4 0 3 Bs into an IRA. And I know this is a very common approach. It’s what, you know, I did in my own 4 0 1 a when I left, left Ohio State. Um, and ultimately put that in, into an IRA.

Tim Ulbrich: And the idea is that you could, you know, if you have multiple old accounts, eventually you can consolidate those all into one. So tell us about this option. Why often, but not always. Why often it’s, it may be the preferred option. And, and what are some of the pros and cons here?

Tim Baker: Yeah, so, so the big thing is like, you’re, you’re, you have wider. Investment options, right? So that can be a pro anacon. So you’re, you’re out of the sandbox. You’re not limit to what the 401k offers. And there’s thousands of stocks, bonds, mutual funds, ETFs, that cover all asset classes. So typically of, you know, some of the, the risk associated with investments, 4 0 1 Ks don’t want to do certain asset classes.

Tim Baker: So they say, Hey, we’re just gonna offer these, they’re kind of down the middle and that’s it. [00:31:00] So outside of the 401k and in IRAs, you can really tailor the portfolio to what you want as an investor. So that could be looking at all the asset classes that we mentioned and have a diversified portfolio that way. It could be where you are a vanguard, you’re a boggle head, and you want all Vanguard. Sometimes you can’t do that inside of a 401k ’cause they only offer

Tim Ulbrich: Mm-hmm.

Tim Baker: Fidelity or things like that. Um, most 4 0 1 Ks don’t offer like a digital asset exposure if you believe in that. Um. lot of 4 0 1 Ks won’t allow you to, um, invest directly into stocks outside of the, the, the stock that they, you know, their own, you know, the employer stock. Um, so some people like things like, you know, individual stocks or like right now my brokerage account is invested like direct index in, so this enables you to buy stocks that make up a particular index, like the s and p 500 that has. benefits. So you can book tax losses on positions that [00:32:00] have decreased in value. Um, so these losses can be harvested. Um, even when the, the market is, you know, up overall. So this is another, you know, strategy that one can use that is not available inside of a 401k. And then, you know, if you lean more towards value or growth or emerging market, some of those things might not be available in a 401k.

Tim Baker: So you can kind of get a little bit more nuanced, with what you’re trying to achieve. The big thing here is that. The fees, the fees are often, you know, not the same. So like, like we mentioned, you could be paying north of 1%, one and a half percent, um, in a 401k, which that, that doesn’t necessarily exist in a, in, in IRA.

Tim Baker: Now there’s a caveat, and I’ll get to that in a second. Um, you know, it simplifies the planning, you know, if, if you consolidate counts, which is true if you consolidate a 401k to a 401k. Um, the big thing again, asset location, is that you can convert.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah,

Tim Baker: IRA, which is

Tim Ulbrich: I.

Tim Baker: with the traditional [00:33:00] IRA to a Roth IRA and do that like this has nothing to do with a, a backdoor conversion.

Tim Baker: This is, I have a hundred thousand dollars in a traditional, I’m not making any money this year. I’m gonna put $40,000 from my traditional to my Roth. Pay the taxes when I don’t make, I’m not making any money. basically now I have $40,000 in a Roth and $60,000 in a traditional, there’s a lot of power in that and the ability to do that in a four in a IRA that you can’t do in a 401k.

Tim Baker: So those levers that we’re pulling, um, as we’re in the accumulation phase to then with then go into the withdrawal phase, that’s work that can be done in the accumulation phase that you can’t do on a 401k. Um. The big thing here, and I think from a, a advisor perspective, is follow the money. So why is my advisor telling me that a hundred percent of my time I should roll it over? Typically it’s because that’s how advisors get [00:34:00] paid. So advisors will say, Hey, I can’t help you unless you have a half a million dollars, or, I, I can’t help you unless I have a million dollars. You have a million dollars. What does that actually mean? That means that that advisor only works with clients that have investible assets of a half a million or a million dollars. Investible assets are typically old, 4 0 1 Ks old, 4 0 3 Bs, IRA accounts, Roth IRAs, brokerage

Tim Ulbrich: Yep.

Tim Baker: Any other, any other accounts are typically not. Accounts that tho that advisor can get managed on. So there’s a conflict of interest there in, in their advice to their, to their client or to a prospective client. Um, and that should be known. And again, I think what we have said often, um, and consistently is that in financial services. We are terrible at being transparent with the scope of work that’s being provided [00:35:00] and the fee that’s being charged. It’s often nebulous in terms of the scope of work. Yeah, we do plan and well, what does that mean?

Tim Baker: Are you gonna help me with my, my 401k that I contributed a lot of times? No. Um, are you gonna help me with my student loans? Are you gonna help me with, um, you know, insurance or whatever that is? And a lot of the case like it is. Not explain and the client is left confused. And then how am I being charged?

Tim Baker: And we went through that whole episode, Tim, is it buried in a, uh, insurance product? Um, is it transparent? Can I actually see the fee or not? So what we have found is that, again, transparency and, and explaining the conflicts of interest are important. So if you have an old 401k. And you can roll it over a lot of the times for the reason that we, we talk about it’s important or it’s good for you to do that.

Tim Baker: However, at YFP, we’re gonna bill part of your fee [00:36:00] from that

Tim Ulbrich: Yep.

Tim Baker: It. And what we have found is it’s more of a sustainable relationship with clients if we’re billing them from the assets that we’re managing versus cash flow. What do I mean by that? What I mean by that is if we’re charging 1% on a $500,000, um, you know, old 401k that we’re managing, that is easier for a client to pay than to bill. Um, and pay out a cash flow or to pay out a credit, a credit card, that money is still your money. Money is fungible. It’s still important to understand that

Tim Ulbrich: Mm-hmm.

Tim Baker: that, but, um, from a longevity perspective, it’s easier to pay from an asset. So a lot of advisors say, I can’t help you unless you have that amount of, those amount of assets.

Tim Baker: So I think it’s just be really important to be upfront. I think what a lot of people do is like, they’re like, oh, well I’m, I’m paying 1%, or I’m paying half a percent at my 401k. Like, it doesn’t make sense for me to roll it [00:37:00] over the apple’s. The orange it is, is that if you’re working with an advisor, if they’re doing it correctly, you get access to a comprehensive plan that is going to not only advise on the asset that they’re managing, but the held away assets and every other a, you know, part of the financial plan.

Tim Baker: Right. So. The, the assets is often, are often the engine for which to pay an advisor. It’s just important to know that upfront, which a lot of people don’t

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, I think what you’re talking about there is, is transparency, right? In that model and making sure that we, we understand it as you mentioned, where a fee comes from. Money is money. Um, and as long as we, we, we know where it’s coming from. We feel comfortable. We understand that, that that’s really important.

Tim Ulbrich: And, and I’ll add to your, your discussion, why is longevity of the relationship important? Right. What we know, myself included, yourself included, is that the market cycles are going to have significant ups and downs, and we are in this for the long run, not just the long run to like retirement, like the [00:38:00] long run of our funds, being able to continue to grow and produce a retirement paycheck so that inflation doesn’t erode our purchasing power.

Tim Ulbrich: That means that we need to sustain. The progress and the momentum, not only on our investments, but as you highlighted in every other part of the financial plan. And if the market’s going to do what it has done historically in every five years, we’re gonna have a fairly significant drop of, say, 20% or more.

Tim Ulbrich: Human behavior and emotion suggests that most of us, if we do this completely ourselves at one point, if not more than one point, are going to make a mistake, whether it be buy in high or sell low, and not keeping that long-term horizon in mind and a huge piece of the value equation. Again, we’re only talking about investments key part of the financial plan.

Tim Ulbrich: But of course there’s a lot more than just the investment. Part of the plan is to have a person in our corner that is helping us keep the long-term perspective and horizon, uh, in, in mind because we know that it’s [00:39:00] those decisions If we make them irrationally, which. A lot of us, I’ve done it before. I was telling you, you know, before we hit record, like I’m guilty of back in the day, you know, buying Circuit City Penny stock.

Tim Ulbrich: I was convinced him Circuit City was coming back, like laughable. Right At this moment, you know, I, I’ve cashed out an old 4 0 3 B account. Like these things, when we look at the volatility and this season we’re in right now is just a great reminder. You know, if, if you would’ve been napping the last three months, it’s like nothing has happened in the market.

Tim Ulbrich: Right. But if you’re checking your accounts every single day, especially thinking about those people that are nearing retirement or transitioning out, like palpitations might be happening, we, we need someone alongside of us to say, Hey, we’ve got this. We’ve planned for this, we accounted for this. Let the markets do its thing and we’re gonna be able to weather this and look at the long term perspective.

Tim Baker: Yeah, and like, you know, like we, we were talking about like asset location, like in a RoboAdvisor is not gonna

Tim Ulbrich: Totally.

Tim Baker: most and most, again, most, a lot of advisors aren’t looking at that. They’re. [00:40:00] I’ve had so many conversations in the last couple weeks, Tim, where it’s like I’m, I’ve been working with an advisor, you know, they are like the one I had recently.

Tim Baker: It’s like I have a Roth IRA with them. I have a brokerage account with them, and I’m like, why are you funding a brokerage account? And he’s like, I don’t know, I just recommended him. I’m like, are you maxing out your 401k? He’s like, no. Um, so they’re like, they’re setting up these accounts that they can get paid on. They

Tim Ulbrich: a whole life, A whole life policy or, yeah.

Tim Baker: crappy insurance that they, they don’t need, no help on the student loans. No help on, you know, this goal or that goal. I’m like, did you guys sit down and talk about goals? No. So, and again, like, I don’t want to sit here and like, like talk negative about, but like, that, that’s just not serving your interest.

Tim Baker: Like it’s not serving your interest. And, you know, to me, um. You know, I think what we’re talking about is, is again, looking at this from A to Z, you know, and

Tim Ulbrich: Yep.

Tim Baker: it’s, it’s not like, oh, well, we’re not getting [00:41:00] paid on that directly, so I, I can’t help

Tim Ulbrich: Mm-hmm.

Tim Baker: that’s asinine. So it’s really aligning yourself with a planner, I think that has your best interest in mind. And it’s hard to talk about this without kind of sounding like, you know, Hey, these people are bad. I don’t think they’re bad. I just think it, I think it’s the, the environment that they’re, they are in is not conducive to put in the interest of their clients first.

Tim Baker: You could li you could listen to that and be like, and, and be scared away and be like, well, I don’t wanna work with advisor.

Tim Baker: But I also would say that the majority

Tim Ulbrich: I.

Tim Baker: of, of the people listening to this podcast. I think need an

Tim Ulbrich: Mm-hmm.

Tim Baker: on the level of wealth that we’re, that we’re, you know, we’re talking about, um, know, pharmacists are in the, the top 10 to 15% of income earners in the United States. Those are typically individuals that need professional help, that, you know, it becomes more complicated as your estate grows, the taxes all, you know, the complexity, all that. Um, and again, I think the sooner that you get in front of [00:42:00] that, the more efficient you’re gonna be. So, um. But I, I think us speaking about this directly, ’cause I’m just like, you know, I, I kind of get it exasperated. I’m like, why? Like, why? Because like, you know, I’m, and I’m sure there’s examples in the medical world where

Tim Ulbrich: Mm-hmm.

Tim Baker: is this prescribed?

Tim Baker: Or like, what, what

Tim Ulbrich: Mm-hmm.

Tim Baker: on here? And it’s like, you probably follow the money with the doctor’s office, right? No offense to doctors, but I’m sure there’s, you know, we talk, I’ve talked about this, like when I first got into financial services. We’d have mutual fund, whole mutual fund wholesalers come to our office in a fancy car wearing a fancy suit, taking, take us out to a fancy lunch, show us fancy glossaries of their fancy funds, and said, Hey, Tim, when client X, Y, Z rolls over their half a million dollar portfolio, wink like, use our funds.

Tim Baker: And I’m just like,

Tim Ulbrich: Mm-hmm.

Tim Baker: your funds are. 20 times more expensive than, you know, what, what you can get out there. Are they 20 times better from a performance perspective? Are they 20 times safer for the same amount of performance? And often the time is [00:43:00] the, the answer to that is no. So you know, it is kind of following the money.

Tim Baker: And I think most of the time when you ask advisors, they kind of

Tim Ulbrich: Mm-hmm.

Tim Baker: seat about how they arrive at fees or how they get paid or things like that. And I think that’s a huge red flag.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I think this is really where the fiduciary obligation matters. We throw that term around a lot, but you know, if, if you’re having a conversation with someone about what should I do with an old account? I. Right. We, we, we’ve kind of made the case that in, in many instances, it may make senator to roll, roll it over an IRA, but there may be a case where that doesn’t, for, for whatever reason.

Tim Ulbrich: Um, and so to have that perspective where, you know, yes, this may be where the fees derive, but if that were to be the case or the situation, right? The fiduciary obligations says I’m acting in the best interest of the client as they’re making these decisions. So as we wrap up this third option of rolling it over to an IRA, some of the key benefits I heard you say, were consolidation.

Tim Ulbrich: Right. We have multiple accounts that we can have eyes in one account. We have more investment options. We’re outta the sandbox. We typically can have lower, [00:44:00] lower fees. Uh, as we look at more options. And then asset location, we, we’ve made a case about why asset location is so important and inside of an employer account, we don’t have that same flexibility.

Tim Ulbrich: If we were to want to do things like a Roth conversion, you know, for example.

Tim Baker: And, and if we think about this with the end in mind, like I think if, if I’m building out, like if I’m looking at a client, the, and, and I’m trying to build out a retirement paycheck, I think the perfect makeup of that client in terms of the ability to have a con, like a concentrated focused strategy that I can then spend is. That they have a brokerage account, they have a pre-tax, a rollover, or traditional IRA have a Roth. And then we’re figuring out social security and, and maybe they’re making consultant income and things like that, but that’s essentially it. Like the 401k that they had, we’ve

Tim Ulbrich: Mm-hmm.

Tim Baker: um, they might get some pension dollars.

Tim Baker: That’s great, that’s gravy. But those are the three accounts in which we’re basically [00:45:00] pulling the levers to then say, Hey. You know, you need $55,000 out of your, out of these three accounts, we’re gonna get X per year, or, you know, per month from social security, maybe x from a, a pension, maybe some. But that, that to me is the end in mind.

Tim Baker: You’re not looking at. 401k. Old 401k IRAs. It’s, it’s those three accounts that you’re essentially is your dashboard. I will say, Tim, I just wanna mention, mention the cons on this. So we mentioned of, of doing, going to an IRA, it’s the paralysis by an analysis, right?

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Tim Baker: overthinker, you know, I don’t want these, you know, accounts being stuck in cash ’cause

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Tim Baker: what to do.

Tim Baker: Um. IRAs typically don’t offer loan provisions, which can be both a pro

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, yeah.

Tim Baker: Uh, the creditor protection might be

Tim Ulbrich: Mm-hmm.

Tim Baker: in bankruptcy, IRAs are protected up to 1.512 million, um, under federal bankruptcy law. So, and then per like, different states have different, you know, things, so that might be something to, to consider. Um, and then moving [00:46:00] funds here could complicate like a backdoor

Tim Ulbrich: Yep.

Tim Baker: um, potentially. So those are are the cons. But you know, to me. To me, this is all about transparency, understanding the conflict of interest, um, and knowing, again, like if you’re gonna work with someone, how does, what’s the scope of

Tim Ulbrich: Mm-hmm.

Tim Baker: does the fee get charged? And then being able to make, you know, a, a decision that you think is best for you. I.

Tim Ulbrich: So we’ve covered three options, right? Option one was do nothing. Option two is roll it over to a new employer account. Uh, option three is rolled to IRA to be complete. There’s technically a fourth option, which would be that you could cash it out. I think we’ve made the case for why that’s typically, if not always, not what we want to do, right?

Tim Ulbrich: So. If it’s something we cash out, if it ever hits your bank account, and it’s not a direct rollover to either a new employer account or to an IRA, we’ve got a tax problem on on a traditional account. So that’s gonna be subject to to federal income tax, state income tax, and often because of when those funds hit and it may be a while till your fire taxes, that might [00:47:00] mean we have a surprise coming at tax.

Tim Ulbrich: Tax filing time if we weren’t thinking about what the impact of that was gonna be. So that account’s gonna take a major haircut. Um, and so if at all possible, especially if they, we have a lot of time for that money to grow compound for time, value, money to work its magic, we wanna let those funds continue to do that.

Tim Ulbrich: Uh, whether it mean a rollover or one of the other options we’ve already discussed. All right, as we wrap up here, um, we’ve covered several options of what you can do with an old 401k, 4 0 3 b. As a reminder, we’ve got a brand new guide, uh, that will help give you some more information on this topic. You can download that guide Bests and wor Worst Moves to Make with an old 401k.

Tim Ulbrich: By going to your financial pharmacist.com/moves. Again, that’s your financial pharmacist.com/moves. And if you’re listening to this, say, Hey, I’d love to have a conversation to learn more about Y fps one-on-one fee only financial planning services. We’d love to do that. We work with pharmacists virtually all across the country.

Tim Ulbrich: Uh, you can book a discovery call by going to your financial [00:48:00] pharmacist.com. You’ll see an option to book a discovery call. Tim Baker leaves, leads those calls, typically 45 to 60 minutes in length. It is an opportunity for us to learn more about your financial situation, your goals, what’s going on, not only with something like an old account, but what’s going on with the rest of the financial plan.

Tim Ulbrich: What are the goals? What’s our progress? How are we tracking? We can share more about our services and ultimately see whether or not there’s a good fit for there. So again, your financial pharmacist.com, and you can click on the option to book a discovery call. Tim Baker. Great stuff as always. Uh, thanks so much and, uh, wishing everyone a great week.

Tim Ulbrich: Take care. Thank you so much for listening to this week’s episode of the YFP Podcast. And if you like what you heard, please do us a favor and leave us a rating and review on Apple Podcast or wherever you listen to the show, which will help other pharmacists find the podcast. Before we conclude, I wanna again, thank this week’s sponsor of the Or Financial Pharmacist Podcast, first Horizon.

Tim Ulbrich: First Horizon offers a professional home loan option, a KAA doctor or pharmacist loan that requires a 3% down [00:49:00] payment for a single family home or town home for first time home buyers. 5% for non-first time home buyers, has no PMI and offers a 30 year fixed rate mortgage on home loans up to 8 0 6 500 in most areas.

Tim Ulbrich: The pharmacist’s home loan is available in all states except Alaska and Hawaii can be used to purchase condos as well. However, rates may be higher and a condo review has to be completed. And finally, an important reminder that the content in this podcast is provided for informational purposes only, and is not intended to provide and should not be relied on for investment or any other advice.

Tim Ulbrich: Information in the podcast and corresponding materials should not be construed as a solicitation or offer to buy or sell any investment or related financial products. For more information on this, you can visit your financial pharmacist.com/disclaimer. Thanks so much for listening. Have a great rest of your week.

 [END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

Note: Referral fees from affiliate links in this table are sent to the non-profit YFP Gives. 

Read the full advertising disclosure here.

Bonus

Starting Rates

About

YFP Gives accepts advertising compensation from companies that appear on this site, which impacts the location and order in which brands (and/or their products) are presented, and also impacts the score that is assigned to it. Company lists on this page DO NOT imply endorsement. We do not feature all providers on the market.

$750*

Loans

≥150K = $750* 

≥50K-150k = $300


Fixed: 4.89%+ APR (with autopay)

A marketplace that compares multiple lenders that are credit unions and local banks

$500*

Loans

≥50K = $500

Variable: 4.99%+ (with autopay)*

Fixed: 4.96%+ (with autopay)**

 Read rates and terms at SplashFinancial.com

Splash is a marketplace with loans available from an exclusive network of credit unions and banks as well as U-Fi, Laurenl Road, and PenFed

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP REI 134: From Pharmacy To Real Estate: Why This Couple Invests in Raw, Vacant Land


Quynh and Tri Vu, two professionals who transitioned from pharmacy and IT careers into real estate, share their journey into investing in raw, vacant land and building Secure Land Co.

Episode Summary

Quynh and Tri Vu, two professionals who transitioned from IT and pharmacy to real estate, share their journey into investing in raw, vacant land in this episode of the YFP Real Estate Investing Podcast.

Joined by hosts Nate Hedrick, PharmD, and David Bright, PharmD, Quynh and Tri walk through their early steps in real estate, starting with single-family rentals and moving into the world of short-term rentals like Airbnbs. As their experience grew, so did their ambition, leading them to explore diverse markets and ultimately carve out a niche in the often-overlooked space of raw, vacant land.

They break down what makes land investing unique, detailing the due diligence required, the creative value-add strategies they use, and how they evaluate properties with potential. Along the way, they also share how they balanced their demanding careers while building a real estate portfolio, leaned on community and mentorship, and eventually took the leap into full-time investing through their business, Secure Land Co.

Whether you’re just getting started or looking to diversify your real estate strategy, this episode offers valuable insights, encouragement, and practical advice from two people who made the leap and never looked back. 

Key Points from the Episode

  • 00:00 Welcome and Introductions
  • 00:21 Quynh’s Pharmacy Journey
  • 01:43 Tri’s IT Background
  • 02:12 Diving into Real Estate
  • 02:32 First Steps in Real Estate Investing
  • 03:45 Transition to Land Investments
  • 12:44 Balancing Careers and Real Estate
  • 19:04 Starting a Land Investment Company
  • 19:57 Why People Sell Their Land
  • 20:12 Methods of Acquiring Land
  • 21:35 Becoming Private Lenders
  • 22:17 Due Diligence in Land Investment
  • 23:40 Understanding Mineral and Water Rights
  • 25:46 Value Add Potential in Raw Land
  • 26:50 Owner Financing and Selling Notes
  • 31:17 Diverse Uses for Raw Land
  • 34:18 Getting Started in Land Investment
  • 35:31 Final Infusion Questions

Episode Highlights

“If someone doesn’t want their property, sometimes they’re just happy for someone else to take it over. And a lot of the opportunities that we’ve gotten are from people, sometimes they don’t  want the land anymore.  They may have inherited it, and they’re  just paying back taxes on it. They never wanted it to begin with. Or maybe they bought land thinking that one day they’re going to move there and retire, but their retirement plans might have changed.” – Quynh Vu [19:41]

“When I first thought about land, too, I was thinking beautiful farmland, really green rolling hills. We don’t have that. We have mostly a lot of land that’s in the desert, and people who want land in some of those areas, it’s high desert, higher elevation. So they may want the land to go camping. They may bring out their RV there for, you know, a weekend, a long, like a week trip, or something like that. But they just want land for  that purpose.” – Quynh Vu [31:54]

“ We have properties that are as low as  $2,000 and some of them around $20,000. So there’s a huge range in terms of the cost of the land. So, for a lot of families, it may be more reachable for them.”  – Quynh Vu [33:50]

Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

[00:00:00] 

Nate Hedrick: Hey, Quinn, try welcome to the show.

Quynh & Tri Vu: Hi. Thanks for having us. Hey.

Nate Hedrick: Absolutely. Yeah. Really excited to have you guys here. Uh, Quinn, you and I got the Connect a couple weeks back, and I just, I loved your story, loved that you guys were doing this together. And so we wanted to have you on to discuss, uh, all things real estate, all things pharmacy, and, uh, uh, why don’t we start there then with pharmacy.

Nate Hedrick: Tell us a little bit about your background, um, your, your professions and kind of, uh, uh, how you got there.

Quynh & Tri Vu: Okay. Um, well, I graduated from the University of Texas in Austin and when I graduated I became a pediatric clinical pharmacist. Um, so I worked as a pediatric pharmacist for most of my career. And then even within pharmacy, I was like super involved. Like I did, um, you know, the C-B-I-C-U, the PICU worked night shift, IV room.

Quynh & Tri Vu: Just pretty much everywhere. And I also worked in retail too. So I worked in a community pharmacy ’cause I was a intern, a tech, like all of that stuff, even before pharmacy school. Um, and then back in like 2014, I started kind of [00:05:00] like getting really tired of like working night shift, weekends, holidays, all that stuff.

Quynh & Tri Vu: And my kids were pretty young. I. So I transitioned into like being a manager in the inpatient pharmacy. ’cause I thought it would be like a little bit easier to be a manager, but it was still like pretty crazy. Um, uh, so then after that we went, I worked at an adult hospital too. Went into management, worked, did healthcare administration at adult hospital.

Quynh & Tri Vu: And then the last few years of my career, I worked at a biotech company and did, um, you know, worked with the development team so they can create software for analytics for healthcare organizations.

Quynh & Tri Vu: Yeah, that was for pharmacy. We had a sweet Walmart, 10% discount back, back in the day. Really helpful.

Nate Hedrick: Tri, you are, you are not a pharmacist, right? So I, that doesn’t exclude you from the podcast, obviously. But we still, we still love hearing everyone’s background, so.

Quynh & Tri Vu: Yeah. Um, I’m a recovering IT guy. I was doing it in Dallas and then Austin doing the big boom with [00:06:00] Dell. And uh, then we moved out to California and, uh, yeah, just stayed in that space till about two years ago.

Nate Hedrick: Yeah, we’re gonna dive into that for sure. So it’s great. Thank you.

David Bright: Yeah, both of those careers at face value don’t really scream like real estate, so I’d love to hear how that jump happened. Or how that expansion happened, or what got you excited about real estate. Maybe just give us like the 32nd overview of the things you’ve done in real estate. Just like you gave us the 32nd overview of the variety in your career.

Quynh & Tri Vu: Yeah. So, um, I think we just bought single family houses just for ourselves, right? Just as a owner. And then maybe about eight years ago is when we broke into like Airbnbs and, uh, all the bigger pocket stuff kicked in. Like we did it all like long term rental, short term, midterm. And then, uh, out of state we got into doing burrs and flips.

Quynh & Tri Vu: And uh, I think the last one was like commercial with [00:07:00] partnerships. We moved into, uh, uh, vacant land, raw vacant land. No power, no literacy, nothing. The best one.

David Bright: So. And I feel like that is a, a departure, like you hit long-term rentals, short-term rentals, midterm rentals. We’ve talked about those on different episodes, and we can link to some of those in the show notes where that feels like the very kind of traditional real estate investing, a residential house just like you had bought personally, and then you buy that to rent it out outta state.

David Bright: Flipping those kind of things make sense, but vacant raw land. Is such a departure. So can you just give us the quick pitch of why anyone would invest in raw vacant land?

Quynh & Tri Vu: Okay, so I was actually, so I had left pharmacy, um, back in 20. Was it 2022? Yeah, 2022. And during, when I left pharmacy, I was working as a residential [00:08:00] real estate agent. And part of it was because our friends kept asking us like, Hey, what are you guys doing? And I was referring a lot of. Clients to my realtor and he was like, why don’t you just get a license?

Quynh & Tri Vu: And then I was like, okay. So I got a license and I started selling houses and um, I was also in a mastermind, so twice in like GoBundance men, and there was a female mastermind, GoBundance women. And I had a good friend who was a land investor. She was doing like Airbnbs, she had long-term rentals, short-term rentals, commercial property, all that stuff.

Quynh & Tri Vu: But she said the thing that she liked the most was land. And I actually didn’t really understand it at all. And she told me she just, you know, bought land from people. She didn’t really, um, she bought land from people who didn’t want it anymore, and then she would sell it to someone else. I was like, well, what would you do with it after you buy it?

Quynh & Tri Vu: Like, do you have to improve it, make it better? And she’s like, no. She just remarket it to someone who’s looking for that type of property. And I was just really [00:09:00] fascinated by it. So then I was like, well, I wanna do what you’re doing. ’cause it sounds to me like you’re just a bank that happens to sell land.

Quynh & Tri Vu: ’cause she told me she also did own our financing for those properties as well.

Nate Hedrick: Hmm. Yeah, and I wanna dig into that because I feel like there’s so many things to unpack there. So, so again, this journey of like. Short-term rentals, long-term rentals, traditional real estate, all the way to this, this step that really we haven’t discussed before in the show. I think it’s unique to a lot of people. Um, but how did you make that initial switch? Like whose idea was it to say, you know what, pharmacy it, like, it’s fine, but let’s think about adding real estate into our, into our portfolios.

Quynh & Tri Vu: We, I think Quinn read like Rich, that poor dad way back in the day and uh, you know, the four hour work week. And we were like, we’re, we’re too poor to do this. Right? We didn’t have any money. We had, we had like a thousand bucks savings after two years or something, and we were like, we can’t afford it. So it just kind of sat there in the back of our heads thinking.

Quynh & Tri Vu: Awesome. And, uh, you fast forward to about [00:10:00] eight years ago, nine, nine years ago, I had, uh, probably my second or third midlife crisis and, uh, she went into management and then first and like 10, 11 years ago. And then I went like shortly after. But, um, man, they don’t, sometimes they don’t train you and you just, you know, ’cause you’re, you’re doing technical stuff, you’re doing well and then you just kinda.

Quynh & Tri Vu: You know, uh, get promoted. I’ve seen a lot of pharmacists too, right outta high school. They’re managers now. Like, how did that happen? You know, you know, so it’s kind of the same situation where like, uh, you’re doing well, they think it would transfer over to other areas. And, uh, we had just a lot of issues with, um, with a lot of outages.

Quynh & Tri Vu: ’cause I was doing operations and um, I was just pulling, I was working like 9:00 AM to like 9:00 PM and after about six months, Quin was like. You gotta find another job. Like it was just, this is too much. And uh, that was like, all right, I gotta do something. I can’t keep, I can’t sustain [00:11:00] this. And years of bigger pockets, like all that.

Quynh & Tri Vu: So subconscious stuff was kicking in, like, try, sell everything, get into real estate. And, uh, I went to meet up, met a realtor that was pitching an invest, like how to invest in, you know. And, uh, single families. And I was like, all right, sign me up. And I didn’t know about loans, I didn’t know about anything.

Quynh & Tri Vu: And then he was like, you don’t have any money. So I had to get a heloc. It took another month. I came back to him, I got money now, and he’s like, all right, let’s go find land, or, uh, let’s go find a house. And I was pretty much making an offer in every house. Like the walls were crook and all sorts of stuff.

Quynh & Tri Vu: We had like GCs coming by, they were walking away like, don’t get it. And I was like, no, we have to do it. We have to do it now. Um, yeah, we was just like, you know how like when you suffer and struggle so much, like the pain is so like you had to do, like, it causes the change. And we were kind of at that point where we were just like struggling with like just too much work and uh, and we didn’t [00:12:00] know how to manage other, and we had to change something.

Quynh & Tri Vu: So that’s kind of when the, when all the equity was like, you gotta do something with equity, it just sits there. It makes no no sense. And all those books and podcasts just kind of kicked in.

Nate Hedrick: I love that we’ve got both of you guys on the show because one of the things that we don’t get to talk a lot about is like, what that was like as, as a couple, like figuring that out as partners. So Quinn, were you immediately on board, like, no, no reservations, like he’s taking. The HELOC and you’re like, yeah, let’s do it.

Nate Hedrick: Buy a house.

Quynh & Tri Vu: No, I was like very, very nervous ’cause I was not listening to BiggerPockets and I was scared and he kept like leaving to go to these meetups and come back, like really excited. And um, every time he would. Know, find a deal. He would like show me. And he was like, oh, what do you think? I’m like, oh no, that’s not good.

Quynh & Tri Vu: Not a good deal then. And then he would like keep coming back to me and say, Hey, like, what questions do you have about it? Let’s talk through that. And then, you know, I felt like that was, he was really patient with the fact that I was like still like nervous and trying to work it through [00:13:00] it with me. And then eventually he was like, okay, well at what price would it make sense?

Quynh & Tri Vu: So I like couldn’t say, no, it’s not a good deal. He was like, what price would it make sense where like all of the risk and stuff would not feel like risk. Um, so then I started like doing like more research and kind of like reading some of the books that he was listening to, listening to the podcast and just getting a better understanding of it.

Quynh & Tri Vu: And I was so nervous because I, I even told him like, we already have one mortgage, like, why would we want another mortgage? And we have four kids. So we wanted to live like in a nice neighborhood, good school district, flat street, cul-de-sac, like very traditional. We never wanted to even get a fancy house where we could only afford under two incomes.

Quynh & Tri Vu: We wanted a house we could afford under one income. ’cause that’s how conservative we were. Um, financially, I. So I was really, really nervous when we started, but I’m, I’m glad that I didn’t like just say, you know, I had to like, learn [00:14:00] more about what made me nervous. But I do think that if you’re at the point where you don’t know the difference between a good deal and a bad deal, you shouldn’t do anything.

Quynh & Tri Vu: You need to figure out at least that much.

David Bright: Yeah.

Nate Hedrick: think that’s great advice and I really like how try approached it of like, Hey, what is the number that makes sense? Is it a dollar? Are we buying this house for 10 bucks? Like, is that the only way this makes sense? Like, well no. Okay, so what is the number? Right? Rather than just none of these work, we’re not buying anything.

Nate Hedrick: I think that’s a great, like bring you along sort of a thing. And then you took the initiative to actually learn the pieces and do the deal analysis and I, I, I think that’s great. ’cause that’s hard for a lot of people out there and I’m sure there’s a ton of people listening right now. One of them is super interested in real estate.

Nate Hedrick: The other one has. No radar for that at all. And so how do you bring those pieces together?

Quynh & Tri Vu: And you know, the other thing too, Nate, that I was, I thought I was being like very conservative because, um. I didn’t wanna invest and try was like saying, well, you know, having only one source of income is kind of risky too. And I never looked at it like that until [00:15:00] he said that.

Nate Hedrick: great point.

David Bright: Yeah, that I, I love that mindset shift of what really is risk. And I think taking that on the question of like, what questions do you have? Creating a lot of that conversation, open communication, I. Sounds like that was all part of this trick that got you to buy the first house, right? And then eventually, it sounds like there was more than that, right?

David Bright: So how did that growth look? And uh, and particularly from a pace standpoint, like you guys described eight or nine years and you’ve already done all these different things, like I think that feels really intimidating to a lot of people. So I’m curious how that story evolved, uh, into the next house, the next house, the next house.

Quynh & Tri Vu: We were just all in. So we got the HELOC that first year, and we bought a house. Then six months later, we’re like, all right, it is working. Just do it again. We spent the rest of the HELOC and then we had to save up ’cause we ran outta money. We’re like, all right, let’s do it [00:16:00] again. So. I saw this chart, you can’t see it back here, but it was a little pyramid, like one year, two doors next year, four doors next year.

Quynh & Tri Vu: It was just a stack, right. It just stacked up and I loved it. And uh, it was two doors, four doors next year, eight doors, and then there’s a little break ’cause we were literally broke. Right. And, uh, ’cause like when you’re in real estate, you’re just stacking money away. All the money you make just goes right back into more property.

Quynh & Tri Vu: It’s delayed for, for sure. Uh, yeah. So that, that little pyramid really helped us, like kind of see the vision and it was kind of gamifying it. Um, but yeah, so we just saved money and reinvested everything.

Nate Hedrick: And during all that, like again, you’re both pretty serious careers. I mean, again, really involved in your careers at the time, even though you’re trying to start making this transition out like. Did you manage that? How did you maintain the balance? Like, was that, was that difficult or, or try, did you just totally step away and say, okay, I’m all in on real estate, let’s make this happen.

Quynh & Tri Vu: Well, the first [00:17:00] couple were Airbnbs and they were local and.

Quynh & Tri Vu: Pretty, um, assertive, uh, property manager helping us. We hired a property manager before we self-managed, and then, uh, we’re like, she’s not doing anything. We could do it. And we got greedy and we started doing rentals by the room. And, uh, that made a ton of money, but that was a ton of work too. Um, so we’re like, all right, we can’t, this is not sustainable.

Quynh & Tri Vu: We had like four listings outta one property. Like it was like four times as much work. But, uh. Was it the Bur book or the long distance investing book? Um, we started like looking, uh, out of state. It was a commercial and BiggerPockets, one of the intros or outros they had is promo, Hey, we do it all. We buy, flip and find a person and then you just buy it from us and we manage it.

Quynh & Tri Vu: And I was like, easy button, let’s do it. And uh, we went the, the property managed route, they find flip property, manage it. And we just did that for, uh, the next couple. [00:18:00] Um. We, we had this problem of shiny object syndrome. So you’re one market and you just keep on buying in that same market. So we got into like eight states or something, uh, just because that looked cool.

Quynh & Tri Vu: That looked cool. Okay. That number looks right, just buy, buy, buy. And um, so yeah, that’s how we kind of scaled, uh, unnaturally through all these other states and through property managers helping us scale.

Nate Hedrick: That’s awesome. Wow.

Quynh & Tri Vu: As far as the balance, yeah, we just had to leverage the, the other, uh, the teams and the, uh, the property managers teams to, to take care of everything.

David Bright: It sounds like it’s part of your story because you hinted earlier, like up until a few years ago, you were doing these things, so it sounds like there. Was some kind of like titration away from your careers and into more real estate. Um, and I know that there are some people out there that are looking to that.

David Bright: There’s some people out there that love their, their pharmacy job and they wanna stay in that. And I can totally [00:19:00] respect both of those avenues, but you guys have done both. So I’m just curious, since you’ve been in, in both of those, you know, the kind of the pros and cons or what made you think now is the time to make that jump?

Quynh & Tri Vu: I, I love this question because when we got to the point where we’re so busy between work and family, and then even if you’re not managing the rentals directly. Everything bubbles up to the owners. If there’s an insurance claim that needs to be made, if there’s some type of complaint, sometimes Airbnb calls us directly.

Quynh & Tri Vu: So we were still like involved and try kind of mentioned like, Hey, one of us needs to leave our job. Do you wanna go first or do you want me to go first? And I was like, I definitely wanna go first. I don’t even know what going first means. I,

Nate Hedrick: That’s awesome.

Quynh & Tri Vu: and then shortly after the following year left his. Those, those good advice that someone gave us. Like if you both were gonna check out and leave your careers, don’t do it the same year. Like one person [00:20:00] does it one year, someone else do it the next year. And um, I guess we were in the circles where like everybody was entrepreneurs and it was like, man, I gotta be one.

Quynh & Tri Vu: I need to leave my job. But. You know, I still, I, I really liked it and, um, it was kind of like a part of a identity thing, to be honest. It’s hard separating it. I’m sure you guys know, like, you know, what do you do? Who are you? You just naturally say, Hey, I do a tech, or I, I’m a pharmacist, and separate. It was hard.

Quynh & Tri Vu: And then when you all in as a entrepreneur, you still kind of miss it. So, um, I don’t think it’s for everybody, like some people are, if you’re good and you like what you do, just stick with it and give someone else money. And then invest passively. Like, you don’t need to like, figure out how to do real estate.

Quynh & Tri Vu: It’s a, it’s still a job until it isn’t a job. Right? So, um, I didn’t think about that initially. Like, flipping houses is literally another career. Like, why would you, if you’re good at tech, why would you learn another skill and have to like rema, you know, take [00:21:00] years to master that before you get good and great at it when you just gave someone the money and then they do it and still enjoy your job.

Quynh & Tri Vu: So. In hindsight, like you didn’t have to follow, we had like shiny object syndrome where I did at that point, like, I need to leave, I need to do, you know, entrepreneurship, give it a shot when like, I liked tech still, like even though it was like operations support, long hours, like it was super fun with the team fixing stuff.

Quynh & Tri Vu: So it really depends on your person.

Nate Hedrick: Yeah. I’m glad you mentioned the identity thing too, because I think a lot of people struggle with that. Even just in like, like for example, like when I got my real estate license, people were like, oh, so you’re done being a pharmacist? Like, well, no, hold on. Like I’m still working. Like you can have two things, but nobody talks that way.

Nate Hedrick: You just like, what is the thing you do for work? Like, or what is what? What do you do? Right? It’s not like. And everyone expects you to be like, I got a degree in blah, blah, blah, and I do x like, and that’s it. Uh, and so I think that’s, that’s a good thing for people to hear is like, it, it can be many things and that’s, that’s enjoyable as well.

Nate Hedrick: So I [00:22:00] think that’s, that’s a really good point. You, you, you landed on.

Quynh & Tri Vu: Yeah. And you know, there’s a lot of skills that I think we learn in our professional careers that translate into real estate investing, which it’s not like, okay, completely foreign. I mean, it’s very data-driven, which pharmacy is. Um, and just like kind of following, hey, what worked well for other people?

Quynh & Tri Vu: So like, just looking at actual case studies, um, other people who have been successful around us, I felt like has really helped us. So having that professional background, I feel like I. Really did kind of give us an advantage. Um, but if you were to just start researching and learning, like we didn’t go to school for, for business, so we kind of felt like when we’re learning about real estate, we had to like learn, we had to read books, we had to listen to podcasts, we had to like go to like a different type of school to learn about it.

Nate Hedrick: I think that’s great though. Like, and, and you have the skills. Both of you like to go in, out and do that, right? We’re all lifelong learners if [00:23:00] we, if we believe that, so that there’s a way to go out and, and get that information, so that’s great. So, so I know now you guys, today you run this, this, land investment company.

Nate Hedrick: I, I want to dig into that. ’cause again, that’s something we’ve not discussed on the show in the past. I think there’s a lot to a lot there. Um, so those listening are probably more familiar with, again, the long and short term rental stuff. But, but give us kind of the background of like, what does it look like to flip raw land?

Nate Hedrick: Like you’ve mentioned it a little bit, but like give us the kind of the, the details of like, looking for these properties and, and how you turn that around.

Quynh & Tri Vu: So great question. Um, in terms of like land, it’s very similar to traditional real estate in that you wanna buy low and you wanna sell high, right? And if someone doesn’t want their property, sometimes they’re just happy for someone else to take it. Take it over. And a lot of the opportunities that we’ve gotten are from people.

Quynh & Tri Vu: Sometimes they don’t want the land anymore. They may have inherited it, they’re just paying back taxes on it. They never wanted it to begin with. Or [00:24:00] maybe they bought land thinking that one day they’re gonna move there and retire. But their retirement plans might have changed. They may have had grandkids in a different part of the country and now they wanna live closer to their grandkids.

Quynh & Tri Vu: So, um, in terms of like how we get deals, we similar to like, you know, people who are doing flips and developments, they’ll send out letters to people asking like, Hey, do you still want your property? Or Have you ever considered selling? Do you know how much your property’s worth? So we do those things in terms of outreach.

Quynh & Tri Vu: In order to acquire land and acquire is sometimes people, even within the land space. They want a change, like everything looks greener on the other side. So they might like, Hey, I don’t wanna be in this state anymore. I wanna be in another state to buy my land. So then they’ll sell us all of their land.

Quynh & Tri Vu: So that’s another way that we can, you know, acquire property. So there’s a lot of different ways. Um, sometimes we buy land from wholesalers. Sometimes [00:25:00] we buy land from tax auction, and sometimes we buy like loans from people. So a lot of different ways in which we can acquire land.

Nate Hedrick: So really similar, honestly, it sounds like, again, we’re talking wholesalers, talking, you know, multiple people that want to get out of a tired investment. Like it almost sounds like you could be talking about single family rentals. That’s cool.

Quynh & Tri Vu: The same thing. So we were doing like cold when doing residential, and it’s literally the.

Quynh & Tri Vu: And then, um, on the tail end, which is kind of new, is like we unintentionally became private lenders when we sell or finance these lots. Um, you could buy lots just like your mortgage gets transferred or sold to another service provider, right? We just found that out recently in the last like six months, a year, that you could buy and sell these notes.

Quynh & Tri Vu: So as we build our portfolio of notes, so we sell our [00:26:00] financed. Buy or sell these things as well. So it’s a new niche that we,

Nate Hedrick: Yeah, that’s interesting. So, so just like, again, like people are buying and selling notes on, on other properties, it’s kind of the same sort of strategy,

Quynh & Tri Vu: yeah, they don’t have to wait as long to recoup.

Nate Hedrick: I. Tell me about, um, due diligence. Like, I’m trying to think of a difference now, right? Like you’re, you’re, you’re teaching me how, how similar it actually is, but like, what about due diligence? Like, you’re not sending out an inspector to see if the roof is collapsing, right? ’cause it’s just trees and bushes and like, so what is that process like for you guys?

Quynh & Tri Vu: Yeah, I mean we have like a team that does like due diligence for us, and what they do is they fill out a report and it has things on there, very basic. Like, Hey, what, how big is the property? What is the parcel number? Um, what is the zoning, what’s the legal description? Is there back taxes owed on it? Um, are there any easements on the property?

Quynh & Tri Vu: Um, you know, [00:27:00] does it have like legal access? Does it have direct road access? So the, the questions that we’re kind of looking at are a little bit, they’re similar to residential real estate, but it’s actually a little simpler because we’re like not worried if the the roof is old. We’re not worried if Central or not No.

Quynh & Tri Vu: Of that stuff. Easier. Yeah. We’re selling one of our rentals and they’re like, Hey, how this list right now? And they’re asking, how old’s the roof again? What about the hvac? What year? I’m like, man, I haven’t heard about that in a while. Have to worry about that. You know? Is there power? No isity, no water. No.

Quynh & Tri Vu: You know, so.

Nate Hedrick: The, the one thing I’ll, I’ll ask then, what about like mineral rights? Does that come up or does it vary based on the property? Like if you know that it doesn’t matter for this property, you just kind of ignore that, or like how does that work for you guys?

Quynh & Tri Vu: That’s, that’s actually a really good question and that’s a common question that we actually get from clients that are, and many [00:28:00] times, like when you buy property, it’ll say something very vague, like if there’s.

Quynh & Tri Vu: It doesn’t say whether or not they actually have mineral rights and most of.

Nate Hedrick: Right.

Quynh & Tri Vu: And if you actually want to have mineral rights, you may have to go through a, like a separate search. Like there’s a specialized company who will kind of trace back through and similar to like title being transferred, mineral rights being transferred, and um, there’s like an hourly rate that they charge just to check.

Quynh & Tri Vu: And even if nothing comes up, you still have to pay that. So we haven’t really. Um, trying to get mineral rights in any area. We just tell people like, we, we don’t know if we have anything, and we just kind of leave it at that. But the other question people do ask though is, do you have water rights? And most of the properties that we do buy.

Quynh & Tri Vu: You know, they’re asking for water rights because they wanna have a well, and many times you can have a well without having any special water [00:29:00] rights. So it may not even be necessary, but they think it’s necessary to ask. So it’s just a good question that comes up pretty often.

Nate Hedrick: Yeah. Cool.

David Bright: I would imagine a lot of these are are like state dependent or area dependent, where there’s probably nuanced questions that exist in certain areas and not in others. Then as well.

Quynh & Tri Vu: Yeah, so we’re in, I think 11, 11 different states now for our land, and every county has different rules and regulations. Every state has regulations too. So depending upon the zoning where the property’s located, we have kind of like a little quick. Tip sheet sheet on each of the properties when people call, ask about it.

Quynh & Tri Vu: Um, our sales team, it.

David Bright: Okay. Um, we’re making so many comparisons to the single family space, one of the other things that I think about is, is the value add. Like, I think we’ve all done the, the thing where you buy an ugly house and you make it pretty and suddenly it’s worth more. Is there a lot [00:30:00] of value add potential with raw land, or is it even easier than that where you’re simply buying and selling without making any improvements or doing any direct added addition to value?

Quynh & Tri Vu: Yeah, there’s opportunities for sure. You get entitled. Subdivided, you could put in easements when they don’t have an easement, you talk to the neighbors to negotiate that kind of stuff. So there’s definitely opportunities to do all that stuff, just like residential, where you could just buy and just sell it to another wholesaler, to another flipper, and then just make the, you know, the margin and the sale or the assignment.

Quynh & Tri Vu: You could do literally the. And, um, because we are buying property from people who don’t want it anymore in, we’re buying it below market value substantially. So the value is.

Nate Hedrick: Hmm. And you mentioned earlier too, about owner financing. Are you, are you doing a lot of the, uh, those properties in that way where your, your finance. It through the owner because they’re [00:31:00] just, they’re looking to do anything with it, or are a lot of those being bought outright and then you’re financing them yourselves, or how does that work?

Quynh & Tri Vu: We started out by, um, when we wanted out a new market, we would get properties.

Nate Hedrick: Mm-hmm.

Quynh & Tri Vu: we weren’t like a lot money in a new area that we, uh, experienced in. And then after we started doing well. Those areas, then we would start buying and mailing out. That’s how we kind of break in by, um, buying owner finance properties.

Quynh & Tri Vu: And then, uh, we, when we acquired the properties, we would own it outright and sell it. A majority of ’em we would own outright and sell it, uh, on terms or sell our finance. That’s probably like 90% of, uh, the business initially. And, uh.

Nate Hedrick: Wow.

David Bright: Wow.

Nate Hedrick: That’s awesome.

Quynh & Tri Vu: Yeah, a lot of sales through, uh, owner finance. I think we sold like 30 last year, and I like, oh, we went crazy. That that was a little too much. Like [00:32:00] we didn’t mean to sell. We were like, man, that’s a lot of money. We just, you know, a little pocket of change right there. So we kind of got gungho selling notes.

Quynh & Tri Vu: And then, uh, we recently started buying notes as well. Um, this year we picked up, I don’t even know, 20.

Nate Hedrick: that’s great.

Quynh & Tri Vu: But yeah, the notes, um, we haven’t played too much in it. Like we’re just kind of winging it, literally. Like it works, let’s just do more of it. And, uh, yeah, so we like notes, but, um, it’s great for cash flow. You’re just getting passive, kind of like passive money, right? You just, you know, they’re just making payments on it.

Quynh & Tri Vu: Um, but the big liquidity events of, uh, if you do a flip or a cash, uh, those are nice too. So I think we’re, our new focus is to balance that out more with more cash flips and, uh, where, um, cash retail prices as well. Yeah. Um, I kind of wanted to mention that because of the space that we’re in, [00:33:00] most people, they cannot go to a bank.

Quynh & Tri Vu: To get a loan. So we’re, we’re lending to them and you know, we’re not doing very many checks on like their credit and their how worthy they are to be a buyer. However, we’re holding onto the deed, we’re selling to them on contract. So if they stop paying us, we still hold the deed and we have the ability to remarket that property.

Quynh & Tri Vu: And it’s now at a lower cost base. There’s no process because. Never had title.

Nate Hedrick: Yeah.

Quynh & Tri Vu: So it’s a nice, it’s a weird way. There’s a, there’s a few nuances that you’re gonna have to undo. Uh, think about residential, like re residential. Like you have when you buy the house, you get a loan, you have the title to the house, right?

Quynh & Tri Vu: Like it’s in your name. And then if you stop paying the bank with foreclosed to get it back, not like that land in our situation. And, uh, there’s a few other like weird things, [00:34:00] residential.

Nate Hedrick: I think it, it’s funny you mentioned that because like one of the things I think about with residential especially is like if you buy a house and like even if it. It goes really sideways, right? Things, things are way more expensive than you thought. Like at least you still have a property that you can sell.

Nate Hedrick: Like in my head, my first thought is like, I bought this raw farmland from this guy and now nobody wants to live here, and I’m stuck with this big parcel of land. Like, what do I do? Like, do you guys go through that? Is that ever, like, is that a problem? Or are you just like, no, we find perfect land every time.

Quynh & Tri Vu: So what do you usually do, right? You find markets that, uh, do well? How do you do that? You run comped. What has sold in last six months, 12 months compared to what has listed days on market? You literally do the same thing. Uh, the only caveat is if I own finance it. It’s not recorded. The title doesn’t change, so you don’t know I sewed it at all.

Quynh & Tri Vu: So when you run comps, you may have to run comps on what’s listed versus what’s been sewed because it hasn’t been like recorded yet. So it’s a little bit of a [00:35:00] twist. Like you, you know, I don’t know how long it’s been listed. It’s still listed like, you know, as it been sewed. So you’re gonna have to kind of play with other investors in that market to figure out if they’re really selling it, if they’re not selling it or financing it, or, you know, they just, they don’t sell.

Quynh & Tri Vu: So that’s the tricky part.

David Bright: I, I feel like another thing I would have to undo. From the, the residential side is, I feel like from everything I’ve done on the residential side, the purpose of land is to put a residential structure on it. You know? So, and it sounds like not everything would, even in this world, would even, like, the purpose would be to build anything on it, residential, commercial, anything. It sounds like some of the, the land uses. Outside of that, can you help people kind of get outta this box of residential and think about what other land uses may be where someone would want to rent or buy land for, for different purposes?

Quynh & Tri Vu: Yeah. No, that’s, that’s such a good point because when I first thought about land too, I was thinking like [00:36:00] beautiful farmland. Right, like really green rolling hills, we don’t have that. We have mostly a, a lot of land that’s like in the desert and people who want land. Um, in some of those areas it’s like high desert, like higher elevation.

Quynh & Tri Vu: So they may want the land to go camping. They may bring out their RV there for, you know, a weekend, a long, like a week trip or something like that. But they just want land for that purpose. Or maybe they have dirt bikes or atv. And they want a place to kind of like romp around without being bothered by people.

Quynh & Tri Vu: Um, other people want land as like for off-grid living. They may be planning to build like a tiny home. They do not want to be on any type of public utilities. Like they want to be on septics solar. They don’t want to be, um, subject increases in. Like increases in rates, like, you know, your water bill, your [00:37:00] electricity bill, like as those rates increase, like they don’t wanna be to deal with that kind of thing.

Quynh & Tri Vu: They wanna live off grid. Um, the other type of person that might wanna buy land is someone who is thinking about doing homesteading. They’re really worried about where their food comes from and what’s going into that food. So they may want to, you know, just have land just to know where their food is coming from.

Quynh & Tri Vu: And then other people want land for legacy. We have a lot of grandparents that are getting land just to pass on to their kids, and they don’t really care what you can do with the land. They just wanna say like, Hey, I’m giving this to you when I pass away. And the costs, you know, it, it would be hard for a grandparent to give like.

Quynh & Tri Vu: 20 pieces, 20 properties, 20 houses away. But because like some of the properties that we do have in the vacant land space, I mean, we have properties that are two, [00:38:00] 2000 as low as 2000. And some of them, you know, like around 20,000. So there’s a huge range in terms of the cost of like the land. So it’s, for a lot of families it may be more like, like reachable for them.

Nate Hedrick: So if you’re out there, and I guarantee there’s somebody listening right now that’s like, okay, this sounds like my thing. I don’t want to deal with leaky roofs and tenants and stuff. Like I’m in, like I, you guys have sold me. Like how do you get. on this. How do you get started? Is like, like you said earlier, like is it all just education or do we like where, where, where’s the first step?

Quynh & Tri Vu: I mean to school for it. Like I signed up for like a.

Nate Hedrick: Mm-hmm.

Quynh & Tri Vu: Program. We went through flight school and then we did, that was like a 12 week program where we learned like kind of the basics about land investing. And then after that we signed up for a one year coaching [00:39:00] program where we had like a land investment expert kind of walk us through as we grew our inventory and portfolio.

Quynh & Tri Vu: We just wanted like a double check and guidance as to like where we should buy.

Nate Hedrick: I love that. I think that’s so relevant to so many people. Listening is like, you don’t, it doesn’t just magically show up in your head like, you have to go out and, and learn this stuff. Like, I think that’s super important. Yeah, I love that. it. Alright, well we wanna take you guys. This has been great.

Nate Hedrick: I wanna take you to our, our final infusion questions, three questions we ask all of our guests that come on the show. So a bit, bit of rapid fire here. Um, but if you, uh, could each, each respond we’ll have, we’ll have Quinn go first on each one of these. Just kinda give you your response. Um, so the first one is, what’s one tangible strategy that you used to make sure that your investing was working hand in hand with your career?

Quynh & Tri Vu: I. It [00:40:00] should match your lifestyle, right? So if you are at the point where you’re so busy, right, like you’re driving kids around and you’re working a ton of hours, evenings, weekends, holidays, it might not be a good idea to start flipping houses, right? Because, you know, like you have to, there’s a lot of like management.

Quynh & Tri Vu: And you, it’s hard for you to physically be there if you’re like at your other job, or even if you decide you wanna take on property management and you’re working like at the hospital or at a community pharmacy, that’s probably not a good idea either, because you’re gonna keep getting interrupted. So I would say whatever you’re deciding to invest in, I would say to see if it aligns with your lifestyle.

Nate Hedrick: I like that.

Quynh & Tri Vu: Yeah, I, I would build on that and say, you gotta know yourself too. So if you’re anxious and you’re, uh, you get nervous, like, and you’re indecisive, right? And then you need like [00:41:00] the black or white answer, maybe not entrepreneurship right? Is a thing for you. Maybe give the money to do it passively. So know your, uh, know your personality.

Quynh & Tri Vu: And, uh, the second part is like, do it with, do it with the community or tribe, whatever that looks like to you. Right? So if you have a friend that’s doing it, or you could join a, a mastermind group, like do it, like, don’t, you don’t, you don’t have to suffer alone. Uh, if you’re still gonna make the plunge and decide to go that route anyhow, and, you know, start investing actively, like do it with some, some friends or NA community to, to help guide you along that journey.

Nate Hedrick: I like

David Bright: Yeah, I love the team sport mentality ’cause there’s so much of that in healthcare that we’re all used to and uh, as you mentioned on your IT team, like how much fun that can be to do this, to do whatever you do with a team. So finding that same in real estate, I think that’s powerful. second question is, what’s one resource that’s been most helpful to you in your [00:42:00] real estate journey, whether that’s a book, podcast person, author, website, whatever that would be?

Quynh & Tri Vu: Um, I would say for me. I think it was bigger pockets when I first, um, when TRI started listening to it, and then I started listening to it. I think the stories that really resonated the most with me were when someone was still working their regular job and they could still do something on the sides.

Quynh & Tri Vu: Like there were stories about bakers that were, you know, doing like rehabs and. I don’t know. The more similar that person was to me, like if they had a family, if they had kids and they were working and they could still invest in real estate, I felt like that really made me feel like it’s possible for a regular person to learn this, uh, for me and my latest craze is, um, podcast this guy.

Quynh & Tri Vu: He reads these fat [00:43:00] biographies of these greats, these legends, right? It could be, uh, new people like Elon and, and Bezos, but it could be like OGs, like old presidents and stuff. So he reads like a ton of these books and dissects it for you. So you’re getting like free mentorship cliff note version with a guy that knows a bunch of adjectives.

Quynh & Tri Vu: So it’s super like, you know, just fun and like, man, that, that wow me. So I.

Quynh & Tri Vu: All the little thing nuances. You know, in the classroom someone raises their hand, they have a question. Yeah, that’s a great question. That’s what’s doing.

David Bright: Yeah.

Nate Hedrick: That’s a great tip. We’ve not had that on the show, so that’s awesome. Alright, and then you guys have already dropped a bunch of this, but I’ll ask it anyway. What if you had to give one piece of advice to somebody just starting out in real estate investing, what would be that one piece of advice?

Quynh & Tri Vu: For me, it would be just learning. Like, don’t [00:44:00] feel like it’s too much to take on. Um, you know, it’s okay to be a beginner and just like, enjoy being a beginner part of, um, part of it’s just learning and making mistakes. Making mistakes, and I feel like, um. Being an expert is someone who has made the most mistakes in an area.

Quynh & Tri Vu: So learning about other people’s mistakes and you know, just learning, always keep learning. I feel like that’s the best way for you to feel better about what type of investment makes sense for you. Yeah, for me, um, you are the average of the five closest people you time with. Man, when you’re flipping the switch and you’re investing and you’re pulling out money outta your heat, like you’re taking a second loan and all that stuff, you’re gonna have family and friends that are like, you’re nuts.

Quynh & Tri Vu: So you gotta protect yourself and surround yourself with people that, you know what? I’ve done it and yeah, let me double check you. It looks good. So I wouldn’t say I had a lot of that in my [00:45:00] life. I was like, don’t. Um. Your target shouldn’t be, your goal shouldn’t be to avoid people like that. Your goal should be going towards people or doing what you wanna do, right?

Quynh & Tri Vu: So, um, you know, we were just looking forward towards like, man, this guy did like all these guests that you guys have on your show. Like, lemme talk to them and then next thing you know, you have a little local chapter meetup or something, or remote chapter meetup. And you get that inspiration, passion up early

Quynh & Tri Vu: versus avoiding, you know what away.

David Bright: I love it. I love it. If people wanna reach out, learn more about y’all, find you, where can they find you?

Quynh & Tri Vu: Okay, so they can, you guys can find us on Instagram. We’re secure Landco, we we’re also on YouTube at Secure Landco. Um, we’re also on Facebook, uh, or you can find [00:46:00] [email protected]. So we’re, if you start us, I think you’ll find us.

Nate Hedrick: Perfect. Well guys, thank you so much for coming on the show, sharing all your knowledge. I, uh, as usual when we have a really good guest, my head is spinning with new ideas and now I’m gonna like go out and send mailers to go buy raw land. Like I just, this has been great. So thank you guys so much for coming on and sharing all this with us.

Nate Hedrick: I.

Quynh & Tri Vu: Oh.

David Bright: Thanks so much.

 [END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

Note: Referral fees from affiliate links in this table are sent to the non-profit YFP Gives. 

Read the full advertising disclosure here.

Bonus

Starting Rates

About

YFP Gives accepts advertising compensation from companies that appear on this site, which impacts the location and order in which brands (and/or their products) are presented, and also impacts the score that is assigned to it. Company lists on this page DO NOT imply endorsement. We do not feature all providers on the market.

$750*

Loans

≥150K = $750* 

≥50K-150k = $300


Fixed: 4.89%+ APR (with autopay)

A marketplace that compares multiple lenders that are credit unions and local banks

$500*

Loans

≥50K = $500

Variable: 4.99%+ (with autopay)*

Fixed: 4.96%+ (with autopay)**

 Read rates and terms at SplashFinancial.com

Splash is a marketplace with loans available from an exclusive network of credit unions and banks as well as U-Fi, Laurenl Road, and PenFed

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 407: Ask YFP: Using 529s for Student Loans & Buying Bitcoin Efficiently


Tim Ulbrich and Tim Baker answer two questions from the YFP community on using 529 funds for student loans and the most cost-efficient ways to invest in digital assets like Bitcoin.

Episode Summary

In this episode, YFP Co-Founder & CEO Tim Ulbrich, PharmD, is joined by YFP Co-Founder & COO Tim Baker, CFP®, RLP®, RICP®, to answer two insightful financial questions from the YFP community.

First, they explore whether it makes sense to use 529 plan funds to pay off student loans. Tim and Tim break down the relevant provisions of the SECURE Act, highlight key limitations and tax implications, and discuss scenarios where this strategy could be beneficial—or not.

Next, they tackle a question about buying Bitcoin efficiently. They compare the most cost-efficient ways to invest, including using various platforms, ETFs, and tax-advantaged accounts like IRAs. They also weigh the pros and cons of each approach, including fee structures, accessibility, and long-term considerations.

Whether you’re considering how to best use your 529 funds or exploring your first steps into cryptocurrency, this episode provides practical, pharmacist-specific guidance to help you make informed financial decisions.

Key Points from the Episode

  • 00:00 Welcome to the YFP Podcast
  • 00:42 Question 1: Using 529 Funds to Pay Off Student Loans
  • 03:35 Options for Overfunded 529 Plans
  • 16:56 Question 2: Buying Bitcoin and Digital Assets
  • 33:24 Conclusion and Listener Reminder

Episode Highlights

”This is not your dad’s 529 plan anymore. What I mean by that is that they continue to make these, I think, more favorable. You have more exit opportunities, if you  will, right, in terms of how these funds might  be used if you run into a situation like an oversave situation, which I would argue is a good problem, right?” – Tim Ulbrich [11:40]

 ”When you buy a spot Bitcoin ETF, you don’t hold the Bitcoin directly.

You just have shares of that fund. But the fund essentially  owns it and you have a partial ownership of the fund. So when you buy it on Coinbase or Robinhood, you’re an owner, right? Your keys are on that ledger. And it’s there for public consumption.” – Tim Baker [19:44]

“ I own Bitcoin both ways. I own it through an ETF, and I own it directly. And part of me is worried that one day I’ll wake up and I’ll hear a story that X, Y, Z was hacked, and all of my Bitcoin is gone. It’s just the reality, right? And that’s one of the downsides of digital assets.” – Tim Baker [20:48]

Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

[00:00:00] 

Tim Ulbrich: Hey everybody. Tim Ulbrich here and welcome to this week’s episode of the YFP podcast where we strive to inspire and encourage you on your path towards achieving financial freedom. YFP co-founder, COO and Certified Financial Planner, Tim Baker joins me to answer two questions. I. Came in from the YFP community one on whether or not it makes sense to use 5 29 funds to pay off student loans. And another question on the most cost efficient way to buy digital assets like Bitcoin. you have a question that you’d like us to feature on an upcoming episode, head on over to your financial pharmacist.com/ask yfp to record your question or send us an email [email protected]. Alright, let’s take our first question from the YFP community, which came to us via email. Tim, what are your [00:01:00] thoughts on using 5 29 savings as a vehicle to pay off student loan debt? Tim, we were talking before the show, maybe a couple different ways to interpret this question. So what? What are your thoughts?

Tim Ulbrich: I.

Tim Baker: Yeah, and we actually interpret it differently. So, um, you know, I. You know, I, I think I, I was looking at this question as almost like, um, using the 5 29 as like a pass through. So like I, I’m a student loan borrower and I have, you know, let’s just say I have $50,000 left to pay off. You know, one of the things that you could do is I could open a 5 29 and I’ll use State of Ohio, which was where we lived, Tim.

Tim Baker: I could put in for this year, $4,000 in my own name, get a state tax deduction for that, and then, you know, if it grows, great, if not, but I can basically just take that $4,000 out and then pay off, you know, 4,000 out of the 50,000 that I still have, [00:02:00] you know, left to pay. So. That is an option, right? That you, you can, you can absolutely do.

Tim Baker: Um, I think the way that you interpreted, and correct me if I’m wrong, it’s like, you know, you were thinking about it from the, the standpoint of like, Hey, I have student loans, but I’m also saving for my kids’ education. Could I potentially use some of what I, you know, am put in towards the boys’ education for my own student loans?

Tim Baker: And I think that is actually an option as well. Now, the big thing, this was one of the, the big things that. Um, either the Secure Act, uh, in 2020 basically allows for, you can now use up to $10,000 lifetime per beneficiary from a 5 29 to pay qualified student loans. So I, I’ve kind of been on record like to say like, I don’t love the the 10,000 lifetime beneficiary ’cause it’s such a drop in the bucket, especially with the kind of loans that we see, but.

Tim Baker: You know, I think that, I think that cap should be higher, but I would imagine that like [00:03:00] lawmakers are trying to preserve the intended use of the 5 29 and not turn it into like a tax loophole or safe haven for like wealthy families. So I would imagine that’s why, um, it just feels like it’s very inconsequential.

Tim Baker: Um, but yeah, so I think you, I think both of those scenarios, Tim can actually. Like happen, right? So you could say, you know, you, you could say, Hey, this, this, you know, maybe you, maybe, you know, your, your youngest has like the least amount. You could say, Hey, this is now my 5 29. You know, I peel off the 10,000 lifetime amount.

Tim Baker: Apply that to my, um. My own loans and then maybe, you know, recategorize that 5 29 back to your youngest. So I think that’s an option. I, I think what I, what the way I want to answer this question, you know, it’s kind of similar to like, you know, when you leave an employer, like what do you do with your 401k and there’s like a, a myriad of options.

Tim Baker: Like you can leave it, you [00:04:00] can cash it out, you can transfer it to an IRA, you can, you know, roll it over to your current employer. So I kind of wanna look at that. This question this way. So like what are the options if you’ve overfunded a 5 29, um, and let’s us just assume, Tim, that there’s no more school for your child, right?

Tim Baker: So I’m gonna use Olivia as an example. Olivia Baker, great student, great swimmer, she’s a junior Olympian. And the breaststroke great kid. But like, I think the way that I would look at this is, um, if she goes to school. And let’s say, you know, she has money left over to me. The, the, the, the, the number that I’m looking at right now is the magic number for Overfunded five 20 nines is 45,000.

Tim Baker: And I’ll kind of break that down here in a second. So the options that we have with Olivia, so let’s assume she goes through school and maybe she gets scholarships or whatever. What do we do with that Overfund at 5 29? The, the one thing that you [00:05:00] could do is you could change the beneficiary, which is kinda what we just talked about.

Tim Baker: Like, yeah, I could change, you could change it in your name, pay off your student loans, and then change it back so you could change the beneficiary to siblings. So I could, I could change it to Liam. I could change it to Zoe. I could change it. To, uh, grandchildren that might not be here. I could change it to aunts and uncles, my parents, nieces and nephews.

Tim Baker: I could change it to Shea if you decide to go back to school or even myself, like we talked about that. So there’s a lot of, there’s a lot of flexibility. What, what to do with that. Um, this, the second option, which we just talked about is what you, you can use $10,000 to pay down student loans. So this applies to the original beneficiary and each of the symbol.

Tim Baker: And so I, this is one of the things I have to clarify. It’s like I, I think I would be able to use it for myself, but I’m not clear on that. You know, one of the, one of the things I was recent researching it says is fors. So if we look at it from that perspective, then for the Baker family, I see this as like a $30,000 benefit, right?

Tim Baker: 10,000 for Olivia, 10,000 for Liam’s student loans, 10,000 [00:06:00] for Zoe student loans. The other option that also opened up in the Secure Act was. The rollover to a Roth IRA that started in 2024. So you can now roll up to 35,000 lifetime from a 5 29 to a Roth. Um, and there’s some contingence, but that’s where I get the, the 45,000.

Tim Baker: So in my mind, those dollars in all intents and purposes are for Olivia’s education. However, to me, if she has. $50,000 in that account when she’s kind of through school, then I think I would probably leave 40, 45, 10 for potential student loans if that were to pop up. And then 35 to roll over to kind of get started on her retirement saving.

Tim Baker: And then I might take that five. And apply it for Liam or Zoe or something like that. The big conditions here, Tim, is that the, the five 20 for us to be able to roll over to a Roth, the 5 29 has to be open for at least 15 years. So we’re thinking like a long-term play. The rollover is limited to the [00:07:00] annual Roth IRA contribution each year.

Tim Baker: So right now that’s seven. Thousand dollars. So you’d have to do it, you know, um, over basically a five year period, seven time, 7,000 times, five years. Now, those, those limits will be different in the future. And the beneficiary of the Roth IRA must be the same as the 5 29. So there’s some hoops that you have to jump through.

Tim Baker: Um, but outside of that, the two other options that I see, and we kind of talked about this. Um, is you can save for future generations. So there’s no time limit on when the funds must be used. So I’ve always looked at this as like the last resort. So like if we, you know, and that’s one of the big fears, people like, I know about five 20 nines ’cause it’s limited in use, blah, blah, blah.

Tim Baker: In my mind, like if I’m given money to grandkids in the future, I’m good with that, right? Like. It’s a good problem to have. Right? And it’s a great tool for multi-generation wealth transfer for the purposes of education. And then the last one that, which I know you’ve brought up that’s like it’s not the end of the world, is like you can always make a non-qualified [00:08:00] withdrawal and pay taxes and penalty, the 10% penalty.

Tim Baker: You typically pay ordinary income tax on the earnings, plus a 10% penalty on the earnings, um, which is not, again, the end of the world. So to me, like the 5 29 as a. Tool to pay off student loans. Yes. Like you can do that. The, the problem is, is that it’s a $10,000 lifetime limit, but I’m also looking at these other avenues potentially, you know, and, and again, like the 45,000, you know, dollar limit.

Tim Baker: Like I’m, I’m thinking of this as like, if there is money left over. It’s probably because Olivia did something that allowed her to kind of not pay as much for, you know, like, I’m thinking like scholarships, right? So I don’t wanna, I still would wanna reward her. So like, you know, I was just kind of checking our numbers of like what we will project to have for her.

Tim Baker: Um, I think we did this exercise in a previous episode. Um, so I just updated those [00:09:00] numbers and, you know, we’re, we’re about 60, you know, we talked about the one third rule. Right now we’re on track to save about 60%. Um, so for her, the future value of her four year education, um, so she’s 10 and a half now. So really in seven and and a half years, we’ll pay about 175,000.

Tim Baker: We’re on track to save about a hundred, we’ll call it 105. Um. So, but we could, we could get there and she could get a swim scholarship and now we have 105,000. And we’re like, what do we do with that? You know? And I think that’s when we start kind of going down that decision tree of like, let’s, you know, let’s keep that 45 for her for potential 10,000 student loans for, you know, 35,000 in Roth.

Tim Baker: And then potentially peel some of that money off for Liam, for Zoe, for whatever. Um, so I think it’s a great question and kind of, you know, again, we interpret it very differently, but I think there’s, I think one of the, the, the feelings for a lot of parents is like, am I locked into this? And I think there’s just a lot [00:10:00] of wiggle room of what you could do with those dollars.

Tim Baker: Um, and I think we’ll continue to be, you know, opened up and, and flexible. But at the end of the day, I think the very last thing that you could do is just pay the 10% penalty. It’s not the end of the world.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I think, um, a couple things of reference. Great stuff, Tim. Um, you know, as you were walking through your example calculations for Olivia.

Tim Baker: Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: reminded me of that episode we did previously, which I wanna make sure we have reference. So that was 360 8. How much is enough for kids college and and the premise of that was we talk all the time about saving for retirement, determining your nest egg. I remember one day, a couple years ago, you had this aha of like, why don’t we apply this same mindset to kids college, right? We have

Tim Baker: Right.

Tim Ulbrich: of thumb framework, the third, a third, a third. We’ve talked about that on this show before, Same for kids. College is a mathematical set of assumptions.

Tim Ulbrich: Just like we think about retirement, sure things may change, will change. Markets will kind of do their thing depending on how we have those invested, but we should be able [00:11:00] to plan. In a similar fashion, especially if we’re looking at this over a long period of time, you know, 15, 18 years that we’re, we’re saving.

Tim Ulbrich: So, um, I wanna make sure we reference that episode as well as two 11 when we talked about the ins and outs of the 5 2 9 college savings plan. So I know some of our listeners, especially may, maybe mid, mid-career pharmacists that have some kids that are in high school, a little bit older, getting ready to go to college, perhaps well versed in this topic, but for others that. Maybe younger kids are wanting to learn more about what, what is the 5, 2 9 and, and how might it fit as a priority of investing in the financial plan given all these other things I have going on, right? Whether it be just starting a family, buying a home, saving for retirement, student loans that are hanging around, how might this fit in as a priority with other. Investments and other things, other goals. So make sure to check out that episode as well. you know, one of the thoughts that came to mind as you were talking is like, thi this is not your dad’s 5, 2, 9 plan anymore. What, what I mean by that is we’ve talked at length the show [00:12:00] that they continue as you highlighted just a few moments ago, to make these, I think, more favorable.

Tim Ulbrich: You, you have more exit. Opportunities, if you will, right? In terms of how these funds might be used if you run into a situation like an over save situation, which I would argue is, is a good problem, right? Whether it be because, hey, my kid got a scholarship, they didn’t think they were gonna get a scholarship or, you know, perhaps they decided that it was a different career path than than college and, and now we’ve got funds, we gotta figure out what to do it.

Tim Ulbrich: There are more exit opportunities now than ever, including some of the most recent ones you mentioned, like the Roth. Conversions, and we’ve got a plan and, and there’s certain details that we’ve gotta think about in doing that. Um, but there are more options than we’ve had before in terms of how these funds can be used.

Tim Ulbrich: And of course, everyone’s situation is different. You know, I’m thinking about parents that might have larger families where there’s multiple kids, or the likelihood of more grandkids versus a single child and what that might look like. So everyone’s [00:13:00] situation, of course, is different, but. I wanna reemphasize that because I, I had a conversation just last week, Tim, with a faculty member at a college who was given advice by a non fee only financial planner.

Tim Ulbrich: And so a shout out to the most recent episode we did on five questions Ask when Hiring a financial planner. the advice was, Hey, you work at a university. Your kids could go to the university of which you work and, and go there for free, which could happen and that’s an awesome benefit, but also may not happen. Um, and therefore like, don’t put money in a 5 2 9 and instead buy a whole life insurance policy. And you know, I,

Tim Baker: I’m shaking my for. Yeah, for, for those that are not watching the video, I’m shaking my head. I, I had a, I had a similar conversation where, you know, somebody was talking about a 5 29 and the advisor was saying, um. They were saying two things. They were saying, don’t put money in a 5, 2, 9, and actually don’t put money into your 401k, [00:14:00] put it in a brokerage account.

Tim Baker: Um, or like an IRA and, and I was like, I was asking the, I know this is the tangent, but I was asking the question. I’m like, you know why they said that, right? Like, not to put money in the four five, the 401k, and not to put money in a 5 29. They’re like, no, why? And I’m like, because they don’t get paid on those accounts.

Tim Baker: So you get. Yeah, like they’re held away accounts, you don’t get paid. I mean, advisors can get paid on a 5 29. Um, like when I was prac, when I was practicing my first, you know, job in financial services, there was a Maryland 5 29, but we used the Virginia 5 29 for most of our, our clients. And you know why that was, Tim, is because Virginia 5 29, at least at the time, like it was open to advisors to get to, to set up and get paid.

Tim Baker: So even though the Maryland. Uh, clients weren’t getting the state benefit like we were. We were be, we were benefiting because we could like earn commissions on that. So like, yeah. I mean, [00:15:00] yeah. Not to cut you off, but like, it’s that, that kind of stuff just like makes me angry.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and what was frustrating about that is, you know, we talked about this when we did the episode on five key key questions to ask for hiring a financial planner is, you know, there’s some half truth slash good

Tim Baker: I.

Tim Ulbrich: in there. Like of course, you know, if I were to still be working at Ohio State, my kids can go to Ohio State.

Tim Ulbrich: Awesome. Like, that’s a great benefit, but one that may not happen. You know, they might say, Hey dad, by the way, like. not cool. I don’t want to go to Ohio State

Tim Baker: Right.

Tim Ulbrich: or, you know, whatever would be the scenario. Um, then also, like that doesn’t just mean like, okay, go, go buy a whole life insurance policy instead because I’m gonna earn a commission off of that.

Tim Ulbrich: So, you know, I, I think it was one of those things that there’s still a lot of advice out there that I hear in talking with pharmacists. I know you hear as well, not, not just that related to the example I gave, but that are operating under. of the older rules in construct and framework around 5, 2, 9 plans.

Tim Ulbrich: [00:16:00] It didn’t have the flexibility and options that it might have today.

Tim Baker: Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: and so, you know, I think that’s something to be aware with.

Tim Baker: Yeah. And I think the last thing that I would, I would just interject here that I didn’t say is that like. You know, if your student gets a scholarship, you can withdraw up to the amount of the scholarship without penalty. You’ll still owe income tax on the earnings. But like, you know, like if, if your, if your kid gets a, you know, a $30,000 a year scholarship to go to x, y, Z school, like, you can take out $30,000 a year without, you know, without, you know, paying that 10% penalty.

Tim Baker: So, again, like it just, you know, there’s just lots of different avenues. To go down to potentially, um, you know, exhaust those funds before you, you know, you get to the point of like, with, you know, making a non-qualified, you know, withdrawal. So, but it’s, it’s a preference, right? Like, you know, I’m just thinking about this whole like, you know, buy a whole life policy.

Tim Baker: It’s, you know, like, Hey, you don’t have to worry about education ’cause you, you know, you work at the university, it’s almost like don’t save [00:17:00] for retirement ’cause you know you’re gonna get an inheritance or something. I don’t know, just it, it’s kind of silly to me.

Tim Ulbrich: All right. Great stuff. I’m sure we’ll talk about kids college more. Um, second question, but, and before I go into this second question, which is around digital assets and, and buying Bitcoin, I wanna reference people, we did a two part podcast series on this topic, so especially for, for folks that. Cryptocurrency digital assets might be more introductory to where this does or does not fit into their financial plan. Make sure to check out those episodes. 3 86 3 87. We’ll link to those in the show notes. We talked about definitions of cryptocurrency, digital assets, some of the origins risks, investment considerations, tax implications, really good comprehensive overview of cryptocurrency, digital assets.

Tim Ulbrich: So great background information. Check out those episodes. Tim, with that backdrop, the question is. What is the best way to buy Bitcoin? What are the pros and cons of using a tax sheltered account versus a brokerage account? And what is a cost efficient way to buy Bitcoin [00:18:00] in a brokerage account using Robinhood versus an ETF?

Tim Ulbrich: What? What are your thoughts here? I.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so very three very different questions, so I’ll kind of unpack them in turn. So the best way to buy Bitcoin, I think this is kind of somewhat analogous to. Like real estate. So like if I’m a real estate investor, you know, I can be a direct owner where I buy a property, let’s say a single family home, and I’m dealing with all of the things, right?

Tim Baker: I have to deal with tenants repairs, contractors taxes, HOAs agreements, things like that, versus the other end of the spectrum, I can just buy. A reit, you know, a real estate investment trust, and that’s probably the most passive way to own a real estate. So a lot of listeners, if you’re not familiar with a reit, you actually might be an investor in a reit, you know, in your 401k or an IRA.

Tim Baker: It’s, it’s a, it’s a very, um. Popular way to invest in, in real estate passively. So if I, if I apply that analogy to [00:19:00] say Bitcoin, you know, purchasing a property directly is kind of like pur purchasing, you know, Bitcoin directly on a platform like Robinhood or Coinbase, Kraken, Gemini. But you’re dealing with a lot of the things and it’s private keys, hot and cold wallets, tax reporting, maybe some worry over, you know, a partial or.

Tim Baker: Permanent loss. So just, just a lot more, even though you’re a direct, you know, owner and there’s benefits of it for that to that like you just have more worry versus like you could just buy the spot. Bitcoin ETF, which launched, I think that was the beginning of last year and it’s probably the most passive way to own Bitcoin.

Tim Baker: So I don’t know if there is a best way. I think if you are more of the keep it simple stupid type of approach, like the spot Bitcoin, ETF is probably the better way. Um. If you like a little bit more of the hands-on then buying it directly I think is. Probably better, right? So when you buy a spot, Bitcoin, ETF, you don’t hold the [00:20:00] Bitcoin directly.

Tim Baker: You just buy sh you have shares or of like, of that fund. But the fund essentially owns it and you have, you know, a partial, uh, ownership of the fund. So when you buy it on Coinbase or, or Robinhood, you’re, you’re an owner, right? Your, your, your keys are on that, on that ledger. And, and it’s, you know, there for public consumption.

Tim Baker: So. Again, like when I talk about real estate, there’s often people that are like, oh yeah, I’m all about it. And then when, when we kind of get into the, the nitty gritty of it and I, I get to the end of like, my presentation, I’m like, if all of this is kind of overwhelming, and we kind of talk about like, you know, um.

Tim Baker: Different, different types of real estate investment. It’s not just like a single family home. There’s hacking and um, just different ways that you can invest in real estate. If you get to the end of that presentation, you’re overwhelmed. I’m like, just buy a reit. And actually, like most of our portfolios, we we’re in real estate.

Tim Baker: Um. I think it’s the, kind of the same, the same way. Because you know, I own Bitcoin both ways. I own it through an ETF and I own it [00:21:00] directly. And part of me is worried that one day I’ll wake up and I’ll hear a story that X, Y, Z, um, was hacked. And like all of my Bitcoin is gone. It’s just something that’s, it’s the reality, right?

Tim Baker: And that’s one of the, that’s one of the downsides of digital assets. So, um.

Tim Ulbrich: a thought here real quick to, to tack on what you’re saying. Um, and not, not an investment advice by any means, but, you know, I look at my portfolio, I’m, I’m interested in some exposure for the reasons that we talked about on previous episodes, but

Tim Baker: Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: I. I have zero interest in, you know, kind of maintaining that myself, but I respect the people where this is partly a hobby, you know, like they, some people just geek out on like going through the transactions and, you know, dealing with the wallet, you know, stuff and figuring out how all of that, uh, fits in.

Tim Ulbrich: Just like, you know, sometimes people like to take a small percentage of their portfolio and do some individual stock type of trading and track that. So I, I think it’s a little bit of like, know thyself in terms of, [00:22:00] first where does this, might it fit overall in your, your financial plan. And I think, you know, for, for our clients, speaking about them in particular, it’s a great conversation to have your financial planner, with the financial planning team of like, is this something I want exposure to in my portfolio?

Tim Ulbrich: And then if yes, does that look like? Right. And I know you’re gonna continue on in terms of some of the types of accounts as well.

Tim Baker: Yeah. Yeah. I mean, it, it, it definitely is that there’s a lot of people that are like, you know, I’m, I’m at a point now where this is not a gimmick. I think, you know, digital assets are here to stay and, and I think the, the advent of the spot Bitcoin spot, Ethereum, ETFs, that launch is. A logical next step for them.

Tim Baker: Like they don’t necessarily have to be wanting to, you know, they don’t wanna deal with hot and cold wallets and private keys. And I completely understand that part of me, what you described is that nerd of like, you know, building, you know, I was invested in digital assets before the, the spot Bitcoin ets, but you know, even, even now, I’m like, eh, should I be doing that [00:23:00] a hundred percent there?

Tim Baker: Now I won’t sell my, I won’t sell my directly held coins, but like I know that there’s risk. If I continue to buy or if I continue to hold them, you know, because of what I just described. So, yeah, just it’s kind of understanding where, where you’re at in that spectrum. So the second question, you know, that was asked is like, what are the pros and cons of using a tax sheltered account versus like a brokerage account?

Tim Baker: And I would just answer, this is like any other investment, right? So like, well, let me just say this, like to, in most cases, the IRA. Um, are, unless, unless it’s a self-directed IRA, you’re typically not holding Bitcoin directly in those IRAs. It wasn’t until, again, the spot Bitcoin. That’s why Ethereum, I. Came out that, you know, the, the general, you know, the broad, um, based investor had access to that.

Tim Baker: So [00:24:00] once those happened, then it really opened up kind of the three main options for tech sheltered versus brokerage account. So the tax sheltered being the tax deferred, which is traditional gross tax free. It’s text coming out. After tax or Roth is tax going in, but you know, gross, tax free, um, and then not tax coming out.

Tim Baker: And then the taxable or brokerage account, which you’re gonna pay capital gains on, right? So, you know, short-term capital gains, if it’s, you know, bought, you know, bought and sold inside of a year and then long-term capital gains if it’s, um, held for longer than a year. So, you know, with an asset that is, that is potentially, um.

Tim Baker: Very much appreciable. I think that’s a word, meaning you buy it and then your hoping that, you know, what’s Bitcoin priced at it right now? Like 93. 93,000 per per Bitcoin. You know, there are some that believe. That, you know, [00:25:00] that it could go up to 250, 400 50,000 per coin, right? So in that case, like something like a Roth would be very, very attractive, if not a traditional.

Tim Baker: And then probably last but not least, the taxable. Now the, the problem with the, the tax sheltered accounts is that for you to access that, do those dollars. And actually spend and consume them. You typically have to be 59 and a half, or there’s a slew of other exceptions, whereas a taxable account, you can access that today.

Tim Baker: Right? So I would just answer this as like any other, um, any other investment. However, if you think that Bitcoin. Will continue to go up and it’s, you view it as a very appreciable asset and something like a Roth is probably the best thing to potentially, you know, pay the tax now, but that asset grows tax free.

Tim Baker: And then when you pour it out potentially in retirement, you know, you’re not having to worry about, you know, taxes then. Um. And then the last part of the question, Tim, was what is the co [00:26:00] the most cost efficient way to buy Bitcoin? So if we go back to the, the, the two best ways to buy Bitcoin, which is the spot, Bitcoin, ET, F, or directly on a PAT platform like Robinhood, Coinbase, Kraken, Gemini, I would say that probably the most cost efficient way would be the spot, Bitcoin, ETF, the expense ratios.

Tim Baker: For those ETFs that are out there, and I think there are, I don’t know, maybe a dozen or so, they range from 0.15% to one point a half percent. So, um, in terms of expense ratio, so this is what the fund takes the et f takes to basically pay their expenses to, to be profitable. So. If you have a hundred thousand dollars in a spot, Bitcoin, e, t, F, and I would say not to have that unless you are very, very, very wealthy.

Tim Baker: Um, you know, a hundred thousand dollars if you’re [00:27:00] paid paying 15 basis points or 0.15%, that’s $150 per year versus a. On the, on the higher end, one, one and a half percent is $1,500 per year that that fund takes, um, to essentially, you know, uh, allow you to have exposure to Bitcoin. Um, if you compare that to platforms like, um, the ones I mentioned, typically the way and every platform has a different price strategy, but typically the way that they price for kind of the smaller trades of said coin is that they charge a spread.

Tim Baker: Um, so, so if you’re buy-in, typically the spread is, um, what the coin is priced at, plus maybe half a percent. And it varies from platform to platform of what you actually buy it at. Um, so if, if, if Bitcoin is, is selling at. You know, 93,000, I might be buying it for 94,000. So you, you, you, you [00:28:00] purchase it on a spread, and then you also sell it on a spread.

Tim Baker: So again, the, the, the, the counter of that is, is true, but then you’ll also also pay typically a transaction fee, or it’s kind of like a commission. So on top of the spread, you’ll pay a, a flat fee. So that can be as little as like a dollar to $2, $3, or it can also be a percentage of what you buy. Um, like I said, every platform is gonna be different.

Tim Baker: Some are gonna be a little bit better than others. Um, you can actually like pay a membership fee, you know, at, at some of ’em to like get better pricing, but you’re paying a membership fee, right? So, um, there’s lots. So I would say just in, in general, even though you’re not holding the coin directly, it’s probably more cost efficient to hold it in a spot.

Tim Baker: Bitcoin, ETF. Than paying the transaction fees of holding the coins directly and the, and the, and the spread. Um, now the greater the volume, so if you’re, if you’re trading [00:29:00] many, many thousands, if not hundreds of thousands. That decision gets, you know, it’s a little bit ’cause because the big difference between like an expense ratio, you pay like an ongoing, like every year you’re paying that with a commission or a spread fee, you pay that one time.

Tim Baker: Right? So that’s, that’s a big difference. Um, so that’s something to consider as you’re thinking about cost efficiency.

Tim Ulbrich: Tim, I’m looking at, uh, the fees for some of the spot Bitcoin ETFs, to your point, ranging from 0.15. So I’m looking at. Options like, uh, the Bitcoin MIDI trust, um, I see some in the 0.2, 0.25 range. Point two, something like the Bitwise, Bitcoin, ETF, all the way up to 1.5, the grayscale Bitcoin trust. That’s a huge range. what is it No different than any other? Range that we look at when we talked about before on the show is, is does the same apply here? That you know, you’re gonna see a big range of fees and, and there’s a question that we have to assess [00:30:00] of like, what am I

Tim Baker: Okay

Tim Ulbrich: fees?

Tim Ulbrich: Why, why such a big spread on these, on these Bitcoin

Tim Baker: It’s a good question. The gray, the grayscale, um, from what I understand has been around even before like the, the grayscale Bitcoin trust that’s priced, its, uh, ticker symbol GBTC and non-investment advice. Um, my belief is that that was around even before the spot Bitcoin ETFs. Um, so I think they changed something when the.

Tim Baker: Like those came online, um, to kind of be like in the same bucket. But those were a thing. I don’t know if they were a mutual fund before, but they were, they were a thing before, like all of these other options came on, and I’m not sure why they’re priced so high. I, I, you could make a case that these types of funds, you know, and then Grayscale came out with the Bitcoin mini trusts, which I didn’t even know.

Tim Baker: Like that was a thing, like when these first launched, you know, the, the spot [00:31:00] Bitcoin, that wasn’t, that’s a newer fund. So I think they’re trying to be more competitive in the space, and I completely honest, I don’t know what the difference is between those two. Um, you know, we, we used two of these in our portfolios.

Tim Baker: Um, and part of it is because, like the, the one company we use is because that’s is all they do. Like they’re experts in digital assets. And I’m not saying like iShares or Fidelity are not. Um, but this is, you know what, this is their main, you know, um, business. This is the remain offer. And so, um, I’m not sure, but I, I, I think you could make a case because of how specialized and really how new these are that.

Tim Baker: You know, these are a, a bargain, and I’m not saying the one and a half, but I’m saying, you know, the 0.15 to, I’d say, you know, 25 basis points. Yeah. And I think, again, it’s competitive market. There’s lots of dollars that float into ’em, especially in the, you know, when they first launched, um, [00:32:00] you know, our expense ratios.

Tim Baker: Um, you know, even with some of these in our portfolios, typically 0.0 5.06. So super competitive and I think super low cost. Um, so I think something special. Typically, the more specialized the fund, typically the higher it is. And this is pretty, pretty dang specialized. So I, I view this as, even though it’s an ongoing cost, it, it gives you all of the things that we talked about that, you know, like you don’t, if I’m, if I hold one of these, like I’m, I’m not having to worry about.

Tim Baker: Cold wallets and security and things like that. This company, and they typically have themselves, and then there’s, they, they typically partner, like I know one of these funds actually partners with Coinbase to kind of do the, the verifying and all the things that they, they have to do per, I believe the SEC, um, and everything, from what I understand from most of these funds, all of these, all of the Bitcoin that they hold is in a cold wallet, meaning it’s off the internet, you know, it’s kind of in cold [00:33:00] storage, you know, which, which really, really.

Tim Baker: Lessens the, or eliminates the ability to like hack it, you know, to like, for someone to get in and steal it. Um, so all of that kind of worry and things that I have with the coins I hold directly, I don’t have that with, with these funds. So I would say for what you get for the price, I think it’s, it’s pretty good.

Tim Baker: Um, so yep.

Tim Ulbrich: Great stuff, Tim. And again, to the listeners episodes 3 86 3 87, we did a broad overview of cryptocurrency, digital assets. Make sure to check those two episodes out. We’ll link to those in the show notes. Thanks so much for listening. Have a great rest of your week.

 

 [END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

Note: Referral fees from affiliate links in this table are sent to the non-profit YFP Gives. 

Read the full advertising disclosure here.

Bonus

Starting Rates

About

YFP Gives accepts advertising compensation from companies that appear on this site, which impacts the location and order in which brands (and/or their products) are presented, and also impacts the score that is assigned to it. Company lists on this page DO NOT imply endorsement. We do not feature all providers on the market.

$750*

Loans

≥150K = $750* 

≥50K-150k = $300


Fixed: 4.89%+ APR (with autopay)

A marketplace that compares multiple lenders that are credit unions and local banks

$500*

Loans

≥50K = $500

Variable: 4.99%+ (with autopay)*

Fixed: 4.96%+ (with autopay)**

 Read rates and terms at SplashFinancial.com

Splash is a marketplace with loans available from an exclusive network of credit unions and banks as well as U-Fi, Laurenl Road, and PenFed

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 406: Should You Pay Off Your House Early?


Should you pay off your mortgage early? YFP Co-Founder & CEO, Tim Ulbrich, PharmD, unpacks the math, emotions, and big-picture factors in the mortgage payoff debate—plus 5 reasons when it may or may not make sense to pay extra on your mortgage.

Episode Summary

Should you pay off your mortgage early? It’s a question that comes up often in personal finance—and the answer isn’t always as straightforward as the math suggests.

In this episode, YFP Co-Founder and CEO Tim Ulbrich, PharmD, unpacks the numbers, the emotions, and the bigger picture behind this important decision. Using a real-life example and the YFP Early Payoff Calculator, Tim walks through how even small extra payments can shave years off your loan term and save you thousands in interest.

But here’s the twist: despite the financial benefits, Tim has personally decided not to pay off his mortgage early. He shares his thought process along with five compelling reasons why making extra mortgage payments might make sense for others.

Whether you’re deep into your mortgage or just getting started, this episode will help you evaluate your options and make a decision that aligns with your long-term goals.

Key Points from the Episode

  • 00:00 Introduction and Episode Overview
  • 00:12 The Big Question: Should You Pay Off Your Mortgage Early?
  • 01:41 Factors to Consider: Math and Emotions
  • 03:59 Using the YFP Early Payoff Calculator
  • 04:45 Real-Life Example: Mortgage Payoff Scenarios
  • 08:00 Opportunity Cost and Financial Decisions
  • 10:29 Personal Decision: Why I’m Not Paying Off My Mortgage Early
  • 11:39 Five Reasons to Consider Paying Extra on Your Mortgage
  • 22:00 Listener Engagement and Conclusion

Episode Highlights

 But as with many financial decisions that we make, there’s the math, there’s the emotions, and there are other goals that we have to consider in the financial plan. We don’t want to fall into the trap of making decisions in a silo.” – Tim Ulbrich [3:46]

“ We have to zoom out and always ask ourselves, what is the opportunity cost of making that financial decision of extra payments? Because anytime you make a financial decision, there’s always an opportunity cost that we have to weigh that against, and we have to consider the math of that opportunity cost as well as the emotions.” – Tim Ulbrich [8:04]

“ The emotional relief here is what we’re talking about where some people say, ‘Hey, that’s important to me. I want head into retirement with no mortgage,’ and that might be a trade off that’s worth considering.” – Tim Ulbrich [19:35]

Mentioned in Today’s Episode

 

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Hey guys, so today I’m tackling a common question that I get and one that I’ve thought a lot about in my own financial situation, and admittedly one that I’ve gone back and forth on throughout the years, which is, should I pay off the house early by making extra mortgage payments? So, what’s the answer, right?

Tim Ulbrich: As I alluded to in the introduction, is it really depends. It depends on a lot of different factors in one’s personal financial situation, and we’re gonna unpack those individual factors today. And there’s both mathematical considerations as there always is, and there’s emotional considerations that we have to factor in when we’re making this decision.

Tim Ulbrich: I think sometimes in personal finance when it comes to topics like paying off debt versus investing, right? These, should I [00:01:00] do this or should I do that? Sometimes we can make these black and white when in fact there are a lot of iterations that we have to consider. And it’s my partner to make often says on the show, you are a unique snowflake.

Tim Ulbrich: Your financial situation is unique, right? And as we’re gonna talk about today, when it comes to paying off the house early, we have to factor in a lot of different things. Whether it be the interest rate, other goals that are going on, what’s the term of the loan? What’s the purchase price of the the house?

Tim Ulbrich: How much did you put as a down payment? All of these things are gonna impact, along with the emotions, how we’re going to approach this decision, and there is no one right answer, right? Because of everyone’s emotions can be different because of how the math can be different based on your individual situation.

Tim Ulbrich: So let’s start with the math. Okay. The, the math doesn’t lie. Making extra payments on your mortgage can cut off a significant amount of time from. [00:02:00] The amount of years you’re gonna be paying off this debt, right? From the term of the loan, especially if you have a 30 year term loan, which is probably for most listening, uh, is is the case.

Tim Ulbrich: Some of you might have a 20 or a 15, 20, not so common. Maybe more. More so on the 15 year side. And we’ve probably all heard something along the lines of, Hey, if you make an extra payment per year, if you make one extra payment per year, it can cut off so many years, right? You might hear four years, five years, six years, seven years off your mortgage.

Tim Ulbrich: We hear that and we’re like, wow, if I could have this paid off in 23, 24, 25 years instead of 30 years, that is significant, right? But as with many financial decisions that we make, there’s the math, there’s the emotions, and there’s other I. Goals that we have to consider in the financial plan. We, we don’t wanna fall into the trap of making decisions in a silo.

Tim Ulbrich: Now, if you use the YFP Early Payoff calculator, we’ll, we’ll make a link to that in our show notes. If you’re not already aware, if you go to our homepage, your financial pharmacist.com, [00:03:00] you’ll see a section that we have a bunch of different calculators that you can use in your own financial plan. And one of those is an early payoff calculator.

Tim Ulbrich: You can use that to run some numbers on your own, and whether it’s a mortgage like we’re talking about today, whether it’s student loans, whether it’s a car loan, any debt that you have, you can run some simulations to say, Hey, if I make an extra lump sum payment, or I add to my monthly payment, or whatever is the frequency of your payment, you can see what that will change in terms of the, the loan term, when you’ll have that paid off, as well as how much interest you’ll say save by making extra payments.

Tim Ulbrich: So let’s, let’s look at an example. If, let’s say that you bought a $350,000 house. Now I know for those of you that heard that, and you’re on the west coast, you’re in the northeast, you’re in the dc, Virginia area, you’re like, Tim, you’re out of touch. You live in Ohio, right? I get it. Walk, walk with me through this example.

Tim Ulbrich: So let’s say you bought a 350,000 house back in 2018, and between the down payment and about [00:04:00] seven years worth of payments that you’ve been making. You now have a balance due of $230,000. Okay? So you bought a $350,000 house. That was the original, uh, mortgage that you have. We had a little bit of a down payment.

Tim Ulbrich: You’ve been making payments over seven years, and now we’ve got a balance due of 233, 200 $30,000. Now, if we assume a 3% 30 year fixed interest rate, now some of you’re like, Tim, what in what world does a 3% interest rate? Where does that come from? Well before the pandemic, that was a pretty common interest rate and a lot of you listening probably locked in your mortgage at that rate.

Tim Ulbrich: And that’s why we have in part, uh, a challenge for many first time home buyers being able to get into homes because existing home buyers with low interest rates don’t wanna move out of their house and give up that interest rate. Now stay with me because if you’re in today’s market of buying a home or you’ve recently bought a home, you know that those days of 3% are long gone.

Tim Ulbrich: And now we’re looking at six to 7%. But stay with me just for this example in [00:05:00] math. So again, $350,000 house 2018. Between the down payment and some payments that we make, we now owe $230,000 and we have a 3% 30 year fixed interest rate. Now, if you were to make an extra $100 per month. Payment on top of the minimum payment that’s due at the end of the loan.

Tim Ulbrich: If we fast forward to when it’s all said and done, you would save about $11,000 of interest and pay off that house about 2.6 years early. Okay, so we turn a 30 year fixed. Loan into just over 27 years. Okay? That’s an extra a hundred dollars a month. If you were to put an extra $200 per month on top of the minimum payment, you would save about $19,000 of interest.

Tim Ulbrich: And now we’re gonna cut off about 4.6 years. Pretty significant, right? 30 years. Now we’re looking at about 25 to 26 years. If you put an extra $300 a month. Or $3,600 a year on top of [00:06:00] the minimum payment, that would now save $26,000 of interest, and we’d pay it off about 6.3 years early. And finally, an extra $400 per month, $4,800 per year.

Tim Ulbrich: We’d save about $31,000 of interest, and that would pay off about 7.6 years early again. 3% interest rate, right? So you get the point extra payments, and you can run these O your own numbers. Again, using the YFP early payoff calculator, we’ll link to that in the show notes, but extra payments, even small, relatively small, a hundred dollars a month.

Tim Ulbrich: Obviously. As that goes up, we see greater savings can lead to significant savings, both in the interest. That we’re gonna save as well as the shaving of some years off of the mortgage. Now if we just stop there, right, and we zoom in onto this one area of the financial plan, and we look at the math. If we make a decision only on that information, I think we’re making a mistake.

Tim Ulbrich: I. Because even if you get to the same decision, we have to zoom out and always ask ourselves, [00:07:00] what is the opportunity cost of making that financial decision of extra payments? Because anytime you make a financial decision, there’s always an opportunity cost that we have to weigh that against, and we have to consider the math of that opportunity cost as well as the emotions.

Tim Ulbrich: That are involved in both the debt repayment here, we’re talking about extra debt on the mortgage and what else you could do with those funds, right? Because you could always do something else with the funds. And that’s true on the other side of the coin as well, if you were to, instead of paying extra on your mortgage, you were to spend that money, let’s say on life experiences, travel, vacation, whatever, there’s an opportunity cost that we have to consider there, uh, as well.

Tim Ulbrich: So the math is intriguing, right? But is it the right move? Again, it, it depends. It depends on a lot of variables. You know, what’s the balance of, of the mortgage, you know, was it a $350,000 house with two 30 left like you saw in this example? Or was it a million dollar home that has $950,000 left on the [00:08:00] loan?

Tim Ulbrich: What’s the interest rate? 3% versus today’s interest rate? Very different outcomes that we might get in terms of the opportunity cost question that I just posed. I’ll share here in, in, in a little bit that for us, in our own situation, when I look at 3% debt, and this is not advice of what you should or shouldn’t do, I look at that and say, Hey, I’m not ready to make extra payments on that because I.

Tim Ulbrich: We could have those dollars working elsewhere for us in the financial plan. Other variables. What are your feelings towards the debt? No right or wrong answer. There are some folks that regardless of the interest rate, there’s an aversion to the debt. And I’m not here to tell you that you’re right or wrong with that.

Tim Ulbrich: We have to acknowledge and understand what is the emotion that we feel towards the debt. What is the monthly cash flow look like? How much margin do we have in the budget? And if we were to put extra towards a mortgage payment. Is there still extra or is there not still extra to do? Other goals and other things that we’re trying to work on?

Tim Ulbrich: And of course, what else is going on in the [00:09:00] financial plan? We know that we’re not only focused on paying off a mortgage. What else is going on? Is there, is there student loan debt? Is there other debt such as credit card debt? Where are we at with the emergency fund? How are we doing with the retirement savings?

Tim Ulbrich: How are we doing with kids’ college savings? What about our experience? Types of things that are important in our financial plan, vacation, travel, et cetera. All of these things we have to look at together. As we try to evaluate how we’re gonna make a decision in one part of the financial plan now personally.

Tim Ulbrich: I’ve decided, we’ve decided, Jess and I, that we’re not going to be paying off the mortgage early. At least not yet. Now why? You, you, you probably can figure out why I just shared, you know, an example that is also true for us. We happen to buy our home in 2018, and I think at the time we bought it at 4.625, I think was the interest rate.

Tim Ulbrich: And we refinanced that in 2019 or 2020 down to 3%. So when I look at a 30 year fixed rate loan at 3%. To me the the math supports making other [00:10:00] financial moves in lieu of making extra mortgage payment. Now my interest rate, our interest rate and how we feel about that, it may be different than your situation and that’s okay.

Tim Ulbrich: Right? That’s okay. So I wanna walk through with that background of mine in mind. I wanna walk through five reasons. When it may make sense to pay extra on your debt, and of course with each one of these, you could apply the opposite to where it may not make sense to pay extra on your debt. So we’ll walk through five different reasons that I want you to be thinking through.

Tim Ulbrich: So number one is aversion to debt or the emotions surrounding the debt, right? All debt is not equal, and everyone’s debt tolerance is different. And as I’ve highlighted a couple times now, and I’m gonna continue to reiterate, the financial plan is not just about the math. Of course, we have to consider the math, we have to weigh the opportunity costs.

Tim Ulbrich: But if we make a decision. It flies in the face of considering the emotions, I think we’re missing, at [00:11:00] least in terms of looking at that decision holistically. And for some, the aversion to debt is strong enough that despite all the numbers screaming, don’t do it. It still might be the right move. In addition to peace of mind, there’s a tangible benefit that can come from a feeling of momentum and progress, and the calculator doesn’t yet have a function.

Tim Ulbrich: To factor in peace of mind and momentum, right? To factor in more the emotional side of this equation. And so I, I joke about that, but in all reality, that’s how we have to think about it. What, what is the mathematical opportunity cost, right? If we use my example of a 3% 30 or fixed rate loan, if I put an extra $200 per month onto that mortgage payment.

Tim Ulbrich: The opportunity cost, just as one example is that I could put $200 a month, let’s say in a Roth IRA or in a 401k or in another type of investment, and we can model that out and mathematically using historical rate of returns, it’s gonna [00:12:00] show that that money invested will be any savings I’m gonna have on the debt repayment.

Tim Ulbrich: However, if I were to have a strong aversion to debt, how do you factor that in, right? We have to be able to weigh that end. I think it would be cool if we had a calculator that could make some assumptions and adjustments accordingly. The number two reason when it may not make sense to pay on your mortgage, of course, would relate to the interest rate, right?

Tim Ulbrich: Having low interest rates. I mentioned that in our example the 3%, whether fixed or variable higher interest rates on homes have been around long enough that those that are holding onto a 3% mortgage are starting to sound a little bit old and and out of touch with reality. And again, mathematically speaking, the decision and opportunity cost of paying off 3% debt versus 7% debt, as we look at today’s interest rate environment is very, very different.

Tim Ulbrich: That said, one should also consider whether or not they’ll be able to refinance in the future [00:13:00] before you pay down that debt, right? We don’t know where interest rates are gonna go, but if you were to buy a home today, in today’s 7% environment. We may not stay at a 7%, we will probably not stay at a 7% environment forever.

Tim Ulbrich: May go up more. It could may go down more. I think probably it will, probably not to 3%, but I think we’ll probably see those come down. So there is an opportunity to refinance, meaning that the way you look at it today at that rate and how you pay down that debt, that might look different if you’re able to refi, say from a 7% down to a 5% or four point a half percent in the future.

Tim Ulbrich: So the higher the interest rate, the more the math favors extra payments. The less convincing the argument becomes that these dollars could be used elsewhere in the financial plan. I say this all the time with student loans, right? Not all student loans are created equal. If you have a private student loan that’s at 8, 9, 10, 11, 12%, we might look at that very differently than you would have say, a federal loan at four or 5% is one example.

Tim Ulbrich: [00:14:00] So not all loans are created equal and the interest rate, and therefore the opportunity cost decision changes. As the interest rate, uh, changes for that loan. Number three relates to building up equity to have options. Because mortgages are front loaded with interest. For those of you that have a have a home, you know this all too well.

Tim Ulbrich: Hopefully you’ve looked at the amateurization table before. If not, you should pull a statement and check it out. But essentially, these loans are front loaded, meaning that the majority of your payment upfront is going toward interest and every payment that you make a little bit more might just be a few dollars, but a little bit more per month is going towards principal or the original cost of borrowing and a little bit less is going towards interest.

Tim Ulbrich: Eventually you start to flip that payment where a majority goes toward principal and a minority goes toward interest right as you pay off the debt. So because the mortgages are front loaded with interest, if you had a very small down payment. There is a potential that you could find [00:15:00] yourself in an equity buying.

Tim Ulbrich: Well, what do I mean by that? When you have a very small down payment, right? There are loans out there, we talk about them on the show here, they certainly can be a good fit, such as the pharmacist home loan, where you may have 3% down. Some doctor loans out there might even be a little bit less. With a small down payment, there’s always the potential risk of the market.

Tim Ulbrich: Downturn, meaning that house values go the opposite direction of what they have been doing, and that could leave someone what’s known as being underwater on a loan, right? Owing more than the home is worth. Now I think in today’s market that’s probably not likely. Every micro market is very different, but it’s always a possibility.

Tim Ulbrich: And as long as you stay in the market long enough for home values to do what they’ve done historically, that risk is, is fairly small, and that’s why we can often feel comfortable using some of those products out there that have a lower down payment. The other risk to consider is if you find yourself unexpectedly moving, so you buy, you think you’re gonna be there for a long [00:16:00] time.

Tim Ulbrich: Job, family, something comes up, you move one or two years later, and you don’t have enough equity in the home to cover the transaction costs and the down payment on the new home. Now we have ourselves in a potential cash bind, right? And we have to kind of figure that out and work through it. One argument to pay off your home early would be is that as you’re making extra payments, you’re building up the amount of equity that you have in the home, so that if you were to have to move or sell the home, you can be able to use that equity to help you, whether it be with a transaction cost, or putting a new down payment on the home that you move into.

Tim Ulbrich: Now that said, there’s another side of this coin, right? You could also argue that any extra payments that you make. To build up more equity, you could simply just set aside in an investment account or even more conservative, something like a high yield savings account for that purpose if it were to arise, if you were to move.

Tim Ulbrich: And that certainly does make sense and can afford you more [00:17:00] flexibility. But behaviorally, we all know that it’s hard to hold muddy aside for a maybe situation. When you have other expenses that are in front of you right now, of today, right? So equity and paying down your mortgage early to build up equity, it’s kind of that forced position that unless you have a debt vehicle where you’re drawing off of that equity, something like a HELOC for example, it’s kind of there and you’re not thinking about it, versus money that would be sitting in a high-yield savings account, so that that’s the third potential option where it might make sense to make extra payments, maybe at a low down payment.

Tim Ulbrich: You’re trying to build up your equity position in the home. Number four is working towards a milestone, working towards a milestone. So similar to number one, right? Which was that aversion I talked to, to that more, that emotional component. This one working towards a milestone is more about peace of mind than it is the numbers.

Tim Ulbrich: So the most common example I I hear as it relates to this one, working towards a milestone would be entering [00:18:00] retirement without a mortgage payment. This concept of, Hey, I wanna get to retirement and I don’t wanna have to think about this mortgage payment, even if there’s. Funds that are available throughout the retirement plan when you build your retirement paycheck, even if that were to be the case, there’s this mental clarity that many people describe of, Hey, I don’t wanna have a mortgage when I enter retirement.

Tim Ulbrich: So even when the math might say, Hey, you could invest that extra cash, you could do other things, you might be able to get better returns. The emotional relief here is what we’re talking about where some people say, Hey, that that’s important to me. I wanna head into retirement with no mortgage, and that might be a trade off that’s worth considering.

Tim Ulbrich: I. It’s a personal decision, obviously, as, as all of this is for many, but it aligns with the larger goal of financial freedom and security in retirement. And again, back to the, the joke I made about, hey, where do we hit the function on the calculator to add the emotional piece? This would be another example of that.

Tim Ulbrich: Number five, on this list, as we look at some reasons, it [00:19:00] may make sense, and again, the opposite could be true or it may not make sense. Number five is, are your other goals on track? And I mentioned this earlier, but often when we talk about any part of the financial plan here, we’re talking about paying off your house early.

Tim Ulbrich: It could be should I pay extra on my student loan debt? It could be, should I put more towards my investment and retirement? Should I put more in my kids’ 5 29 account? Any one of these we, we can get into the trap and tendency of thinking in a silo. We have to zoom out to look at all of the other pieces of the financial puzzle.

Tim Ulbrich: What else is going on with the financial plan? And again, as we think about opportunity costs, how might those dollars be used elsewhere? Even if we still get to the same decision, yes, I want to, or I don’t want to pay extra on my mortgage. We wanna know that we’ve considered it in the context of other things that are happening in the financial plan.

Tim Ulbrich: So again. It could be emergency fund, it could be student loans, could be kids’ college, could be retirement. All these other things that we’re trying to prioritize and balance. [00:20:00] And if you’re listening and you’re thinking about this decision, should I pay extra on my mortgage or not? If you’re someone who is checking all the boxes, right?

Tim Ulbrich: You’ve built a strong foundation, you’re saving for retirement, you’re on track, kids’ college funding, all the goals are moving where you want them to move and you have extra cash available to pay off extra or put extra towards the mortgage. That’s a very different conversation. Someone who’s asking themselves, Hey, should I pay extra on the mortgage?

Tim Ulbrich: And those other boxes are not checked. So the fifth item we’re looking at here today is what else is going on in the financial plan? Are we on track? Essentially, are we not? And then how we make this decision, whether we’re on track or whether or not might sway us as to whether or not those dollars could be used elsewhere.

Tim Ulbrich: So there you have it, five different factors to think about, or five reasons where it may make sense to pay extra on your mortgage. And I’m really curious to hear your thoughts. So for those that are currently making extra payments, I know several people that might. [00:21:00] Start with a 30 year term and go down to a 15 year term or leave it at a 30, but pay extra on the payments.

Tim Ulbrich: Why have you made that decision? What was it about your personal situation that led you down the path to making extra mortgage payments? Was it the math? Was it feelings? Was it something else? A milestone like I talked about on today’s show, for those that are not paying extra on your mortgage, why have you made that decision?

Tim Ulbrich: Why have you made the decision to let your debt and the term of the loan go out to the life of the loan and focus on other financial goals? Love to hear from you. Send us an email [email protected]. You can also record a voice [email protected] slash ask yfp. Well, thanks so much for joining me today and listening to this week’s episode of the YP Podcast.

Tim Ulbrich: If you like what you heard, do us a favor and leave us a rating and review on Apple Podcasts or Google reviews, which will help other pharmacists find the show. And finally, an important reminder that the content in this podcast is [00:22:00] provided for informational purposes only and should not be relied on.

Tim Ulbrich: For investment or any other advice, information in the podcast and corresponding materials should not be construed as a solicitation or offer to buy or sell any investment or related product. For more information on this, you can visit your financial pharmacist.com/disclaimer. Thanks so much for listening.

Tim Ulbrich: Have a great rest of your week.

 [END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

Note: Referral fees from affiliate links in this table are sent to the non-profit YFP Gives. 

Read the full advertising disclosure here.

Bonus

Starting Rates

About

YFP Gives accepts advertising compensation from companies that appear on this site, which impacts the location and order in which brands (and/or their products) are presented, and also impacts the score that is assigned to it. Company lists on this page DO NOT imply endorsement. We do not feature all providers on the market.

$750*

Loans

≥150K = $750* 

≥50K-150k = $300


Fixed: 4.89%+ APR (with autopay)

A marketplace that compares multiple lenders that are credit unions and local banks

$500*

Loans

≥50K = $500

Variable: 4.99%+ (with autopay)*

Fixed: 4.96%+ (with autopay)**

 Read rates and terms at SplashFinancial.com

Splash is a marketplace with loans available from an exclusive network of credit unions and banks as well as U-Fi, Laurenl Road, and PenFed

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 405: Navigating Retirement Income: How to Turn Assets into a Paycheck


How do you turn your retirement savings into a reliable paycheck? In this episode, YFP Co-Founder & CEO, Tim Ulbrich, PharmD, and YFP Co-Founder & COO, Tim Baker, CFP®, RLP®, RICP®, break down three common strategies for building a retirement paycheck — including how each works, who they’re best for, and the pros and cons to consider.

Episode Summary

How do you turn your retirement savings into a reliable paycheck? In this episode, YFP Co-Founder & CEO, Tim Ulbrich, PharmD, is joined by YFP Co-Founder & COO, Tim Baker, CFP®, RLP®, RICP®, to explore three common retirement income strategies: the flooring strategy, bucket strategy, and systematic withdrawal strategy.

Together, they break down how each approach works, who they’re best suited for, and the pros and cons you should consider. You’ll also hear insights on the emotional and psychological shifts that come with leaving behind a steady paycheck and the importance of building flexibility into your retirement plan.

Whether you’re approaching retirement or just starting to think about your long-term goals, this episode will help you better understand how to create an income stream from your hard-earned assets.

📅 Ready to work one-on-one with a fee-only financial planner? Schedule a free discovery call at  yourfinancialpharmacist.com to learn how our team can help.

Key Points from the Episode

  • 00:00 Introduction and Episode Overview
  • 00:39 The Importance of Withdrawal Strategies
  • 02:18 Building a Retirement Paycheck
  • 04:29 Emotional and Behavioral Aspects of Retirement
  • 05:02 The FIRE Movement and Balance in Retirement
  • 06:32 The Role of Financial Planning Credentials
  • 09:52 Three Key Withdrawal Strategies
  • 11:03 Understanding the Flooring Strategy
  • 24:56 Understanding Risk Tolerance Over Time
  • 27:10 The Bucket Strategy Explained
  • 29:55 Advantages and Disadvantages of the Bucket Strategy
  • 34:45 The Systematic Withdrawal Strategy
  • 45:27 Flexibility in Retirement Planning
  • 46:23 The Importance of Professional Financial Advice

Episode Highlights

“It is a shift because for 30, 40, maybe 50 years, if you’re an overachiever and you’ve saved very, very early in your career, you’ve been socking money away for future you. And now future you is here and it’s like, okay, what do we do? ” – Tim Baker [6:28]

“ One of the cardinal beliefs in retirement, and this can sometimes be hard to swallow, is be flexible. The more flexible that you can be when you retire –  how much you spend in retirement, all that stuff – the odds increase of a successful retirement. And I define a successful retirement, at least at a baseline state of you don’t run outta money.” – Tim Baker [39:54]

“ Will we work part-time? Will we not?  What’s the market doing? What are the goals that we have in retirement? All these things are a good reminder that whether it’s in the accumulation stage or in the withdrawal stage, this is not a set it and forget it, right? This isn’t the strategic plan that we forget about for five years of the organization. We’ve gotta set this plan intentionally. Then we want to be revisiting this because there’s going to be internal and external things that are going to be moving and changing over time.” – Tim Ulbrich [45:54]

“ Your balance sheet and your goals are going to be unique to you and what you’re trying to accomplish. So, I think it takes a tailored approach to get you to where you want to go.” – Tim Baker [48:01]

Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Tim Baker, back to back. Good to have you on the show.

Tim Baker: Good to be back, Tim. What’s good?

Tim Ulbrich: You know this, this episode is, is one I’ve been looking forward to because over the past seven plus years of the podcast, we’ve talked at length about the accumulation side of the equation, right? When it comes to

Tim Ulbrich: saving for retirement, we’ve talked about things like how do you determine how much is enough and what are some strategies. For investing when it comes to traditional retirement accounts. Think 401k, 4 0 3 B IRAs. We’ve talked about options for investing when you’ve already maxed out these accounts and, and we’re gonna link to those episodes in the show notes for folks that want to learn more about the accumulation stage.

Tim Ulbrich: But this episode is really about the other side of the equation, which is one that I don’t think we give e enough attention to, which is the withdrawal strategy. [00:01:00] Hey, we finally get to. This point in the future of retirement and whatever that may look like. And we’ve gotta be able to produce an income for ourselves in retirement that otherwise was provided to us by our employer throughout our career.

Tim Ulbrich: And as obvious as that sounds, I think it’s something we don’t think enough about. And I love how you frame this as a concept of, of building a retirement paycheck. So paint a picture for us of, of what you mean by that.

Tim Baker: Yeah. And, and I think even before I get into that, Tim, like I, I, I don’t think that we’re alone in kind of our ignoring the, you know, kind of the withdrawal phase. I, you know, one of the, one of the things in the CFP curriculum, I. Certified financial planning curriculum is, they don’t really talk about this too much.

Tim Baker: And I think there’s a gap. You know, it’s, it’s all about, hey, amass wealth as much as you can and you know, we’ll get these buckets of money and then when, when we retire, then what? Right. And I even remember the first firm that I ever worked with, it was almost like our clients were driving those decisions, which is not [00:02:00] a bad thing, but we would basically say like, how much do you need this year?

Tim Baker: And then we would, you know. Basically send that to them, distribute those assets in the most efficient way possible. But it wasn’t really us doing analysis of like, okay, what do we need to, you know, what can we spend? Or, you know, how, how do we make this, um, nest egg last us for time? Unknown, right? So. To me, the, there’s, there’s a gap there and I think it’s really important for us to understand that.

Tim Baker: So when, when I think about this, like re like building a retirement paycheck, you know, I, I really think of this as like a multifaceted thing. There’s so many things, you know, just think about it from the accumulation side. You know, we all the different things that go on, like obviously we get a paycheck, but we also have.

Tim Baker: Benefits from our employer, like health insurance. You know, we’re saving for retirement, which is not something we typically do in retirement, but it’s, it’s, you know, it’s the paycheck itself and how do we access these [00:03:00] buckets of money and spend them down in an efficient, a tax efficient way possible, but also like efficient in terms of like your life.

Tim Baker: I finally started reading the book, um, die With Zero, Tim, so I’m, I’m in the beginning parts of that and it’s such a different. Thought process of like, Hey, you get dividends to go on a tangent here. You get dividends from life experiences. So like if you, you know, one of the things I did after I got in the Army is I backpack Europe for, I.

Tim Baker: Four months, right? Just kind of went to the wind and like, this is awesome. You know, kind of a YOLO experience. And what he says in those types of things is like those dividends have paid you back in terms of memories over decades of your life. If you wait to do that when you’re in six, your sixties or seventies, and then you pass away at 90, you have a couple decades but not a lifetime.

Tim Baker: So it’s also spending down. The portfolio in a way that maximizes those types of things. So, you [00:04:00] know, it’s, it’s housing decisions, it’s long-term care planning. All all of those, it’s estate planning. All of these things are, are really important as we transition from accumulation to decumulation. But just in a different way.

Tim Baker: Everything’s still happening very similarly. It’s just, you know, instead of the employer giving you a check, you have to kind of figure that out yourself.

Tim Ulbrich: I am so glad you mentioned Die With Zero. We, we should probably do a whole, a whole separate episode on that. You know, I, I often tell people like, if you read Die With Zero, don’t only read Die With Zero ’cause you’re gonna like drain all your bank accounts.

Tim Ulbrich: Right. But it’s such, it’s such a different concept.

Tim Ulbrich: It’s, it’s so refreshing. Um, and to your point. There’s that dividend component, but it’s also a learned behavior. You know, we start to talk about the tactical side of withdrawals. We have to remember there’s a big emotional piece here. So we can talk about, you know, what’s the best tax efficient way and is it this strategy?

Tim Ulbrich: Is it that strategy and actually getting money outta your account? But that is a mental shift when for [00:05:00] decades. You’ve been putting money in, seeing those accounts grow outside of the, some of the volatility of the market, and all of a sudden we’re making a conscious choice to take money out and see those accounts go down. That’s a piece that gets left out so often as well.

Tim Baker: And, and I don’t, I don’t know why Tim, but for whatever reason, I feel like on my YouTube feed I’m getting a lot of like videos about like the fire movement and people abandoning the fire movement. And, and, and part of the, the struggle with the fire movement, and again, no hate on the fire movement, but is exactly what you’re talking about, but like two extremes.

Tim Baker: Where, you know, I am, I’m saving and saving and saving, and then I get to my freedom number or whatever, and then I’m like expected to be, behave, you know, the shift, be the behavior and spend down. And it’s like, uh, I, I don’t want to, so just like everything in life, it’s about balance, right? And you can’t, you know, we kind of talk about.

Tim Baker: You can’t, you know, do this your whole life. So, you know, listeners can’t see this, but I have an open [00:06:00] hand where you’re, where you spend, spend, spend, and you can’t do this necessarily your whole life where it’s a closed hand and you save, save, save. Because what’s the point, right? So to me, it’s really about finding the balance.

Tim Baker: And this again goes back to the idea, not necessarily of a plan, but planning. With the g on the end planning Corey, uh, Jenks out there. So to, to me, that’s, that’s what this is all about. And again, it is a, you know, it is a shift because for 30, 40, maybe 50 years, if you’re an overachiever and you’ve saved, you know, very, very early in your career, you’ve been, you know, socking money away for, for the, for for future You.

Tim Baker: And now Future You is here and it’s like, okay, what do we do?

Tim Ulbrich: Tim, I remember it’s probably maybe two, three years ago we, we did a retirement series and part of that, and again, we’ll link to some of those episodes in the show notes, but part of the motivation for that was you going through the RICP training. I. And, you know, we talk about [00:07:00] the alphabet soup of credentials behind

Tim Ulbrich: pharmacists.

Tim Ulbrich: I think you’re starting to compete with some pharmacists out there,

Tim Ulbrich: right? With the, the CFP, the RICP and the, the life planning.

Tim Ulbrich: Um, but I remember you going through that certification and despite the experience that you had, obviously the CFP credential, which we feel like has a ton of weight and value in how comprehensive it is in both the education and the experience. It really felt like the RICP for you unlocked. Some other resources, information that perhaps weren’t covered in the same level of detail with the CFP te. Tell us about that.

Tim Baker: Yeah. And, and to go to the CFP, like, like there is a retirement section in the CFP, but a lot of that I think is geared more towards, um, like retirement plans. Like what’s an IRA? What’s a Roth? IRA? What’s a simple, when do you use a defined benefit, you know, for like self-employed people defined benefit or defined contribution plan.

Tim Baker: So it’s, it’s very plan driven. So almost like product driven versus like. [00:08:00] What do we do when we get to the end here? And it’s like I, you know, and for me it was like, I want to be able to answer that question of, Hey, I’m 65, I wanna retire next year. Like, what does that look like? So the R-I-R-I-C-P really focuses on the transition from the accumulation to the de de accumulation phase in retirement and.

Tim Baker: It, it’s really trying to figure how to turn your savings into a retirement income for stream, for time, unknown, right? And the things that’s covered is obviously like rebuilding the retirement paycheck, retirement income planning, but it’s social security and Medicare. It’s tax efficient withdrawal strategies, um, annuities and guaranteed income, long-term care planning, estate and legacy planning and housing decisions, which is gonna be one of the biggest expenses for retirees.

Tim Baker: Um. You know, especially early, early on. So to, to me, it’s really, really important for, it was really important for me to do a deep dive in those things because again, I, I [00:09:00] think the CFP, which is great, and they can’t be, you can’t do a deep dive in everything. It’s almost like, um, you know, a PGY one is what, like a general residency to like a PGY two where you’re, you’re, you’re more specialization.

Tim Baker: I think this is more of the, the PGY two. So my, my belief is, is that if you’re working with a financial planner. They darn well, sure better be a CFP, but I think if you’re in that retirement, you know, close to retirement or in retirement, I, I would say RICP is, is something that they absolutely need to do.

Tim Baker: And some of the strategies that we’ll talk about really cover a lot of the things that I listed that, you know, the RICP goes through.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. And retirement income certified professionals. So that’s what the RICP stands for. For folks that are, are curious about that and, and it’s a timely discussion, Tim, because last week on episode 4 0 4, when we were talking about questions to consider when you’re evaluating hiring a financial planner, one of those big questions was, you know, what’s included in the plan and the planning process, and is there alignment with your.

Tim Ulbrich: Planning needs and the experiences [00:10:00] and credentials and education of the people that are leading those services. So before we jump into the three strategies, two important disclaimers. All right. First and foremost. When we talk about withdrawal strategies and approaches, of course there’s some foundational work that has to be done that will be critical to knowing which of these approaches may make the most sense, right?

Tim Ulbrich: So obviously, how much do we have saved? What buckets are those funds in? What are the retirement goals? What are the potential risks? How might social security fit in? So lots of work to be done before implementing a withdrawal strategy. The second thing that. Of course has to be said is, is every one situation is different.

Tim Ulbrich: Of course, there’s more than three strategies, and this is not intended to be advice. You know, we really feel like the work that we do, our team does one-on-one when we’re doing financial planning with clients. That’s where the application and the implementation of these strategies would come. Again, curious to learn more about their services, go to your financial pharmacist.com.

Tim Ulbrich: Book a discovery call. We’d love to have a conversation. [00:11:00] So, Tim, let’s jump into these three strategies, and with each one you’ll provide a, a high level overview of, of exactly what is the strategy, and then some of the advantages, disadvantages, considerations, and who it may be best for. So let, let’s start with the flooring strategy, which our first of the three strategies tell us about what the flooring strategy is.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so the flooring strategy is probably the most conservative, and it’s probably the most. Neglected is probably not the you use, but I would say one that’s, it’s probably more on the shelf collecting dust for a lot of people. And I, and, and we’ll go through why that is, but it’s a conservative approach, um, that involves creating a layer of guaranteed income, which we call the floor, to cover the essentials that the essential expenses.

Tim Baker: So we’re talking about housing, food, utilities. Healthcare, the things that are gonna go out the door regardless of, of anything. Right? And usually what, what we [00:12:00] use to build the floor are things that provide guarantee, hopefully lifetime income. So that’s typically social security, a pension, if you still have those from your employer or an annuity that you purchase on the market.

Tim Baker: So. This is the best solution to, to mitigate the risk of running out of money. Um, so you essentially, and it, and it, and it’s essentially using like obviously social security and a pension, you know, is something, a benefit, you know, that you, you basically bought into during your career and it’s provided by the US government and or a company.

Tim Baker: An annuity is typically where you’re working with an insurance company to say, Hey, here’s a chunk of money. I want this over my life, you know, over the extent of my lifetime. They don’t know how long you’re gonna live, but they use, you know, tables to kind of figure that out. How much do I get for this chunk of money?

Tim Baker: Um. So the discretionary expenses are then, so once we, once we, once we figure out, okay, these [00:13:00] are the essentials for me to live, then anything above that, the discretionary expenses typically are funded from your remaining investments. So it would be, okay, I still have some money in my 401k or my Roth IRA or a brokerage account.

Tim Baker: Um. So, you know, converting these assets, um, to an income stream, IE like an annuity, eliminates the possibility of like, you withdrawing too much, right? So one might be saying, Hey, this sounds great, what you know, so let’s talk about advantages, but we’ll talk about disadvantages. So the advantages here is that if you can create this floor, it guarantees basic living expenses for life.

Tim Baker: So if you think about that like that. To me, when I hear that is super like peace of mind, 

Tim Ulbrich: Warm blanket. 

Tim Baker: yeah. It’s the, it’s the warm blanket, right? It reduces the, the anxiety about market volatility. So right now, like if you had a floor in place and you know [00:14:00] that a check was coming from an annuity, a pension, and a social security, I.

Tim Baker: To pay the, pay the mortgage if you still have it or you know, all the buy food like you’re, you are inoculated from the craziness that is the market. Right. And that’s the psychological thing, I think is the biggest advantage because I always make this joke. I. You know, I think sometimes my dad thinks I like day trade.

Tim Baker: He is like, oh, what about the market? Every time I see him and I’m like, I don’t know. I don’t, I haven’t even looked at it. You know? And I think he’s kind of preoccupied by that. Right? And, and if you are retired, you’re like, you wanna live, right? You don’t wanna have to worry about the market and, and like where the next paycheck, you know, you know, figuratively speaking is 

Tim Ulbrich: yeah. There can become an obsession with, with

Tim Ulbrich: tracking the market. Yeah, for 

Tim Baker: Yes. Um, I think the other thing is that it reduce, it, it simplifies cashflow management. Um. And it actually, it, it actually also reduces the. The, um, risk for like elder care abuse. So sometimes, you know, if you’ve ever, it’s like, Hey, Mrs. [00:15:00] Jones, why are you getting, you know, why are you redoing your kitchen?

Tim Baker: Or, you know, why are you having solar panels, panels put on your house? Sometimes older people, I. Um, can be at risk for people to defraud them or to, or to sell them things that you don’t need. So if, if, if there’s less money available and, and your money’s coming from a, it’s just less to take, so to speak.

Tim Baker: So one of the things that we, we train on as financial planners is to kind of be aware of some of these things. So if I have a million dollars versus I have 200,000, because I, I, I put a, a large chunk into an annuity, that’s harder for someone to get to. Um. And then, you know, it’s, it’s the custom flexibility.

Tim Baker: You can com, you can pair this with, typically you pair the, you still pair this with a bucket strategy or systemic withdrawal strategy, which we’ll talk about. Um, so those are the big advantages and for a lot of people, you know, that peace of mind and not having to worry about the market. Is why they do this.

Tim Baker: Um, from a disadvantaged [00:16:00] perspective, Tim, it’s redu. It’s, it’s, it can severely reduce your liquidity. So once you purchase that annuity, you’ve taken a chunk out of your IRA or your 401k and given them that to an insurance company. Now what they give back to you is a steady stream of checks for the rest of your life.

Tim Baker: But in the event of emergency or things like that, like that money is not accessible. 

Tim Ulbrich: So, uh, uh, a quick, for instance, Tim,

Tim Ulbrich: I, I might have say a million dollars round numbers, a million dollars in my IRA. And depending on, and we’ve talked about annuities on the show so people can, can check that out and lots of different things to think about there. But I might take or peel off, say, $300,000 of that IRA or 400 or 200, whatever the number is, and convert that to a guaranteed monthly paycheck essentially.

Tim Ulbrich: And we would know what that dollar amount is. And, and then you’re, you’re kind of looking at, uh, you know, what’s the opportunity cost there is what you’re referring to that. Hey, if I don’t have these dollars now, kind of investing and growing, because we’re not just gonna stop [00:17:00] investing our money when we get to retirement, we’re still gonna have some of those dollars

Tim Ulbrich: that hopefully are in a growth phase as well.

Tim Ulbrich: But we’re taking those dollars off the table and saying, Hey, instead, we wanna have this, this guaranteed in income stream.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so it’s really twofold. It’s, it’s the opportunity cost, um, and potentially lower returns. So, you know, what else, you know, how else could that money have grown outside of it just kind of coming to me in the form of a check, but it’s also like, hey, we have a flood or something goes out on the house and I don’t have enough liquid set aside to account for that.

Tim Baker: So now I’m dipping into. Maybe some of my more riskier, volatile investments to cover that. So it’s, it’s both the opportunity cost and then, you know, kind of the, the risk that you need liquidity to. Now again, I would, I would make sure that we have an emergency, you know, the emergency fund never goes away, but sometimes you know, that, you know, you’re an emergency can kind of outpace you know, what, um, what you have liquid.

Tim Baker: The other is inflation risk. So I would say. I don’t know [00:18:00] if it’s all, but I would say most annuities that you’re gonna purchase don’t include a cola, a cost of living adjustment. So if out, if inflation outpaces the growth of the grant, guaranteed income, um, purchase and power may erode. And this is why social security is so powerful.

Tim Baker: And one of the biggest decisions that you make is because every year it kind of keeps pace with inflation. Retirees would argue maybe not as much as it should, but. You know, the, the one of the biggest expense or riders that you could have in an annuity purchase is like some type of in, in adjustment that the, the, or the rate goes up and it’s typically not pegged to cola.

Tim Baker: It’s typically like, Hey, I want a 1% or a 2%, um, kind of arbitrary adjustment every year. And, and that’s expensive. So, you know, this, that’s a big thing is in inflation risk. The other big thing is loss of control. You know, it can feel restrictive. It’s like, hey, I was looking at a million dollars, now I’m looking at half a million dollars, or whatever the case is.

Tim Baker: Um, complexity and cost. So, [00:19:00] um, there’s lots of different flavors of annuities. I kind of believe if you buy an annuity, keep it simple. Um, so there are ones that are more, but you know, you’re gonna have complexity. You’re gonna have costs associated with that, just like you have in investments. Um. And probably the last thing is just kind of dependence on the insurance company and, and their solvency.

Tim Baker: So, and you know, social security backed by the full faith and credit of the US government. So you can argue how, how stable that is. But you know, the insurance company, you know, they’re typically a for-profit. You know, they’re, they’re not the federal government. And while most, um, you know, insurance companies have, you know, state guarantee associations and protections there, there’s limits there.

Tim Baker: So those are the big disadvantages.

Tim Ulbrich: So, Tim, if we just zoom out for a moment. I’m, I’m oversimplifying to kind of make the point here with the flooring strategy, and I thought you said something real important is to not think about these as necessarily three discreet strategies. Often we may have more than one approach, right? So as we talk about these, these three individually, but let’s say I evaluate my monthly [00:20:00] expenses and you know, I determine, hey, it’s gonna be $10,000 for Jess and I in retirement and of that.

Tim Ulbrich: Let’s say $5,000 are essential expenses, the ones you talked about, uh, housing, utilities, food, healthcare, et cetera. And the other five is discretionary things that we wanna be able to do. Grandkids, travel, whatever, right? Eating out, those kinds of things. So with the flooring strategy, the idea would be either between social security, a pension, which maybe some of our listeners might have, but many, many not, and or an annuity. I would try to replace that 5,000. Um, and then as you mentioned, through other assets we would account for, for the other 5,000.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so to kind of take that example, let’s say the, let’s say the floor that we have to set is five grand. So those are for the essential expenses, housing, food, gas, utilities, medical stuff, insurance, all that stuff. So let’s say it’s five. Let’s say social security covers three of that. Then we have a gap in the floor of $2,000.[00:21:00] 

Tim Baker: Now. And this, I ran this example a while ago, so I don’t know if this holds true, but let’s say you’re a 65-year-old male in Ohio and you purchase a SPI a, which is a single premium income annuity. So basically that money, um, gets sent to the, that chunk of money gets sent to the insurance company, and then within a year, you, you can direct how this is, but at least within the, the years, um, you know, you start getting a check back.

Tim Baker: So if we were to, if we were to say, Hey, we, we need $2,000. Um, now this would just be for, if we use you as an example, this would just be for your life. We would probably want to set this up for, you know, basically second to die. So if you were to pass away, Jess would still get this. But for the purposes of this, let’s just say we want $2,000, uh, a month for the rest of your life, um, that would cost you about three, $310,000.

Tim Baker: So that means that we, out of your traditional, or Roth or whatever, your, um, your 401k, we would peel those dollars [00:22:00] off. Um, basically give that to the insurance company. 3000 would come from, your per month would come from your, you know, social security. So you’d get a check for that, and then the, and then the insurance company would send you a $2,000 check for the rest of your life, and then the other 5,000, um, per month or $60,000 a year.

Tim Baker: Would come from what’s left of your traditional portfolio or, you know, if you had other, you know, uh, real estate or things like that. So in that, in that case, those discretionary expenses, you might use some, some version of the bucket strategy and or the systemic withdrawal strategy.

Tim Ulbrich: I’m tracking, and since we’ve talked about annuities now a few times, uh, this was episode 3 0 5, we talked about understanding annuities, a primer for pharmacists. Check that out. Lots of good information in that show. So, Tim, as we, we put a bow on the flooring strategy, we started with the most conservative approach.

Tim Ulbrich: You mentioned that you talked through the the concept of, of essentially being able to replace, create a floor of those fixed [00:23:00] expenses. You mentioned the advantages, disadvantages. And clearly it feels like this would be best for those individuals that are on the more risk averse side of things. And there’s a prioritization over of security potentially over growth.

Tim Baker: Security overgrowth. Yeah. So if you’re, if you’re somebody that’s like, give me all the insurances. You’re probab. This might be more in your camp if you’re like, uh, I want to self-insure, or, I don’t want that much life insurance. Or, you know, I’m, I’m kind of using, you know, an analogy here, but like, this might not be best for you because you, you want more, you know, you’re, you’re more, you know, risk, uh, tolerant.

Tim Baker: So this is someone that doesn’t necessarily worry about, wanna worry about the market and just wants that steady check coming in, you know, for the rest of their life. And, um, you know, yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: Great. So, and I think, you know, I’m, I’m projecting a little bit, but I could see that a lot of pharmacists may, may like that concept or at least a portion of it. Um, I.

Tim Baker: Yeah. And I, I would say I have a pretty, pretty big appetite for risk, but part of me is like, man, if [00:24:00] I give up three 10 and I get 2000 for the rest of my life, just clockwork, and I know that combined with my social security is gonna pay the essentials. I’m not mad at that. You know, I know there’s some people that are like, well, what happens if like, I give three 10 and then I die the next day?

Tim Baker: You know, there, there are cer there, there are certain things where you can get like return of premium or, or different riders. Now everything, all these riders cost money. So, you know, if you add every rider that 2000 might be 1200. So, but there’s, there’s more protection there. But that’s, that’s the kind of the, the push and pull of this.

Tim Baker: So, um. I mean, I, I can see that and, and I’m trying to like project my, like my older self here, you know? ’cause right now I’m just like running gun and, you know, I’m, I’m, I’m more like risk, you know, Hey, all the risk and things like that, I have more appetite for it. But again, in our job is not to project our own risk tolerance on clients, right?

Tim Baker: We need to, you know, 

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, that’s, right. 

Tim Baker: that’s best suited for them. But I, [00:25:00] part of me can kind of see the appeal of this now while I. You know, push that button to move hundreds of thousand dollars of over for that. I don’t know. I don’t know if I would do that.

Tim Ulbrich: I’m, I’m glad you said projecting your older self though. Right? Because this is important that I know. My tendency and I suspect maybe for others is, is we tend to think that our current. Risk tolerance, risk capacity is what we’re going to do also in the future. And may not, or in some cases should not always be the case.

Tim Ulbrich: Right. I’m thinking about, you know, as we’re working on our own individual financial plans and we’re taking a more aggressive investing approach, and perhaps there’s, you know, as we think about our, our plans, there’s some investment in real estate, there’s building to the business. If those things continue to, to grow and there’s fruit from the risks that we took, at some point you wanna really lock in. To some degree lock in the, the gains that have had. Uh, and there’s a different level of risk that I probably should be, will be thinking about at 60, 65 than we are at this phase of life in, in [00:26:00] early forties.

Tim Baker: Yeah, and I kind of think about it like. I used to be able to like, drive, take a road trip and drive for 12 hours and like not blink. And now I’m like, nah, nah, I’m good. Or even like playing basketball with Liam, like, I’m not, I’m not dunking on his head or anything like that. I’m like, I, I’ll shoot the j You know what I mean?

Tim Baker: Like, I like I, because I, I don’t wanna. Get hurt or do something dumb, which I got, I sound so old right now, but like, like I’m just projecting that out, you know, when I’m in my fifties, sixties, seventies, and you know, from a, you know, there might become a time where I’m just like, man, like let’s keep it simple.

Tim Baker: Gimme my check and I can like, you know, just chill and not have to worry about the market or things. I don’t have to worry about the hustle, you know? But I could also see on the other side of that, like we talk about identity and role like. You know, so much of, so some people get in trouble with during retirement because so much of their identity is, is wrapped up in the, in the role that they play.

Tim Baker: And, and, you know, professionally, whether that’s a pharmacist, uh, a financial planner. [00:27:00] So, you know, maybe part of that is still being plugged into the markets or the economy or things like that. But I think that, that, that, that’s a razor’s edge, right? ’cause you can become obsessive about it. Um, so, but obviously I work in this, that I might get to the point where I’m like, I just want to like.

Tim Baker: Flip burgers and like, not have to worry about that stuff. So, um, yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: Good stuff. Let’s shift to the second, uh, withdrawal strategy, which is the bucket strategy. Tell, tell us more about this one.

Tim Baker: Yeah. So, so the bucket strategy is essentially where you divide up your assets into buckets. Um, so the, your funds are segmented into time-based buckets, each with its own investment profile. So. If you look at bucket one, this might be for, you know, your next zero to five years worth of expenses. So these, this is the, the lowest risks.

Tim Baker: It’s basically cash and cash like investments, so might be cash, I bonds, [00:28:00] um, bonds in general money market. Um, think things like that, right? So if the market does what it it’s doing now, it’s not gonna affect, you know, what, what’s going on the second bucket. Bucket two is typically, you know, maybe six to 15 years out.

Tim Baker: So this is more moderate risk. You have more of a, a balanced, uh, um, asset allocation. So maybe like a 60 40, 50 50, um, uh, equity to, to fixed income. Maybe some dividend paying stocks where there’s, it’s, you know, the portfolio’s producing some income. So more volatility. A little bit more return though, um, but not.

Tim Baker: You know, not those huge swings that you’re gonna see, which you typ. They’ll typically get in bucket three, which is typically, you know, 15 plus years out. So this is where you put your higher risk, um, you know, equities, uh, stocks, that type of thing. So I. For, for a lot of people. Um, from an understanding, the big advantages here is that [00:29:00] it helps retirees mentally separate funds.

Tim Baker: So you’re kind of matching investments to the time horizons, time horizon, and this is, this is, I look at this, it’s like purpose-based investing. So we talk about purpose-based savings, like, Hey, what’s that money for? Like tie a purpose to it. Same with investing. Mo, it’s a little bit easier with investing because most of the time it’s in a 401k or an IRA.

Tim Baker: We know that purpose is for retirement. Like if we have a brokerage account that has $50,000 in it, I’m like, Tim, what’s that money for? And a lot of people are like, I don’t know, sometimes. And that could be for early retirement, it could be for the down payment on a, you know, a property in the, in the, in the future.

Tim Baker: So it allows people to kind of, it, it enhances their understanding, um, and increases their peace of mind. So as an example, um. Like if the market goes down, like it’s been going down lately and I have three years of expenses of cash for expenses, like in my mind, you know what the market is already is typically done, is that it, it bounces back [00:30:00] right in, in, in 2, 3, 4 years.

Tim Baker: So I’m inoculated to that, right? So I’m not, I’m not necessarily worried about it. Um, this, the, another advantage of this, it kind of encourages discipline withdrawals and. One of the disadvantages is kind of how you refill the buckets, which I’ll talk about here in a second. But it has, there’s a system for which you follow, um, the withdrawal, uh, uh, phase.

Tim Baker: Um, it reduces the need to sell volatile inve investments, uh, or volatile assets during market downturns, which mitigates sequence of return risk, which we’ve talked about in previous episodes. Um. Some say it supports higher equity, Al Al allocation. I don’t know if I necessarily agree with that, um, but potentially.

Tim Baker: That 15 year bucket should be pretty, you know, pretty, um, you know, uh, risk, you know, risk heavy for, for larger returns and, you know, it can kind of provide a built-in rebalances system. The, the, the disadvantage I would say to this is that it’s complex. It can be complex to [00:31:00] manage, so the rules for refill in your buckets can get confusing.

Tim Baker: And there’s the delayed, there’s the delayed approach, which, you know, basically nothing happens until the first bucket. Um, that that liquid bucket is completely depleted. The problem with that, Tim, is like, if that is now, like you’re, you have market risks, um, and sequence of return risk, like the timing of that can be tough.

Tim Baker: Another approach to refill in the buckets is the, um, automatic approach. So you refill the buckets, re regard, you know, each year regardless of what’s happening in the market. So again, it’s pretty rigid, so you’re just like, this is what I do. Right. Even if I’m going off a cliff. Um. The other, the other approach is the market-based approach, which the bucket is refilled based on what the market does.

Tim Baker: So you have a set of rules that says, if this happens, I do this. If that happens, I do that.

Tim Ulbrich: Mm-hmm.

Tim Baker: And then the last one that you typically follow or could follow is the capital needs approach, which you need to determine kind of what your critical path or how much wealth should remain in each year of [00:32:00] retirement to meet lifetime financial goals based on the the portfolio return.

Tim Baker: So it’s kind of like a plan backwards approach. So some of this, you know, you could be in a trough right now, which is kind of where we’re at, and you’re like. What do I do like this? This doesn’t seem like I should be selling, you know, some of my equities or even moderate, um, base, you know, I’m selling low.

Tim Baker: Um, so that can be, that can be tough. The, the, another disadvantage I would say is the potential cash drag. So if you’re, if you have, if you amass. One to three, one to five years of cash that could be harmful during inflationary periods because, um, that money, you know, inflation is, is eaten away at that. Um, and, and it can reduce the overall, um, portfolio efficiency.

Tim Baker: Um, another and others argue, argue that the time se segmentation is straight up arbitrary. So, um, if there’s a poor market or spending increase, the buckets may not hold up. There’s no guaranteed income in this. So you [00:33:00] have social security, obviously, but you don’t have a floor. So gu you know, your, your social security might cover.

Tim Baker: You know, a portion of your essential expenses, but it’s not gonna cover everything. So that’s a problem. And then I would say the sequence of return risk still exists and it can be challenging to rebalance just in volatile market. So it’s, you know, you could be doing things that you know you shouldn’t be doing, but it’s like, Hey, I gotta fill the buckets.

Tim Baker: I gotta make sure that the, the, the, the, the money cascades throughout the bucket system.

Tim Ulbrich: Tim, as you were talking about this, I sense that my, my feelings, and I suspect maybe others listening are is, is you describe the three buckets. It’s like, okay, I get it. That all makes sense. And then you start to think about some of the management of it and the different ways that you could do it. And, and it could be, as you mentioned.

Tim Ulbrich: More administratively complex, you know, especially if somebody’s trying to DIY it, or even if they’re working with an advisor, you know, there need to be some communication. Are we establishing rules? You know, what exactly are we doing? How are we doing it? Um, and for some there may be a comfort level of, of that, that may not be for others, which [00:34:00] is why this lives in the middle, not as conservative as, as the first, not as, uh, more dynamic as we’ll talk about with the third. But the example you gave is a good one when, when you said, Hey. I’m in a trough, like we’re we’re now, what should I do? What came up for me there is when you said that is how important it is to think through those things in advance of actually being in the trough and asking the question, what should I do? Right. So actually stress testing some of this of, hey, when the down market comes, not if, but when the down market comes. What are we gonna do? How are we gonna react to that? Are we gonna hold true to these real? And, and this is both numbers and feelings. Um, but I think a lot of the, the literature in our experience would tell us that it’s not in the moments of the market kind of falling out in the situations we’re having now where we wanna really put the test, what are we actually gonna be doing?

Tim Ulbrich: But can we work through that in advance or at least do the best that we can? Of course, reality, you know, may, may present itself to be a little bit different. All right. Let’s move on to the third strategy, which is the systemic [00:35:00] withdrawal strategy. Tell us more about this one, Tim.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so I would say this is probably the most popular, um. Strategy for, at least for financial planners. I think probably even for, for people that do it themselves, um, I would say the bucket strategy is probably the second most popular. Um, this was kind of made, um, popular, I guess, or or known by the, the 4% role.

Tim Baker: So. Um, it’s often associated with a 4% rule. And, and this method really involves withdrawn, uh, a fixed percentage from the portfolio annually adjusted for, potentially adjusted for inflation and market performance. So the, the 4% rule kind of came, um, from a study. It was, it, it was based on. 30 year, 30 year time period.

Tim Baker: So kind of rolling 30 year periods in the market’s history, determine, you know, in the worst 30 year, you know, rolling period. What was the safe withdrawal rate for, [00:36:00] um, an, an investor to withdraw so the money wouldn’t run out at the, you know, basically at the end. So from, from someone who was age 65 to say 95.

Tim Baker: In the study, the worst 30 years, and I think the study goes back to 1926, Tim, but in the study, basically the worst 30 year period was 1966 to 1995, which I guess at the end of that, I don’t know if that was like the, the.com bubble on 95. Yeah. So that was the worst Roland 30 year period. And what the study said was that the The safe, the safe maximum withdrawal rate.

Tim Baker: Of that portfolio, the worst one was 4.15%, and this, they used a 

Tim Ulbrich: Adjusted for inflation, 

Tim Baker: Correct. And, and they use, they use the, um, the 50 50 kind of stocks to bonds allocation, which I think most people would agree now that that’s not necessarily a great allocation over the course of your, of your retirement. [00:37:00] So what people, people saw that number and they’re like, great.

Tim Baker: 4%. So if I have a million dollars, I can withdraw 40 grand, um, for the rest of my life, you know, typically 30, 20, 30 years. And I, and I’m not gonna run outta money. Um. The, the problem with that is typically the, so the problem with the 4% rule is it’s, it’s rigid. Um, the allocation with 50 50 between stocks and bonds, I don’t think is, is great.

Tim Baker: Um, the, it’s, it’s very much focused on US stocks and a lot of people don’t think that US talks will perform as well as they did, you know, um, in the future, as they did in the past. Um, the, the longevity is a problem because, um. You know, he, the study says that retirement will last 30 years. And I think there’s gonna be a lot of people that follow this are gonna live a lot longer.

Tim Baker: Um, because, you know, life expectancies have risen and it didn’t really, um, the, the, the inflation [00:38:00] averaged a modest 2% in the study. So we saw it in 2022 as 8.3, and that can throw a major wrench. Um, the other thing that’s, that that’s problematic is that spending is not linear. Often we talk about spending in retirement as like a smile.

Tim Baker: So in your early retirement you’re like, okay, you know, yolo, I don’t have to punch the clock anymore. I’m traveling, I’m doing all the things. And then. Spending typically dips as you’re kind of more, you know, Hey, I don’t want to travel as much, I wanna be home. And then it typically goes up when, you know, medical expenses start to start to rise.

Tim Baker: So spending is not linear. So you, you should adjust like what, what, what a lot of, um, people that would say against the 4% rule is like, you should probably be spending a lot more in the beginning. Um, because, you know, spending’s gonna come down and then make sure we have enough, you know, and, and be, you know, more aggressive outside of a 50 50 allocation for, for later life.

Tim Baker: So, um, spending fluctuates, it’s not a straight line and [00:39:00] doesn’t account for taxes, doesn’t account for fees and things like that, which can also be, you know, uh, a major part of this. So. Proponents of the withdrawal, uh, systemic withdrawal strategy would say, Hey, the 4%, that’s cute. That’s a good place to start, but it, it actually needs to benu more nuanced to that.

Tim Baker: So guiding Clinger, um, two gentlemen basically did a study that, that, that, that, that established kind of more, um. Responsive withdrawal rules. So the, the one withdrawal rule, they, they basically said is like, Hey, we’ll start with four or 5%, whatever, wherever it is. And then each subsequent year, the withdrawal amount is increased by the prior year inflation rate.

Tim Baker: Unless the prior year investment return was negative and the New Year’s withdrawal rate would be above the initial withdrawal rate. So it’s, that’s a lot to kind of unpack. But the idea is that you, in this withdrawal rule, you are kind of, um, [00:40:00] flexible to what’s going on in the market, not just from an, not just market returns, but also inflation and probably one of the cardinal, um, beliefs.

Tim Baker: In retirement, and this is, can, can sometimes be hard to swallow, is be flexible. The more flexible that you can be with when you retire, how much you spend in retirement, all that, you know, all that stuff. The more success that the, the odds increase of a successful retirement, and I define a successful retirement, at least at a, at a baseline state of you don’t run outta money.

Tim Baker: You know, I don’t, obviously we want to thrive, not survive, but that to me is like, you don’t, we don’t run outta money. I. So flexibility here is key. The other one that they looked at was the capital preservation rule. So you kind of start at 4%. And then if the current year withdrawal amount is more than 20% above the initial withdrawal rate, you reduce the withdrawal, the withdrawal rate by 10%.

Tim Baker: So it kind of, so this reduces spending when the market returns are [00:41:00] poor. And typically once you get to a certain age, IE 80 or 85, like the, the role no longer applies. ’cause there’s, they’re, they’re assuming that. There’s such a, there’s a shorter window of time that you’re fine. And then the last one that they talk about is kind of the prosperity rule.

Tim Baker: So if the current year withdrawal amount is less than 80% of the initial withdrawal rate, um, so basically what happens then is that the increases, we increase the withdrawal rate, calculate it, um, by about like 10%. So this allows an increase in spending when the markets have done well. So, so you might listen to this and be like, Tim, what are you talking about?

Tim Baker: But what we’re doing, and it’s similar to the bucket rule, but what we’re doing is essentially we’re not, we’re not on a conveyor belt with a 4% rule, which is kind of like, okay, $1 million, 40 grand, you know, adjusted for inflation crate. But if the market is, you know, if the market tanks for three, four years in a row, that that could break.

Tim Baker: Right. [00:42:00] What we’re doing is that 

Tim Ulbrich: Or you start working part-time or like all the things, right? 

Tim Baker: So, so we’re looking at. We’re looking at the market returns or we’re looking at it inflation, and we’re making tweaks and adjusting your, your paycheck accordingly, right? So again, like it for, so I’ll, I’ll talk about advantages. So the advantages here, um, it, it can be somewhat straightforward to implement once you get your system down, right?

Tim Baker: So every, everyone is easy for us to understand. I have a million dollars, it’s 4%, or maybe I start at 5%. That’s kind of my baseline. And again, 40 or 50 grand, you might be thinking, Hey Tim, that’s not, that’s not a ton. But we’re also gonna make sure that, you know, social, like we, we make a really good decision from a social security, uh, claiming strategy.

Tim Baker: Um, you know, we’re looking at other streams of income, whether that’s part-time work or in, um, you know, income from an, an investment like a business or a real estate. All that stuff kind of plays into this, but. You know, we’re gonna take that 40, 50, 60, [00:43:00] 80 grand, whatever it is from the portfolio, and then in subsequent years, make decisions on, on how that, how that, um, fluctuates.

Tim Baker: Um, probably the biggest reason that people do this, because it does maximize flexibility in asset growth. So here. You’re, you’re looking, you’re really looking at, like to total portfolio return, right? You get a similar result in the bucket strategy, but you’re kind of looking at it in tranches, whereas this is, I have a million dollars, I’m trying to get the most return as I possibly can.

Tim Baker: Um, so you’re not an annuitizing assets, so that keep, that allows you to keep control. And there’s not that, um, irrevocable commitment of like, once I send that check to the insurance company, I don’t necessarily get it back out outside of the, the check that I get from them, um, from an income stream. So there’s potential for higher returns.

Tim Baker: Probably the biggest thing is tax efficiency. So if it’s managed well, um. You know, the, the, the location of [00:44:00] assets, how you pull from them, how you fill up tax brackets, capital gains, harvesting, Roth conversions, all of these things that can extend your portfolio. Um, that is part of this whole strategy. Um, it’s, it’s, you retain full estate value.

Tim Baker: So, you know, if I cut a check for $500,000 and that to an annuity company and that. Check turns off when I die, my kids don’t get that money unless I put that rider in that, um, and I get a reduced check. So this basically, I pass away, that money goes to Shea, she passes away, that money goes to my kids or whoever my beneficiaries are.

Tim Baker: Um, and it, and it’s really designed to kind of tailor to your risk. So advantages, the disadvantages, no guaranteed income outside of Social Security. Um, you still have market and sequence risk, so you’re still kind of playing that game, although the decisions you make. Kind of, kind of mitigate that a bit.

Tim Baker: It does require active monitor monitoring. I would say at least once a [00:45:00] year to kind of figure out, okay, what are we doing for this year? Um, there’s some psychology here. Again, you can be over, over. Um, uh. Attentive to the market because again, that that’s where the next paychecks come in. You still have inflation risks, although I think that’s mitigated if you’re, if you’re looking for total return.

Tim Baker: Um, and there’s potential tax complexity if you, you know, if you don’t do it. Uh, right. So, so this one I, I think, is the most popular. But, and there’s lots of advantages, but there’s also lots of disadvantages and I think the potential pitfalls for inefficiency and lack of optimization with regard to how best to build the, the paycheck.

Tim Ulbrich: Great summary, Tim. And then the thing that jumped off the page to me, which applies across the retirement planning and, and regardless of withdrawal strategy, although more important here as you mentioned, is the flexibility piece. Flexibility, flexibility, flexibility. And this is in part what makes, makes the planning a little bit difficult is we may in our mind say, Hey, I’m gonna retire at the age of 65 and we’re gonna stop working all together. Who [00:46:00] knows, right? What, what will happen in terms of, of health. And obviously as we get closer, things become a little bit more known. But will we work part-time? Will we not? What’s the market doing? What are the goals, you know, that we have in retirement? All these things are a good reminder that whether it’s in the accumulation stage, stage or in the withdrawal stage, this is not a set it and forget it, right?

Tim Ulbrich: This isn’t the strategic plan that we forget about for five years of the organization. We, we’ve gotta set this plan attentionally. Then we wanna be revisiting this because there’s gonna be internal and external things that are going to be moving and changing over time.

Tim Baker: Yeah, and I think, I think what I said last episode, um, about questions to ask your, your financial planner. You know, I, I, I believe that, you know, if you are a seven figure pharmacist like this requires I think professional attention. There’s just so many moving pieces with regard to, you know, how do [00:47:00] I spend down the seventh figure sum of money in a way that meets my goals and what do I’m trying to achieve, not just from a money perspective, but from a, from a life perspective, from a legacy perspective.

Tim Baker: Um, you know, there’s so many different things to kind of be aware of and, you know, I think, again, having that outside. Third party opinion that has your best interest in mind is critical. Now, again, I am biased, Tim. This is what we do. Um, but you know, I always make the joke, like when I first lived in Ohio, I file my own taxes and I lived in like a, like a Rita area.

Tim Baker: And for those that are outside of Ohio, they’re like, Tim, what are you talking about? I’m like, there’s no freaking way I did that correctly, Tim. There’s no way. There is no way 

Tim Ulbrich: well re Rita will become, come knocking in like 2030 ’cause

Tim Ulbrich: they’re like three years behind 

Tim Baker: Yeah, but like, this is kind of the same thing, right? Like, like hire a professional to [00:48:00] do these things because there’s just so much nuance and you know, I, I often hear like, uh, like, you know, my colleague’s doing this, or my uncle’s doing this, or my brother’s doing this, you are a unique snowflake.

Tim Baker: Your, your, your balance sheet and your goals are gonna be unique to you and what you’re trying to accomplish. So. I think it takes a tailored approach to get you to where you want to go. Right? And, and that would just be my, my soapbox, uh, for the, for this episode.

Tim Ulbrich: Tim, I, I couldn’t agree more. And, and I’m not shy about saying we’re biased because we, we see the benefit that this has in, in clients that are intentionally planning over a long period of time. You know, we know it in our own plans. I, I work with the team at, at YFP planning. Like there is real value there in a long term engagement.

Tim Ulbrich: And, and to your point, everyone’s situation plan different and we often wanna apply. General advice, and you know, here we’re talking again, withdrawal strategies. It’s not a one size fit. Fit fits all, and there’s so many conversations, as I mentioned at the beginning of [00:49:00] the episode. There’s so many conversations, yes, financially, but also about goals and emotions and all types of that need to happen. That inform the strategy

Tim Ulbrich: and why we’re gonna be doing what we’re gonna be doing from a strategy standpoint. So, you know, whether you’re hearing this and you, you lean towards the security of the flooring strategy or maybe some of the structure of the bucketing strategy or some of the flexibility of the systemic withdrawal strategy. The key again, is finding a strategy that lines with your goals and risk tolerance. And we believe working alongside a third party can be incredibly helpful. In doing that, we’d love to have an opportunity to talk with you more about your individual financial plan and your retirement plan. Uh, to learn more about our one-on-one fee only virtual financial planning services and our team of certified financial planners. Go to your financial pharmacist.com, you can book a free discovery call, that’s a 45 to 60 minute meeting, uh, with Tim Baker. We can learn more about your situation. Uh, you can learn more about our services and, and together we can determine whether or not it’s the right fit. And you know, for [00:50:00] some of you, if you’re currently working with an advisor and having that feeling of, Hey, I’m not sure it’s the best fit, we’d love to have an opportunity to talk with you as well, uh, to do a second opinion analysis and, and see whether or not the current situation is the right fit.

Tim Ulbrich: Or perhaps a move does make sense. Again, you’re financial pharmacist.com. Book a discovery call. Tim, great stuff. Thanks so much for joining today.

 [END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

Note: Referral fees from affiliate links in this table are sent to the non-profit YFP Gives. 

Read the full advertising disclosure here.

Bonus

Starting Rates

About

YFP Gives accepts advertising compensation from companies that appear on this site, which impacts the location and order in which brands (and/or their products) are presented, and also impacts the score that is assigned to it. Company lists on this page DO NOT imply endorsement. We do not feature all providers on the market.

$750*

Loans

≥150K = $750* 

≥50K-150k = $300


Fixed: 4.89%+ APR (with autopay)

A marketplace that compares multiple lenders that are credit unions and local banks

$500*

Loans

≥50K = $500

Variable: 4.99%+ (with autopay)*

Fixed: 4.96%+ (with autopay)**

 Read rates and terms at SplashFinancial.com

Splash is a marketplace with loans available from an exclusive network of credit unions and banks as well as U-Fi, Laurenl Road, and PenFed

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 404: 5 Key Questions to Ask Before Hiring a Financial Planner


Tim Ulbrich, PharmD, and Tim Baker, CFP®, break down how to find the right financial planner—covering what planners really do, how they’re paid, and the questions to ask—so you can move forward with clarity and confidence.

This episode is brought to you by First Horizon.

Episode Summary

Not sure who to trust with your finances—or if you even need a financial planner? In this episode, Tim Ulbrich, PharmD and Tim Baker, CFP® dive into what a great financial planner does beyond providing investment advice, and how they can help you navigate life’s financial twists and turns. 

Tim and Tim explain the different types of planners, how to spot someone working in your best interest, and the key questions to ask before hiring one. Plus, they break down common fee structures (like AUM, flat-fee, and hourly), the importance of the CFP® designation, and how to evaluate the return on your planning relationship. 

Whether you’re hiring a planner for the first time, reevaluating your current setup, or just exploring what’s out there, this episode will give you the clarity and confidence to take the next step.

Key Points from the Episode

  • [00:00] Welcome Back, Tim Baker!
  • [00:39] Skepticism in the Financial Planning Industry
  • [02:18] Understanding Financial Advisor Compensation
  • [03:56] The Importance of Transparency
  • [06:37] Defining Financial Planning
  • [11:27] Comprehensive Financial Planning Process
  • [20:06] Evaluating Financial Advisors
  • [32:07] Second Opinion Analysis
  • [34:47] Licensing and Compensation Models
  • [37:00] Commission-Based vs. Fee-Only Advisors
  • [37:40] Understanding Advisor Models
  • [38:53] Identifying Advisor Compensation
  • [41:44] Transparency in Advisor Fees
  • [01:04:06] Conflicts of Interest in Financial Planning
  • [01:05:54] Investment Philosophy Alignment
  • [01:12:56] The Value of Long-Term Financial Planning

Episode Highlights

“ I think it’s 5% of  financial advisors, financial planners, whatever you want to call us,  are fee-only fiduciaries. That means the other 95% are not, which means that they can put their own interests, the advisor, the planner’s interest, ahead of their clients.

When I tell pharmacists that, they’re like, are you serious? That doesn’t sound like it would be legal or true, but it is.” – Tim Baker [7:39]

“We’re not going to lay on our deathbeds and say, ‘Oh man, I wish YFP, or I wish my advisor would’ve told me to put more money into our Roth IRA.’ We’re going to say, ‘I wish I would’ve got into horseback riding again because it was a passion of mine that I just put on the back burner.’” – Tim Baker [1:00:40] 

“ When I started Script [Financial], the thing I heard from pharmacists that I started working with was, the advisor that they would work with or they would talk to would say, ‘Hey, don’t worry about your student loans. They’ll figure themselves out,’ which we know is terrible advice.” – Tim Baker [12:37]

Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Tim Baker, welcome back to the show.

Tim Baker: Good to be back. What’s what’s good, Tim?

Tim Ulbrich: Well, I’m excited. We’re, we’re gonna be talking about questions to ask when hiring a financial planner. A topic that we’ve dabbled on before we, we’ve woven in and outta this topic throughout the show in, in various episodes before. But we’re gonna directly cover five questions that should be asked.

Tim Ulbrich: Certainly not the only questions, but when you’re evaluating a financial planner and no need to take notes, we’ve got all this information and even some additional resources in our YFP Nuts and Bolts Guide to hire a financial planner. We’ll link to that in the show notes so individuals can go get that resource.

Tim Ulbrich: Tim, I wanna start with maybe what is top of mind for many people, especially [00:01:00] if they haven’t worked with a planner before, which is some of the skepticism that may be out there in terms of working with a financial planner, engaging with a financial advisor, entrusting them with something that is so important, uh, which is their own financial plan.

Tim Ulbrich: And admittedly, an industry that doesn’t necessarily have. The best reputation. So let, let’s start there in terms of, you know, that skepticism that may be there and where some of that may be coming from.

Tim Baker: Yeah, I think, um, you know, I think a lot of the, the, you know, the advisors that came up back in the day kind of came up through like the wirehouse model. So some of these big companies that we all know the names or even even the insurance world. And I think, I think in those models, and again, you know, this episode, you know, we may throw shade on other models.

Tim Baker: There’s no hate here. Like it’s just, there are diff, you know, different strokes for different folks types of things. And I’ve been in, you know, a few, you know, at least one different model be, you [00:02:00] know, before we got into the fee only. But I would say, you know, um, haven’t, haven’t been in other firms. It can be very transactional, Tim, right?

Tim Baker: Tim? So, like, you know, you, you look at the things that you have available to you as a financial advisor and you try to find the best way possible to help your clients, but also to put like food on the table. Sometimes that can mean, you know, squeezing clients into things that they shouldn’t be in and, and it kind of feeling like a, Hey, I’m being pitched a product, versus like, is this person truly in my best interest?

Tim Baker: I think the other thing that’s part of this is, um, like our industry is not transparent at all. When I come across prospective clients that have worked with an advisor or are currently working with an advisor, I’ll ask the question like, how do you, how do you pay your advisor? And they’ll say. I don’t know, or I don’t pay them anything.

Tim Baker: You know? And I, I remember [00:03:00] distinctly when I, when I became a, a financial planner, I was talking to my parents and I’m like, how do you pay your financial planner? And they’re like, my mom was like, well, let’s do your dad’s work. You know, they pay or it’s free, or something like that. And I’m like, that can’t be true.

Tim Baker: And when I uncovered how much they were paying, it was like heart attack city. It was just buried in a product somewhere and they had no idea. So to me, I think it’s that. And then I think it’s also like you, you hear stories about like Bernie Madoff or, you know, really bad apples that, you know, you’re, you’re, you’re entrusting your, your, you know, your life’s work, your, your money, you know, to, you know, a person and you know, they do something that, you know, is, is fraudulent.

Tim Baker: And, you know, that kind of makes the headline. So it, it, it is similar to like, I think, um. Medicine or, or pharmacy where you’re, you’re definitely in a position of trust, right? And I think if [00:04:00] you’re, if you’re a person that takes advantage of that or is pushing a product or things like that, I think that that’s where the public perception can be tainted.

Tim Baker: Um, so it’s, it’s, it’s definitely, I, it’s earned, right? It’s, it’s valid. But I would say the overwhelming majority of people that are out there, no matter what model they’re in, they’re trying to do their best to help their client. I just argue that there are different models that are better, um, that position, the advisor and the client better, you know, where there’s less conflict of interest, every model’s gonna have conflict.

Tim Baker: But that’s what I would say is that, you know, to that answer.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. And to my experience too is there’s a lot of overgeneralization. Based on your experience or maybe the experience of someone else that you then adopt that mindset or story. I’m thinking about my grandparents, who I remember growing up. They had a, a financial advisor that wasn’t necessarily a good fit, good situation, and in the eyes of my grandfather.

Tim Ulbrich: That person caused them a lot of pain and therefore, like all financial advisor, [00:05:00] right. So, you know, and, and that was fair. His, his concern, the harm that was caused in that moment, that was very fair. But as we’ll talk about during the show, there are a lot of different types and, and flavors of financial advisors, financial planners.

Tim Ulbrich: What does that term even actually mean? And when I think back to my own journey, starting this industry, before I had the opportunity to cross paths with you and learn more about the industry and what do terms like fee only and fiduciary mean. I remember very early on, after starting the blog back in 20 15, 20 16, I started to interview various financial advisors and inevitably conversation after conversation.

Tim Ulbrich: I often left with more confusion than I had answers. And I, I was trying to ask pointed questions, and I would leave with this kind of feeling of smoke and mirrors not clear on, you know, how are things being charged, what’s included, what’s not included, and, and then I was able to put terms of those things later after I would understand.

Tim Ulbrich: But the problem that I had, and I see a [00:06:00] lot of pharmacists falling into this trap in a similar way, is I applied my pharmacy training mindset. And I tried to use that as the lens in which I was understanding the financial services industry. Because in, in pharmacy, right, there are, there’s variability between one pharmacy program and another, or one residency program in another.

Tim Ulbrich: But at the end of the day, like we know what a pharm D means. We know what a PGY one or PGY two means. We know what board certification means. And while there are some differences between institutions. There’s accreditation and there’s some level of consistency between those. And so we’re able to adopt that understanding when we hear those terms.

Tim Ulbrich: And I think that what I did, and what I see minute pharmacists do, is we take that mindset and we try to apply that to financial services. And it really is on some level, the wild, wild west, you know, the term financial advisor in and of itself doesn’t really carry a whole lot of weight. And so that’s what this episode is about is how do we ask questions?

Tim Ulbrich: What questions should we be asking so that [00:07:00] we as a consumer understand what are we actually talking about in terms of who we’re working with, what the services include or don’t include, and, and ultimately, how do those individuals get paid,

Tim Baker: Yeah. And I’ll piggyback on that, Tim, like, um, I, I, I hearken back to when you and Tim Church were writing the Seven Figure Pharmacist book, and we had the chapter on this and like, I was getting confused. So like, if I’m in the industry and we’re kind of talking about different, you know, tranches of the industry and who does what, and I’m getting confused, being in the industry, how does that, how does a, a consumer, a lay person, a pharmacist that is not versed well in, in financial services or whatever, how are they supposed to navigate that?

Tim Baker: It’s super confusing. And you know, I think the other thing is, is like where pharmacists come from, you know, like I’ll say. Something along the lines and won’t get into this is like, and I think it’s 5%, 5% of financial [00:08:00] advisors, financial planners, whatever you wanna call us, are fee only fiduciaries. That means the other 95% are not, which means that they can put their own interests, the advisor, the planner’s interest ahead of their clients.

Tim Baker: When I tell pharmacists that, they’re like, are you serious? Like, like, like that doesn’t sound like it would be legal or true, but it is. Like that’s, that’s the way it is. And you know, the 95%, I’m not saying that they’re twisting their mustache and they’re trying to find ways to defraud their people, their clients, but they, they don’t have to necessarily put, you know, they can say, Hey, I, you know, I, I can sell this product, I can make a case.

Tim Baker: It is suitable for you, Tim, but it’s not in your best interest. And I think that is a shock in revelation through a lot of people. Um, I. And why we feel the fee only the fiduciary, you know, and when I left my last job, I was not a fee, I was not fee only, I was not fiduciary. And that was one of the reasons I, I broke away and, and started Script Financial, which is now YFP.[00:09:00] 

Tim Baker: Um, and I remember having a conversation with, you know, my mentor at the time, and he is like, you know, he’s like, I get it, you know? Um, but he’s like, do you, would you, do you think that I would do anything to kind of, you know, it would not be in the best interest? And I’m like, no, I don’t. But early in your career or just, you know, if you get into a money pitch, I think it puts you in a tough spot to say, it was like, okay, I can pay off this debt or whatever, or I can make sure that my clients are, you know, kind of on the up and up.

Tim Baker: So I just, I, I think, think that there’s better models, you know, to, to reduce the conflict. There’s not, there’s never gonna be a model that there is no conflict of interest. And I think that’s important to know, but I think to me, a, a. A theme in this conversation will be transparency. Transparency in what you’re paying, the service that you’re getting, how you’re paying your advisor.

Tim Baker: Um, I think that’s, that’s huge, right? Because in an industry that’s, it’s very black box of like, okay, how does this actually work? Um, and again, I’ve been in that model, you know, when, when a client would ask me, Hey, how do [00:10:00] you get paid previously? I’m like, well, I can sell you an insurance product. I can charge you an, you know, hourly, you know, all the things that we’re gonna talk about.

Tim Baker: And it’s like, okay, what does this actually mean? Like, what, what does that mean to me? And it’s a little bit of a chicken and the egg, it’s a catch 22. ’cause like, until I start working with you, Tim, I don’t really know what insurance product you need or how much you need, or what’s that gonna cost, right?

Tim Baker: So it’s a little bit, it’s not all on the advisor. It’s, it is a little bit of, like, you, you, you don’t know until, you know, type of thing. But that just leads to a lot of like, you know, what the heck? You know, what does this actually look like? So, yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: Tim, before we jump into the five questions, you, your, uh, share just reminded me of the John Oliver piece, uh, last, last week, tonight. We’ll link it in the show notes if you haven’t seen it before. I just looked it up real quick. It was back in 2016. I can’t believe it’s almost 10, 10 years ago, which is wild.

Tim Ulbrich: But he has a great piece on retirement plans. Um, that really highlights well in an entertaining way, um, some of the fiduciary fee only [00:11:00] types of concepts that we’re talking about. So if you’re looking for some re reinforcement or seeing that from a different angle, make sure to check that out. We’ll, we’ll link to it in the show notes, Tim.

Tim Ulbrich: So we’re gonna walk through five questions to ask when hiring a financial planner, again, these aren’t meant to be all inclusive, of course there’s more than just five things we wanna be thinking about. Um, and some of these seem very obvious, which question one is the case, but these are things that we can over overlook as we’re in the decision making process of working with a planner.

Tim Ulbrich: And so I encourage people before they go out and determine what is or is not the best fit for them. Have these questions in, in your back pocket. Right? These become the framework in, in which you can use as you’re evaluating some of the different options that are out there. And that first question we have, Tim, is what’s your process for offering financial planning AKA what?

Tim Ulbrich: What does financial planning actually mean when working with you or working with your firm? Right. We talk about that term a lot, a financial plan, financial [00:12:00] planning, comprehensive financial planning. But this can look and be very much apples to oranges between one firm and another. So before you sign the dotted line and you pay any fees, what are we actually talking about?

Tim Ulbrich: Right? What’s included in here?

Tim Baker: Yeah, I think, I think most people, I think most advisors, this is gonna be super generalized, but I think it in, in most firms, it’s very investment centric. Poten. It could, so investments in retirement. I think it’s, it’s probably pretty product centric like insurance life, disability, um, and then probably some light financial planning if I had to paint a broad stroke of what the, what the industry offers.

Tim Baker: Um, and so it’s important to know, you know, like what, what it is. So like if you say, Hey, it’s financial planning, like what does that actually entail? I think when I started script the, the goin, you know, the goin I think, um, thing I heard from [00:13:00] pharmacists that I started working with was, you know, the advisor that they would work with or they would, they would talk to it would say, Hey, don’t worry about your student loans.

Tim Baker: Like, they’ll figure themselves out, um, which we know is terrible advice. Um, I’ll, I’ll, you know, I’ll set up a Roth IRA, I’ll invest that for you. I’ll sell you a crappy insurance product that you probably don’t need, and then I’ll talk to you every couple years until you have assets for me to manage. So that was the way for them to help you know them.

Tim Baker: And I looked at that and I’m like, there is a huge gap in the market because we know, you know, often, especially if you’re in your new practitioner years and maybe plus like the tail that wags the dog for your financial plan are the student loans. So as the, you know, if you, if if we have 106 figures worth of student loans, that’s the tail that wags the dog, right?

Tim Baker: So as the loans go, so does the rest of the plan. So I looked at that and I’m like, this is a super underserved, you know, community of people. And that’s what I really hung my hat on in terms of, in terms of the business model. So that would be the [00:14:00] question I would ask. It’s like what that actually looks like.

Tim Baker: You know, for us, the way that we do this, Tim, is, you know, we, I would say that we are very comprehensive, right? So we, we look at what we call delivering the financial roadmap over the first year of our engagement. So when you, once you become a client, um. We go through the onboarding process. We, um, you know, part of that is linking all the things to your client portal.

Tim Baker: So we have a client portal that, you know, you link your check in, your savings, your credit cards, your, your investments, the value of the house, the mortgage, the student loans, all that stuff. And for a lot of people, it’s the first time they see all of their stuff in one, one spot, right? Because we, we bank over here, we have investments over here.

Tim Baker: We have debt over here. If you have a, a, a spouse or a partner, sometimes like that’s a little bit of a black box if you can’t directly see. So it feeds all this information in a read-only fashion. And it, and when we deliver this financial roadmap over the first course or the first year, the first stop on that roadmap, Tim, we call [00:15:00] the get organized meeting.

Tim Baker: So that’s where we’re gonna go line by line through all the things. And what we’re really trying to establish here, which again, I think is overlooked, is what is your starting net worth? What’s the first data point? What’s the before picture, so to speak? So. That’s the first stop. The second stop, once we establish that is, okay, now that we know where we’re at, let’s talk about where we want to go.

Tim Baker: So we call this second meeting the script, your plan meeting. So this is, um, hey, I wanna retire at this age. I wanna make sure I’m take these, these trips. I want to pay for my kids’ education. I want to take care of my parents that are, you know, that are aging. I want to, you know, retire by 60 or 65. Um, I want to volunteer.

Tim Baker: Whatever those things are, we gotta know where we’re going. And I think sometimes, yeah, I think sometimes planners would, will do good at kind of the, Hey, what are the investments? What are they? But they don’t necessarily do a deep dive on like the why. So. FP drinking game. If you’ve ever heard me say, it depends, right?

Tim Baker: When [00:16:00] a pharmacist asks the question, it depends on what’s the balance sheet look like and what are your goals, which are gonna be unique to you, right? So this is where I kind of scoff a little bit at the water cooler talk of like, oh, my colleague’s doing this, my colleague, you know, my, my uncle’s doing this, my cousin’s doing this.

Tim Baker: You’re a unique snowflake, Tim. So your balance sheet and your goals are gonna be unique to you and Jess. So we have to tailor the plan to that. And I think those two foundational meetings, which, you know, in the beginning of where are we at, where are we going, changes the, it depends to, this is what I think you should do.

Tim Baker: This is in your best interest. So. To me, it’s important to take those steps. And then really meeting three and beyond is, uh, on the roadmap is getting to the meat of that. So everyone starts with fundamentals. So it’s, we look at cash flow and budgeting. We look at a savings plan that’s gonna be anchored by an emergency fund, but we, you know, if you’re like, Hey, I’m, I want to be a big, I’m a big traveler.

Tim Baker: I wanna see a travel bucket, I wanna see a home purchase bucket, a home maintenance bucket. Maybe it’s a kids’ bucket. [00:17:00] Uh, so the short, medium term goals, which are not necessarily suited for like longer term investments, we have buckets of, um, you know, for, for us to be able to fund those goals. So it’s a, it’s cashflow and budget in, it’s a savings plan, and then it’s a plan for the debt.

Tim Baker: So often that’s a student loan analysis. It’s like, Hey, I have credit card debt, I have car note, I have a mortgage, I have a line of credit. How are we efficiently, um, you know, what’s the optimal way to tackle that debt? So that’s kind of the, the foundation for which longer term planning can then sit on.

Tim Baker: So really we get into retirement planning investments. Um, how much do I need for retirement? You know, I used to, I tell the story that back in the day we would say, Hey, you need 2.6 million to retire. And then we were on to the next thing. How can we actually break that down into a number in 2025 that actually makes sense, or, Hey, I’m five years away from retirement.

Tim Baker: What does that look like? How do we then start? I think one of the things that the CFP does well, Tim, is they’ll, they’ll, they’re good about, about, hey, the accumulation phase. But [00:18:00] once we, once we get to retirement, what the heck do we do? How do we, how do we turn these big pots of money into a paycheck for time unknown.

Tim Baker: We don’t know how long we’re gonna live, so investment retirement A to Z, you know, we manage investments at YFP, so we have a. A custodian that, you know, we set up accounts, we move, we move accounts over from, uh, other custodians. We buy and sell all, all that stuff we do conversions. Um, and then really the last two meetings, Tim, is gonna be things like, um, wealth protection.

Tim Baker: So meeting five, we do insurance planning. So what’s, you know, do we have the right life, disability, professional liability? If you’re getting to be my age? You start talk, talk, thinking about long-term care insurance. You know, do we buy our own policies? Do we just get the policies through our employer? You know, the big difference between us and a lot of the other guys is, and gals is, you know, if we, if I say, Hey Tim, we think that you should get this life insurance policy, it’s not because we’re lining our pocket with additional commissions because we think it’s in your best interest.

Tim Baker: Um, [00:19:00] so you know, some of those open enrollment questions that you have with your employer, we, we work through. And then lastly, the big thing is. The estate plan. And I, I often joke, this is the redheaded stepchild of, of the financial plan. I can say that as a, as a ginger, but, um, often forgotten. But do you have the proper wills, living wills, power of attorneys, trusts, you know, if, if you, if someone depends on you or if you have a pulse, like these things are really important to have in place.

Tim Baker: Um, so we get those documents in place as part of our fee in the state that you live in. Or if you have those in place, we evaluate them and then make sure that they’re good. So that’s our, you know, that’s our, the meat of our financial plan. We, we also do things with like business planning at a high level sour negotiation, which kind of stem from, Hey Tim, I got a new job.

Tim Baker: And I would say, great. Like, what did you counter? And they’re like, ah, I didn’t, you know, just, I was just happy. So things that are kind of, you know, more tangential to the plan, we’ll, we’ll look at. Um, but I think it’s important to kind of go back to the root of the question to say, okay, [00:20:00] what does the service actually look like?

Tim Baker: What am I getting? Um, and, and, and be clear about that because I think often if you say, Hey, I do, I do financial planning a lot of the time it’s very investment centric, it’s very insurance product centric, and that’s it, you know, so, um, be, be it’s a question I would definitely put at the top of the list.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. One of the things I’ve heard you say many times before, Tim, as it relates to our services, is, Hey, at the end of the day, if it has a dollar sign on it, we wanna be a part of the

Tim Baker: Yeah. Or at least quarterback a solution.

Tim Ulbrich: that’s right. That’s right.

Tim Baker: And we’ve, we’ve had clients recently that are like, or prospects that are like, ah, I’ve been working with someone at x, y, Z firm and I have a quarter million dollars in student loans that I need to figure out, you know, 10 years after I, you know, I, I graduated. No, you know, no hate.

Tim Baker: And can you help me with that? And I’m like, well, if you’re paying your advisor thousands of dollars that you don’t know, you’re pa, like why are, why are they not helping? And they’re either saying, Hey, I have a guy or a gal that can help you, that I can outsource this [00:21:00] to you, or, um, I just can’t help you.

Tim Baker: And to me, that’s unfathomable. You know, like, you know, one of the things we have to be wary of about is like, you know, we, we can’t give advice on things that we don’t, are not, you know, we, we don’t have, um, education in, or we’re not certified to do. That’s important to, to, to remember, but I would never look at a client and be like, I can’t help you.

Tim Baker: I would at least try to find a resource for them. You know, if someone’s like, I, I really wanna invest in a franchise that’s not in my wheelhouse, but I would try to find a resource that would say like, okay, like how can we go about it? I would, I want to quarterback a solution. Um, so that’s, that’s one example.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. And I think the point that we’re trying to make here as we’re talking about this first question, right, what’s the process for offering financial planning? Is, is are you clear on what that term means as a part of the engagement? And is that in alignment with what you need and what you want? And as Tim kind of articulated our roadmap, right?

Tim Ulbrich: The idea is, is [00:22:00] we have clients coming to us that are looking for service and we’re trying to determine, hey, what’s going on in their situation? What do we offer and is there a good fit? That roadmap is a visual to say, this is the expectation of what you’re going to go through over the first year. So before we make, and it’s important, this is a joint decision, is it, is it a good fit on both sides?

Tim Ulbrich: Before we make that decision, are we clear on what’s included and is it in alignment with what you need? And then there’s some more granular questions here, right? Exactly. Are we clear on how, how many times we’re gonna be meeting, how we’re gonna be meeting. Is that virtual? Is it in person? Is it over the phone?

Tim Ulbrich: You know, what does that look like? What’s the technology and the software that we’re gonna be using? What do I have access to in terms of tools and resources? Hey, if I have a question in between meetings, who do I get in touch with and how will that be received? Right? All of these are important considerations that you wanna be clear on before you engage.

Tim Ulbrich: And as Tim mention, as we look at our service in particular, you know, compared to kind of what’s out there in the general population of financial services, uh, in the industry. And what [00:23:00] we’re referencing here is a, a study that’s done by Michael Kitsis annually who’s a, a leader in the financial services space, looking at what are the components of the financial plan, what do, what’s typically covered, and how often are you typically meeting with an advisor, Tim, what we, what we usually see is most advisors are looking at an annual engagement or thereabouts, correct?

Tim Baker: Yeah, I mean there are, there are, you know, some advisors that are just like hourly. So it’s more transactional in nature. Most, most, most advisors when you go to work with them, you work with them for, for life or for, for many years. Right. Um, it’s, it’s less. I think it’s less, um, where it’s more you’re in, you’re out, that type of thing.

Tim Baker: I mean, and that’s for us, from our perspective. Like we’re, we’re trying to build relationships with clients that we’re gonna work with for many, many years, for the long term. Um, so yeah. And, and, and look at that, you know, the graph that he has, I’m looking at it that we will, you know, I’m sure we’ll share in the notes or at least a link, you know, the, the things at the top, you know, components [00:24:00] included in the financial plan retirement.

Tim Baker: 98% of advisors, you know, help with retirement investments. 96, tax planning, 92%. Social security, 86, estate planning, 84, life insurance, 82%. So these are things that it’s, it’s almost like, you know, when you think about, when you ask the public what a financial advisor does, like that’s what, what it is. The, the analogies, like when you, when you ask the public, well, what does a pharmacist do?

Tim Baker: They think about someone, you know, counting pills standing by on the bench. We know there’s a lot more that pharmacists can do, but if you look at the bottom of the graph, you know, I, I look at things like held away 401k. Um, 45%. So what

Tim Ulbrich: would be like an employer 401k.

Tim Baker: yeah, so something that you’re currently contributing into, which this is, this is bonkers to me.

Tim Baker: And then oftentimes outside of the house, it’s the biggest, it’s the biggest asset that you own. So more than half of advisors. So Tim, you hire me, I’m going to sell you insurance. I’m gonna, I’m gonna set up your IRA at my, at my [00:25:00] custodian, a brokerage account. And then you’re gonna say, Hey Tim, thanks for a lot of that advice.

Tim Baker: Can you help me allocate my 401k at Vanguard or Fidelity that, you know, my, my, uh, employer’s contributing and I’m, you know, I’m getting a match. And they say, no, that’s nuts to me. Like, that is crazy.

Tim Ulbrich: Well, especially what we see, Tim, a lot of our clients, you know, Hey, I’ve been working with Kroger for 10 years, or I’ve been at this hospital for 12 years. I mean this easily. For some people it’s half a million dollars or more. Um, could be much more if they’re further along right. Until those might roll over to certain buckets.

Tim Ulbrich: So thi this is a big part of the plan.

Tim Baker: Yeah. Yeah. I mean, college fundings, I would say only 71%. So if you’re kind of a older millennial, younger, you know, maybe younger Gen X, like that’s kind of the world that I’m in is, is like, that’s a big part that I have to look, you know, we have to look at, um, employee benefits 50%. Again, I look at that as, that’s a major part of your comp.

Tim Baker: Like, you know, that that’s something [00:26:00] I would wanna look at and make sure that you’re optimized the one that’s a little bit higher to me, Tim Life Plan is that 49%

Tim Ulbrich: I saw that. Probably interpretation of what that is.

Tim Baker: Yeah. Like what, how you define life plan and, and we’re big proponents of, you know, you build out a life plan that’s supported by the financial plan, not the other way around.

Tim Baker: And I think if we look at like, transformation and impact, a lot of it is centered around like a life, life plan and story. Um.

Tim Ulbrich: Well, and Stu, I’m looking at looking at student loans too, to the point you just made of a couple prospects here in the last week. Right. 31% student loans, so that, that matches a lot of what we’re hearing of. Hey, I work with an advisor probably who’s helping with retirements, insurance, et cetera.

Tim Ulbrich: Most likely not in a fee only. We don’t know that for sure. And hey, they don’t know what to do with my student loans. That data, you know, only 31% of advisors, part of that is generational. They may not work with clients that have many student loans, but we also know from experience with people that come our way, that there are often advisors that just the borrower, the borrower still has that [00:27:00] debt.

Tim Ulbrich: They just aren’t, aren’t helping them. And for the reasons you’ve already mentioned, it’s really hard to advise on the rest of the plan if you have a couple hundred thousand dollars of debt.

Tim Baker: yeah, I mean, I, yeah, it like it if you have a couple hundred thousand dollars of debt, like who cares about your investments? And I, and I say that somewhat facetiously, but I. It is the tail that wags the dog. Right? Of your, of your, you have to figure out the, the strategy and the plan. And I kind of ach in the student loans a little bit to like digital assets.

Tim Baker: So back in the day, you know, again, when I got into the industry 10 plus years ago, the, the advice was, we either can’t help you with the student loans or don’t worry about the student loans. You make a great income. They’ll figure themselves out or pay the one with the highest interest rate or the lowest balance, which is the snowball and the avalanche method.

Tim Baker: Right? Which we know Tim is it’s crap advice for your, for your student loans. And I, I remember having this like debate with an advisor that was very like, investments, insurance, blah, blah blah. And they’re like, well, what’s [00:28:00] like, what’s the big deal? It’s just like paying off your house or anything. And I’m like, if you have a quarter million dollars in student loans, the, the.

Tim Baker: The, um, the impact on your wealth building could be anywhere where you pay 80 grand if you’re in A-P-S-L-F and you’re completely optimized. So think about that as like a negative interest rate. Two, you’re paying 500, $600,000, or you drag it out over 30 years. And he is like, oh, okay. Like, that’s the spectrum of outcomes.

Tim Baker: And to me it’s, it’s just really important. Right? And, you know, I don’t want to just harp on student loans, but like, yeah, 31% of advisors, they’re either saying, I can’t help you, or I have a person that I can direct you towards, um, you know, 6% career salary benchmarking. And I think like, if we weren’t as niche, like if we worked with pharmacists and attorneys, and we, we do work with everyone, but our, our niche, you know, I would say probably 90, 95% of the, the households that we work with, Tim, there’s a pharmacist in the household.

Tim Baker: Um, but we kind of like, [00:29:00] I, I just got to the point of. Again, a a a client would say, Hey, Tim, I’m, I’m, I’m changing jobs. I just accepted this offer. And I would say, did you counter? And they’re like, no. And I had a client recently, um, shout out to her who recently came on, and she’s like, I’m fixing to get a, a job offer.

Tim Baker: Can you help me with that? And we did, and we earned our fee that day. Like we, you know, she got more base, she got a bonus, she got some, some stock. Um, and she’s like, I would, I would never have thought, and I don’t have the confidence to do that. And I, to me it was just kind of like, you know, the, the, in the income is what feeds the financial plan, what sticks is your net worth and things like that.

Tim Baker: So to me, it’s important to at least advocate for yourself and have the tools and the ability to do that. So it’s kind of a tangential thing. And I personally still do it. I love doing it. That’s probably the one thing that I, you know, that and some of the business consultant stuff that 20% of the, um, advisors will do.

Tim Baker: But, you know, these are all things that I think. [00:30:00] I think to go back to the question of like, what’s included and then from a frequency perspective, you know, the overwhelming majority of of financial planners, you know, they’re gonna meet with you two or three times in the first year to kind of complete the plan.

Tim Baker: And then after that, it’s typically every year or every couple years. In terms of like maintaining the plan for us, like our delivery of our roadmap is typically six or seven meetings, um, over the first year, typically seven meetings, and then we go into a semi-annual kind of rhythm, which, which is about 10% of advisors will do that.

Tim Baker: Um, so high touch and we typically do like an annual review and then a plan checkup. The warm blanket though, that I think, and this, you know, when I talk, when I spoke about that sour negotiation, um, the warm blanket w with working with a company with YFE, and I think most people are, most firms are like this, but, um, is if there is something that’s super time sensitive.

Tim Baker: Like, Hey, I got a job offer. Or We’re buying our house. We’re selling our [00:31:00] house. You know,

Tim Ulbrich: Investment property. Yeah.

Tim Baker: property. Hey, guess what? I’m retiring. You know, I thought it was gonna be in three years. Now I’m retiring. Now, you know, you can meet with us PRN as needed. Right? And that’s, we used to not call ’em, we used to just call ’em, like, we call ’em PRN meetings now.

Tim Baker: Um, so as needed, we can, you can meet. And that to me is like, Hey, we want to be able, and I think sometimes if you’re paying an advisor like hourly, and I kind of always joke about. Remember, Tim, we, like, we’ve had attorneys in the past where I’m, it’s like we, we would pay them hourly and I

Tim Ulbrich: Keep the email short.

Tim Baker: I would spend the, yeah, the email.

Tim Baker: And then I would spend the first 45 minutes reminding the attorney of like, who I am, what I do, and then get this huge bill like I I, and again, no shades or hourly invest or hourly planners out there that they exist. But to me it’s super transactional that I don’t, I don’t, I don’t want people like counting hours or anything like that.

Tim Baker: So, um, yeah, I would say comparatively super high touch with regard to, um, the, you [00:32:00] know, the, the frequency.

Tim Ulbrich: So brass tacks on this first point, and we’re, we’re intentionally spending the most time here because thi this is the meat on the bone, right? In terms of, you know, are you, are you getting what you need? So, brass tacks here is, does what you need and what you’re looking for help with the financial plan, does it align with what they offer?

Tim Ulbrich: Does what they call financial planning advising, does that align with your needs for the plan? And I’m gonna put a plug here, Tim, for us, we, we are beta testing what we’re calling a second opinion analysis. Maybe we’ll change the name on that, maybe we won’t. But the idea is for those that are already working with an advisor and having this nagging feeling of, Hey, I’m, I’m not sure it’s the best fit, right?

Tim Ulbrich: Whether it be frequency of meeting or questions getting answered, or maybe a lack of transparency in the fee structure, or, Hey, they don’t know what to do with this part of the plan. There could be a myriad of reasons. Um, through the second opinion analysis. Our goal is that they have an opportunity to sit down with you.

Tim Ulbrich: We can learn a little bit more about what’s going on in their situation, do an analysis of the current [00:33:00] engagement, what fees are being assessed, whether that’s transparent or not to them now. And then of course we can talk more about our services and see whether or not it makes sense to move forward. So we’re looking for some people to help beta test that for, for us.

Tim Ulbrich: If nothing else, I think it would shed some insights on the current engagement to help us refine our processes a little bit further. So if you are currently working with an advisor, you have that feeling of, Hey, I’m not sure if it’s the best fit, and you’d be open to helping us out, do a second opinion analysis.

Tim Ulbrich: Uh, send us an email [email protected]. Just say second opinion and we’ll get back to you and get something scheduled from there.

Tim Baker: Yeah, I, I’d love to be able to do like three to five of these, Tim, um, just kind of beta test and see what this looks like. And I think the, the way that I’m looking at this is, you know, the analysis will, will kind of be, um, similar to like what we do. We do a portfolio, insights, insights for our clients, and it kind of looks at, you know, the, um.

Tim Baker: The account location, so like [00:34:00] what and where your accounts are. So like when we try to build a retirement paycheck in the future, we want pre-tax accounts, we want taxable accounts, and we also want like Roth, like after tax accounts. So account location is, is really important. Um, you know, the other thing is allocation.

Tim Baker: So you know, kind of evaluating, you know, what are your percentage to stocks and bonds. You know, we, we, another section we talk, we talk about is move money, which is if, if money is moving in or out of your account. So, so much about is, uh, of this as, as how much you’re invested, not what you’re invested in.

Tim Baker: Um, and then like expense, like what are you actually paying, um, for, for those investments and kind of, you know, put some, um, investment analysis reports with that and, and you know, you can kind of hear some my thoughts on, on your portfolio. So I would say look into three, three to five Guinea pigs to kind of, you know, pilot this and see what it looks like.

Tim Baker: Um, would love to, I would love to do that. So, um, yeah, just email us and we’ll, we’ll figure that out.

Tim Ulbrich: Again, [email protected]. Just note, second [00:35:00] opinion in the subject line or email, and we’ll we’ll get back to you so you can get on Tim’s schedule. Tim, second question here is, are you licensed, if at all, are you licensed as a stockbroker? Are you licensed as an insurance agent? Are you licensed as an investment advisor?

Tim Ulbrich: Why? Why is this question important?

Tim Baker: So I think this kind of shows you like the underlying way, like the underlying model that they’re in. So I would say the, the three main models that are out there are, um, fee only, which is what we are, which I think makes up about 5% of advisors out there. So this is where you essentially pay for advice.

Tim Baker: You don’t pay for an investment product or a, like an insurance product. So no commissions. Um, so if you’re working with a planner, if you’re looking at a planner and you see like, um. Securities license or, um, or insurance sales. Like that means that they, they are commissioned. Um, so you have fee only that is kind of, um, like we feel the best, the most pure in [00:36:00] terms of like, you know, less conflict of interest.

Tim Baker: And then on the other side of the, the spectrum, which I don’t know if these guys and gals, um, are, are around anymore, but it’s basically like a commission only. So this is like, you know, you, you, uh, you see on the movies where you call up your stockbroker and or they call you and they say, Hey, I wanna sell you, you know, a hundred shares of x, y, Z company.

Tim Baker: And they, it’s more transactional. They’re selling you a product, they get their commission, they move on. So a lot, a, a lot less in terms of advice, right? So that’s the two ends of the spectrum in the middle where most advisors live. It’s called fee and commission, or what’s, what’s we typically call it is fee based.

Tim Baker: So oftentimes, you know, um, you know, a prospect will come to me and says, yeah, I want to, I wanna work with you because you’re fee based, you’re fiduciaries. And that’s actually a, a misnomer. We’re fee only. We’re we’re, and they sound similar, which is part of the problem, but a fee base is [00:37:00] fee and commissions.

Tim Baker: So this goes back to like, you know, in, in my previous model, Tim, if you were my client, you would say, Hey Tim, how do you get paid? I’m like, pull up a chair, it’s gonna take me a while. I can charge you hourly. I can charge you a percentage of a UM assets under management. I could sell you a life insurance product and get a commission.

Tim Baker: I could sell you a disability policy and get a commission. I could sell you an annuity and get a commission. I could sell you, you know what, whatever. So it could be a flat fee. So it’s, it’s, it’s, uh, and again, I, there’s no shade because I think what, what, what those advisors are trying to do is, you know, we, what?

Tim Baker: I was in that model, Tim. I thought we were awesome because. We didn’t work for one of the big wirehouses that we had to sell their proprietary products. We were like, we could sell whatever we wanted. And then I found out about fee only and I’m like, oh, like that’s what I want to be like. I don’t want my advice to be kind of directed by a product.

Tim Baker: I want it to be directed by the advice, the plan that’s in the best interest of the client. So those are the three broad, broad [00:38:00] buckets. So it’s fee only, which is, you know, no commissions. Essentially you have commission only, which I don’t know if they exist anymore because now we have E-Trade and Rob, we have access to the markets, right?

Tim Baker: And then we have everything in between, which is typically fee based or fee and commission. So, you know, you can look at, uh, an advisor website. So sometimes, uh, I’ll talk to an advisor and be like, Hey, I’m working with this group, or whatever. They’re fee only, they’re fiduciary. And I look at the website, I’m like, respectfully, they’re not, because at the bottom there’s disclaimers about I.

Tim Baker: Know. So if they have like a series seven, which is one of the exam, one of the first exams I passed when I got in the industry, that means that you can sell securities and earning commission if they have insurance. Um, which I used to have also, if they have, if they have insurance licenses, that means I can sell you life insurance and earn a commission.

Tim Baker: I had to give those up, the series seven and the, and the insurance stuff when I, when I transition to fee only. So I think these are more important to kind of understand the model in which they’re in, because I think even people in those models [00:39:00] don’t know what model they’re in. They’ll say, they’ll say, Hey, I’m a fiduciary while you a fiduciary all the time, or when you’re just talking about this specific thing.

Tim Baker: And that’s the thing that gets super confusing.

Tim Ulbrich: Tim, if I’m someone listening, I, maybe I work with an advisor. I have worked with an advisor in the past, or I’m looking to work with an advisor and I’m trying to answer this question like, which of these three models do they fit in? Um, we know that most people are probably in that middle one. You described that, that fee, fee-based.

Tim Ulbrich: Um, how do they figure this out? Is it information on the website disclosures? Is this for the a DV form comes in? Tell us more about that. If that’s the case, what, how, how do they do their homework on this?

Tim Baker: Yeah, the first place that I would look at, like first, like really quick, like when someone says, Hey, I’m working with this, and I, and I’m trying to suss out like what they, what they, I look at their website and typically at the bottom there’ll be, you know, um, you know, we use this, um, broker dealer. If you see like the words broker dealer, that’s typically their, their fee base, their fee and commission.

Tim Baker: Um, if you see things about insurance things. So typically at the bottom of their [00:40:00] website, there’ll be some type of disclaimer. That says like who they’re affiliate with. Um, you can ask them and see like, you know, the, the circles they might talk, talk in. Um, and then I think the last place would be like, go to broker.

Tim Baker: I think it’s broker check, broker check.com, and you can, um, basically look at their A DV brochures. So the A DV, I’m not even sure what the A DV stands, A DV stands for, but it’s basically there’s, there’s different, there’s part one, part two a, part two B, two A is gonna basically say it’s like, you know, for us it’s like a 40 page document that show that, that that kind of says, this is who we are, this is the services that we provide, this is the, this is the fees that we charge.

Tim Baker: Um, and it kind of gives you more of the detail. So if you think, see things like insurance or, um, again, security sales, things like that, you’re gonna be working with probably a fee-based advisor. So it would be ask them, it would be look at the website and it would go, and I would say, I would go to broker check to look [00:41:00] for the A DB brochures.

Tim Ulbrich: We’ll link to that in the show notes is broker check.finra.org. Um, so you can enter in an individual or affirm. So we’ll link to that in the show notes, and then we’ll also link to the page where it has Y fps, uh, a DV forms if folks are curious at looking at those more carefully as well. So get out a cup of coffee.

Tim Ulbrich: Uh, it’s not, not always the most exciting read, uh, but it’s an, it’s an important one. Alright, good stuff. Let, let’s continue the conversation then as we move to the third question, we start to talk about. Not only how are individuals license or which of those three models they’re in, but how do they ultimately get compensated?

Tim Ulbrich: And again, sounds obvious, but we’ll talk with a lot of folks where, hey, you know, what’s the current engagement look like? Um, how are you paying for services? And it’s either, I’m not sure, or the one I’ve heard several times before is like, I don’t, right? It’s free financial planning. No such thing. So third question here is how are you compensated and what ultimately is included in that fee and how is that calculated?

Tim Ulbrich: Right? And is that fee transparent? Tell us more about this [00:42:00] one.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so, so I think that’s the big thing is transparency, right? So like, we’re a business, you know, we’re, we’re in the business to, you know, uh, build a profitable business, you know, make money, all that kind of stuff. So, like, it’s important to say that out loud. We’re not a, we’re not this, you know, we have YFB Gibb, which is a non-profit, our main business or financial pharmacist is a for-profit company.

Tim Baker: So transparently like, you know, we wanna make sure that’s out there. I think, you know, the way, the way planners get paid, you know, some of the things I talked about is like insurance and investment products. I have a memory, Tim, of, um. Uh, you know, I, I was working with my previous firm and they’re, you know, my, one of the guys in our office is like, Hey, you know, if you, if you have the opportunity to sell your products, like a non-traded reit, do that.

Tim Baker: And I’m like, well, why? Like, what’s the, what’s the benefit? It’s like it pays 8% commission.

Tim Ulbrich: geez.

Tim Baker: And I’m like, uh, like to, I need, I need to take a shower. Like, it just is like yuck, right? So [00:43:00] it’s the same thing with like, uh, like variable annuities. Like, Hey, why pay variable annuities? It’s because the commissions are, so, I often say it’s like, typically the, the products that are better for the planner, the advisor are not good for you.

Tim Baker: Um. So, you know, if, if you’re, so when, when you, when we work with us, the only like, like we basically set the table and say, Hey Tim, you need x, y, Z insurance policy. And then we hand you off to someone that’s gonna sell the policy and not try to upsell you. Like we have, you know, organization, insurance companies that, you know, work with the only that understand that.

Tim Baker: Um, so you pay for the advice, not the product. That person that we send you to, they, they get the commission. Right. So, so there’s a, there’s a arm’s length, you know, in, in that regard. Anytime that you mix the sale of a product with advice, I think again, where you have the most conflict of interest. So, you know, if you’re looking at a statement and you’re like, I don’t really know how my advisor gets paid.

Tim Baker: Often there’ll be like an advisor’s like fee that you should see as a litem, but [00:44:00] sometimes there’s not, um, a place that you could look at is like when you sign a client agreement to, you know, to begin your, your engagement with a, an advisor. It should lay out exactly like what you’re paying. A lot of people just don’t look at that, or they don’t know, you know, typically when we sign clients, we go through the agreement together.

Tim Baker: And I do that in the spirit of transparency, Tim, because I wanna know pe, I want people to understand like what they’re paying and, and I, and part of it’s to combat the lack of transparency in the industry. And I, I always kind of go back to like, when I bought my first house many, many years ago, Tim, I felt like I was signing a tree and I couldn’t ask questions.

Tim Baker: And I just hated that feel on. So I want clients to say, Hey Tim, what does this mean? What does that mean? And, and we go through it together. Same thing with the invoice. So, but if you’re looking at a statement, there should be said, said something like advisor, um, expense or fee or commission, A lot of the times.

Tim Baker: Like a, a mutual fund. It’ll say like, it’ll have like an A or a C next to it. And that indicates that it’s an [00:45:00] a share mutual fund or a C share mutual fund, which has commissions tied to it. You just can’t see what it is. So if you, if you have x, y, z mutual fund and it says a, you would look up that mutual fund and you could see the, it’s called a front, a front loaded fee or a front loaded commission.

Tim Baker: It says that, okay, you paid 5.75% when you made that initial, but it’s like, you have to know that to, to, to, to like look for that. So it could be fee, it could be commissions on products. Um, probably the prevailing, um, model that most advisors use is called a UM Assets under management. So this is, um, a percentage that the advisor is managing directly.

Tim Baker: So, uh, they’ll take, they’ll typically roll over your investible assets like an old 401k an IRA. A Roth IRA, uh, a brokerage account, they’ll move it to their custodian and then they’ll manage it directly, and then they’ll, they’ll charge a fee out of that. The problem with that model in its purest form [00:46:00] is what I found is that if you don’t have a half a million dollars or a million dollars, the advisor will say, Hey, Tim would love to work with you, but I can’t help you unless you have this money.

Tim Baker: Or they’ll say, the way that I can help you is sell you a crappy insurance product. I’ll invest what you have and then I’ll talk to you every couple years until you have assets for me to manage IE that where, where you can pay me. I think the other, the other con, you know, the, one of the main conflicts of interest is that the more dollars that they’re managing, the more fee that you’re gonna pay.

Tim Baker: Right? So, you know, they’re incentivized for you to move, you know, accounts over to them. Um, so that’s the prevailing one. Another one is called a UA Assets under advisement. So this would be what they’re managing as well as what they’re not managing directly. So a, a held away 401k. Some advisors will, will put all that into a, a bucket and they’ll say, oh, they’re gonna charge a percentage of that.

Tim Baker: Um, could be flat fee where it’s just, Hey, it’s this fee. Um, you know. [00:47:00] And that’s it. It’s a, a flat, $5,000 a year, $10,000 a year. Um, and you know, the problem with that fee typically is you, you often see major increases in the fee over time because there’s no mechanism to kind of account for inflation, salaries going up, things like that.

Tim Baker: Um, or they’re typically higher, like a lot of flat fees. It’s like, Hey, you know, our minimum fee, flat fee is $7,500 or 10 grand, or, or things like that. So flat fee is definitely, uh, one and then hourly, you know, an hourly fee. And then there can be combinations of all these things, Tim, but those are the, the prevailing, um, you know, some, some people do hourly plus a percentage of what they do, or, you know, it’s, it’s, you know, an A A UM or you know, plus a, you know, they might charge a UM and then they’ll charge a planning fee in some way.

Tim Baker: Um, so that’s the big thing to, to understand is that there’s lots of different models out there, lots of different ways to kind of. Skin the [00:48:00] cat, so to speak, and just understanding, you know, who, who you’re working with and, and how they charge.

Tim Ulbrich: Tim, since a UM is the prevailing model, you did a great job of talking about all the different buckets, right? They can get paid from commissions. Uh, and then from a planning perspective, typically we see it’s either a UM to a lesser degree, a UA, uh, assets under advisement, which as you mentioned, would, would include some of the held away.

Tim Ulbrich: So not only what they’re managing, but also hey dollars that you have, for example, inside of a 401k at your current employer. And then you mentioned the flat fee. It could be a lot of variations of that in terms of both amount and what that looks like. And then of course, something like an hourly, more of a project type of of work.

Tim Ulbrich: If we go back to the a UM for a moment, given that that’s the prevailing model gi give us for, uh, for instance, so you know, what is a typical a UM fee? Certainly not consistent across the board. And then let’s say we have a client who’s got $400,000, that would be managed by an advisor under an a UI model what, what that might look like in terms of fees.

Tim Baker: Yeah, [00:49:00] so, so typically I would say the prevailing model is typically something that for an a UM model, it’s like 1% that’s tiered down, right? So if you, you know, if you have half a million dollars, 1% of that, you know that, that the advisor are managing 1% of that, it’s five grand a year that they’re gonna build directly outta your investment accounts.

Tim Baker: Um, that’s typically the prevailing, I was talking to a guy that, um, Liam plays soccer with over the weekend. He works for a big company based in, um, based in Columbus, and their model is ultra high net worth. You know, you got that, you have to have a minimum of like one to 2 million and their, their fee starts at about, uh, 1.5% or something, something there.

Tim Baker: Um, so. You know, there, there, it’s all over the place, but typically the, the, the, the one that I see most is like 1% that’s tiered down. So the more that you invest, you know, the, the fee, the fee goes down or over, or the percentage that that’s charged over time, um, the way that we [00:50:00] do it. So we, I was admittedly pretty anti a UM when I, when I started script back in the day, Tim, and there’s probably hours of, of footage on our podcast, you know, me kind of ex exclaiming that point.

Tim Baker: Um, and I think the reason why I was anti a UM is, is because I, I actually think that the model is, is somewhat elitist. So it, it kind of, it kind of kept a lot of people, um, that needed advice. IE you know, a 20, 30, 40 something year old, uh, pharmacist, um, out of the market

Tim Ulbrich: Excluded them.

Tim Baker: excluded ’em, because again, the, the, the prevailing advice was don’t worry about the student loans.

Tim Baker: I’ll invest your Roth, I’ll sell you insurance product and that’s how I can help you. Or they’re like, Hey, I can’t help you until you have that money. Um, so there’s lots of different reasons. So, so we’ve essentially adapted over the [00:51:00] years kind of a hybrid flat fee, a UM model. The positives of the a UM model is like, it, it, because it’s the most prevalent, everyone understands it, and everyone from a compliance perspective, um, you know, they, they kind of understand like,

Tim Ulbrich: SEC likes it.

Tim Baker: the, yeah, exactly.

Tim Baker: SEC likes it. They, they, they understand it. Um, but I think. The, one of the big things that we’ve discovered over working with hundreds of pharmacists is the a UM model. Even though money is fundable, meaning your money is your money, whether it’s in a, in a brokerage account, an IRA in your checking account, what we’ve discovered is that the, the model that we would charge, especially early on in our business, would be, um, very much in the realm of, hey, like we don’t really care where the assets are, so if you wanna manage it or, or whatever, you know, we’re gonna charge you a flat fee and you’re gonna primarily pay that out of [00:52:00] cashflow, your checking account, your credit card, et cetera, either as, as, because you need to or because you don’t have assets, or just, or just because that’s your option. The problem with that is that. The paying out a cash flow is more disruptive to your life and your lifestyle. So if I’m billing you quarterly on a financial plan, eventually you get some fee fatigue. And if you believe like us, that the best results come from the longevity of the relationship and stacking years of very intentional financial planning that yields the best result.

Tim Baker: That’s, that’s a problem. So the, the a UM model, so for if I’m billing you, you know, X amount of dollars per quarter out of your checking account or your credit card, that’s very different. Even though it’s the same amount. If I’m billing it out of a couple hundred thousand dollars of, of assets, it’s a little bit of outta sight, outta mind, even though it is your money, right?

Tim Baker: I wanna make that clear. But it doesn’t disrupt your lifestyle, so to speak. So. Our [00:53:00] models kind of adapted to, um, essentially if you have less than half a million, we’re gonna charge you some type of like flat fee that’s based on complexity. Anything above that is just gonna be based on, you know, a per, you know, a percentage that’s tiered down, um, on the assets that we’re managing.

Tim Baker: And I think the other thing that we, we change is like, we used to be more, um, ag agnostic about who’s managing the assets. Now we’re not, you know, we, we’ve experimented with that where it’s like, you can manage it or we can manage it. It was too many cooks in the kitchen, you know, so this is what we do. We do it well.

Tim Baker: We do this as, you know, our, what we do for a living. Um, we’re looking for clients that are like, yeah, take, take the investments. Obviously they play a major role in how we’re constructing the portfolio, but we’re basically doing, you know, the lion’s share of the work. And it was to kind of eliminate the too many cooks in the kitchen.

Tim Baker: So we feel that this hybrid model allows us to work with clients that have zero assets to clients that have. Hundreds of thousands, if not millions of [00:54:00] dollars. Um, and, and do that over the, over the long term.

Tim Ulbrich: Great stuff, Tim. I think it’s a great summary of, of how we’ve evolved over what is gonna be 10 years this fall,

Tim Baker: Yeah. Wow. Crazy.

Tim Ulbrich: Um, and where we started and what we’ve learned and, and how we’ve pivoted. And as you said, I was actually thinking about this morning as we were prepping for this. It was way back on episodes 15, 16 and 17.

Tim Ulbrich: So this would’ve been back in 2017 that we talked about some of this topic and, and why we landed on what was income and net worth at the time, uh, which was revolutionary Tim Baker style, uh, of fee assessment and how that worked for a season. But we realized where that kind of broke, and I cannot emphasize enough that we really believe the ROI of the relationship. Not only is it beyond just the quantitative, it’s also the qualitative, which gets overlooked so much in this industry, and it’s harder to measure. But even on the quantitative side, it comes from the years as you [00:55:00] mentioned. Compounding these wins and having the accountability and stacking those. And if that’s an 18 month relationship because the free structure doesn’t align such that it can’t be continued on, then you reduce the ROI of that long term.

Tim Ulbrich: And so, you know that that’s in part how we’ve arrived to, to the point that we have today.

Tim Baker: Yeah, and I would just piggyback on this, like there was a study done, um, by our friends up north, the Investment Funds Institute of Canada. They did a, they did a study, Tim, from 93 to 2008, um, that basically looked at. What was the impact of, of net worth or assets? Um, you know, with, you know, a group that didn’t work with a, an advisor and then those that did, and, you know, the impact on net worth for advise individuals was greatest by the end of study period of the study period.

Tim Baker: Suggesting that the impact of a financial advisor grows over time, which is kind of like, no duh, right, but I say that

Tim Ulbrich: any other [00:56:00] coach,

Tim Baker: yeah, yeah. I say that because like in a microwave society. We want results yesterday, completely get that. But you know, they, they’re, they have a graph that’s basically like no advice compared to, you know, those that, you know, have advice for seven to 14 years.

Tim Baker: It’s typically like two x now, I think based on what we do, like our results are a lot better than that. Um, you know, no promise for future, you know, uh, you know, like, that’s not a promise, but like, I, I feel like the transformation that we show with clients, it’s, it’s, it’s necessarily more impactful. ’cause I think we just cover a lot more than the, than the traditional advisor.

Tim Baker: So, um, to me it’s important to, you know, you’re, what you’re saying is that just like, invest in the value of advice compound compounds over time, and it’s stacking, you know, months, quarters, years, decades of really intentional planning. And I often, I, I tell the story. You know, when I, you know, before I was in, um, you know, financial services I worked in, I was a logistician.

Tim Baker: I worked in [00:57:00] warehouse. And so I would drive to the office at five o’clock in the morning, you know, go into a warehouse with no windows. You work all day, you know, 12 hours, you know, uh, leave the office at five or six, drive back in the dark. And I wouldn’t remember those drives at all. I was just on autopilot.

Tim Baker: And I think part of that, like, that, that can be an analogy of life and part of working with a financial planner, I think a good financial planner that’s looking at the life plan is questioning, like, like, are we on track? Is this what we, is this the way we want to do? Like, let’s, let’s have some introspection.

Tim Baker: And sometimes it, it, it requires a third party to ask those pointed questions to me to say like, Hey, let’s get off of io, uh, like of autopilot, and let’s ask some pointed questions about, you know, is this, is this a wealthy life for you today? And are we on track for a wealthy life, you know, 10, 20, 30 years in the future?

Tim Ulbrich: Tim. And I’m even thinking about our weekly team meetings where when we talk about the impact of the team. Yeah. I mean, of course we love seeing the net worth numbers go up. You know, we love seeing the, the, the numbers in the right [00:58:00] trajectory, you know, long term. And, and we certainly, you know, have seen that, but it, but it’s those life type of wins where it’s like, oh man, this, this is when I feel like I could run through the brick wall.

Tim Ulbrich: Right? It’s someone who’s been talking about doing this life dream for five years and we’ve moved the needle. I think about some of the examples we’ve talked about lately of someone really pursuing a passion and hobby and, and, uh, around horses and the passion they have there. Uh, previously, you know, somebody who looking at their experience as a pilot and ultimately, you know, having a fraction of a plane.

Tim Ulbrich: Or, I think about Jess and I in our own journey and some of the decisions we’ve made as a part of our own life plan and like those are the things that individually when we think about significance, meaning, and impact, but also as we celebrate our clients as a firm, like that’s when the team lights up.

Tim Baker: Yeah, and I, and I, I just found out recently the, the, the, the pharmacist you’re talking about, um, you know, that huge amount of student loans, credit card debt, you know, and you fast [00:59:00] forward a couple years and, you know, she’s essentially flipped her net worth from negative 300 to positive 300 in a couple years.

Tim Baker: And that’s not what she’s talking about. You know, she’s talking about pickles, the horse, um, the big old diesel truck that she has moving from one part of Florida to another, to be closer to the National Equestrian Center. She actually just emailed me this week saying that she, she bought another house.

Tim Baker: Uh, so we’re working through that. But the other big thing for her, when we talked way back in the day, she’s like, I’ve always wanted to do an African safari. So earlier this year she told me she booked a trip with her mom to do an a African safari. So like, those are the things, Tim, where it’s, you know, a lot of pharmacists will say, get, you know, your guys are scientists.

Tim Baker: You wanna weigh the scales of like, Hey, if I pay this fee. Am I gonna get that back? You know, what’s the ROI? And I put that back on its head like, well, what is, what do you mean by ROI to me? You know, we need to be technically sound so we can make sure that, you know, a lot of financial advisors will say, and that would be a question I would ask.

Tim Baker: It’s like, how do you guys measure progress? A lot [01:00:00] of it, financial advisors will say, look at me. I got you a 10% return on your investments. But who cares if you’re like drowning in debt or you’re living a life that doesn’t necessarily line up with the, you know, your goals. Money’s a tool, right? So to me, quantitatively it’s net worth.

Tim Baker: And then what are the qualitative things that are important to you? And are we doing something about it? Part of our job is to hold the mirror up and say, you know, carrot and stick. Hey Tim, I’m talking to the my myself. Hey, Tim, nowhere in your financial plan does it say that you need to lead the league in bottles of whiskey in your collection, right?

Tim Ulbrich: Although, although you

Tim Baker: I do. Uh, but like, that’s not in my financial plan. So like, if I’m, if I, if I’m like in a pinch or if I’m not like doing the other things on my financial plan, my advisors to say, Hey, guy, like, how about we not spend this money toward, you know, the, um, the, the whiskey and like, let’s like this, this bucket that’s been sitting dormant that you want to do X, Y, and Z where, show me the money, right?

Tim Baker: Because at the end of the day, Tim, we’re not gonna, we’re not gonna lay on our deathbeds and say, [01:01:00] oh man, I wish YFP, or I wish my advisor would’ve said, I sh I, I would’ve told me to put more money into our Roth. IRA. We’re not, we’re gonna say, I wish I would’ve got into horseback riding again because it was a passion of mine that I just put on the back burner.

Tim Baker: ’cause I think I couldn’t afford it, or it wasn’t a priority or played in a band or changed careers or became a pilot. You know, you know, that was, you know, those are the things that are transformational, inspiring, and I could talk about this all day long. Um, but that’s what this is about. It’s not about.

Tim Baker: You know, the ones and zeros, it’s not, we need to do that to make sure we keep our job and we push this forward and we need to be technically sound and all that. But to me it’s about aligning the life plan with the financial plan and holding people accountable to that. And I think that’s a big thing is having a third party that knows your goals, knows your, your balance sheet, and, and, and has your best interest in mind.

Tim Baker: So, um, yeah, I [01:02:00] think that’s super important.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. As we say all the time, right? It’s, it’s, are we living a rich life today while we’re taking care of our future selves, right? That’s the quantitative and the qualitative and, and I get it, it’s an analytical audience, right? I am, I am an analytical pharmacist. Like the ROI is a good question. As we’re talking about, you know, the numbers and even as we’re we’re talking, I’ll link to it in the show notes.

Tim Ulbrich: I’m thinking about the, uh, the Vanguard study of putting a value on your value and what’s the actual potential. Quantitative, ROI of an advisor, and it’s, it’s really interesting because when, when they look at those numbers, it, it comes from several different things, you know, whether it be asset allocation, saving on expense rebalancing, but the behavioral coaching is a huge chunk of that, which people, I think, underestimate, uh, in, in part, maybe due to some overconfidence.

Tim Ulbrich: But what’s missing from this table altogether of the ROI is what, what is the qualitative side

Tim Baker: Yeah. Yeah. And I, and I think the Vanguard study that was done in 2001 [01:03:00] a, a value of advice advisor to Alpha. Um, it’s, it’s narrow in a sense. I think it looks, it looks at a hypothetical portfolio, half a million dollars over 25 years, you know, with an advisor. You know, that’s managing it. It grows 8% per year or to 3.4 million for a self-manage a di iyer.

Tim Baker: It’s 5% per year. So it grows from half a million to about 1.7. But again, I say that’s too narrow. Like if you wanna look at quantitative talking to about net worth, not investment returns. If you wanna look at the whole thing. I want quantitative, I want net worth, and I want the qualitative stuff. Are you living a wealthy life today?

Tim Baker: Like, are you doing the things that you’re passionate about? Um, so I think that to to, to your point, like, you know, pharmacists, what’s the ROI like, what’s, you know, what with ’em, what’s in it for me, Tim? Like, I get that. But I would, I would turn that question right back to, to you, the prospect, the listener, to say like, define that for me.

Tim Baker: Like, how do I know? You know, [01:04:00] we’re scratching that itch and I think it’s a little bit more, it’s a little bit more than I give you this fee and I get this back in some, some way.

Tim Ulbrich: Great stuff. So that’s our third question. How are you compensated? What’s included in the fee? How do you calculate your fee? Is it transparent? We, we broke down the different fees that are common in the industry. The fourth question, Tim, I’m gonna move past this one quickly because we’ve already addressed it in the areas we’ve talked about.

Tim Ulbrich: The fourth question is, what are your conflicts of interest when working with a typical client? And if we go back to the three different buckets you mentioned in terms of the commissions, the fee only, or the fee based, or the fee and commissions another term for that fee based, you can start to identify where those conflicts of interest may be.

Tim Ulbrich: And as you say, often there is no such thing as conflict free advice. Correct?

Tim Baker: Correct. I know, I think it’s Tony Robinson, one of his books, he call, he talks about conflict free advice, and there doesn’t, doesn’t exist. Um, it just doesn’t, you know, so, so to me, if it doesn’t exist, tell me what the conflicts are and, you know, let, like let’s talk about that. Let’s be upfront. Yeah. And I [01:05:00] think oftentimes, you know, you’re, you know, if you’re, if you’re dancing around that question as a planner.

Tim Baker: There’s, there’s problems. So, you know, you know, and that, and that’s I think one of the frustrating things sometimes is someone’s like, I wanna work with a fee, like a, a fee only person. And I think I’m working with them and I’m like, eh, you’re not, but then like, there’s some inertia to change,

Tim Ulbrich: Mm-hmm.

Tim Baker: you know, even if you know that they’re, you know, they’re not fee only or whatever, or that you don’t really know what you’re, they’re paying.

Tim Baker: And like, there’s a nurse there and I get that. So, you know, to me it’s, it’s having that conversation. And I think often those conversations are buried or it’s, you know, it’s, it’s, we talk in circles until we can get through the question and then we’re onto the next thing. And again, I just think tr be transparent, right?

Tim Baker: Like, like that’s, that’s huge. So, um, you know, are you obligated to act at as a fiduciary all the time? And I think that all the time is the operative word, because sometimes, you know, in some of these models, fee-based, you can say, I’m, I act as a fi fiduciary, but it’s only when I’m, when I’m working with.[01:06:00] 

Tim Baker: ERISA type funds, like a 401k. ’cause that’s, that’s the, you know, department of Labor is trying to like really narrow that down. Not, you know, some of these other entities that I think should really be drawn a firm line.

Tim Ulbrich: Tim, our last question and five questions to ask when hiring a financial planner is, what is your investment philosophy? And, and I would argue Tim thi this is an important two-way conversation, um, because the, the investment philosophy of the firm is there alignment there with the investment philosophy or preference of the client, right?

Tim Ulbrich: So talk, talk to us about why this is important and I think this one gets overlooked a lot that someone may have a preference, but that doesn’t necessarily align with, with the firm and how they approach their investments.

Tim Baker: Yeah. So what one of the questions I asked a prospective client is like, you know, if you had to make a list of the things that you want in your financial planner and for, or in your team for you to say like, Hey, these are my people. Um, you know, the, one of the things I’m kind of looking for and, and I think very rarely it comes up.[01:07:00] 

Tim Baker: But, you know, sometimes I’ll, I’ll see people that are like, I need you to beat the s and p 500. And I’m like, that’s not us, right? So we believe in more passive buy the market. Don’t try to beat the, don’t try to beat the market. If you’re more of an active, you know, um, investor, you think that there’s ways to kind of game the system and beat, you know, beat the market.

Tim Baker: And only one person I think can, can consistently do that. Warren Buffet, who can buy companies and basically extract return, you know, most of us can’t do

Tim Ulbrich: Mm-hmm.

Tim Baker: So it’s a, you know, it’s, is it, are you trying to beat the market or is it kind of more of a singles and doubles approach where you’re in the right asset allocation, you’re in the right asset location, we’re keeping expense low, those types of things.

Tim Baker: So, um, a lot of people are like, I don’t know what, what is your philosophy? And see if that that works for me. So I think if you, if you trust the market and you let it do its thing over the course of long periods of time, 10, 15, 20, 30 years plus. Market takes care of you, right? So you waste a lot of time and money trying to like, gain the system.

Tim Baker: But it [01:08:00] might be like, you know, in this day and age, like what’s your opinion on digital assets? Right? So for a long time there, it was kind of similar to student loans. It’s like, ah, like don’t worry about it. And now digital assets are, are, you know, it should be something that your advisors is at least talking to you about.

Tim Baker: You know, are you, do you like Vanguard funds? Is it ESG, which is like Sustaina sustainable, invest in, you know, are there, are there different strategies, you know, that make sense to you that, that fit more into your portfolio? So I think a conversation about this is super important. And I would say a lot of the time, you know, prospects will take the lead from their advisor, whether they’re active or passive.

Tim Baker: Um, and I, I grew up in a, you know, where I not grew up, but my, my previous firm, Tim, um, kind of helped mold me. I. Where my in investment philosophy is, and it was more of a case of like, what not to do. So, you know, when I was, when I was being mentored, you know, we, we basically [01:09:00] selected investments from the people.

Tim Baker: You know, they, they would, they would come to our office, you know, these wholesalers, these mutual fund wholesalers would come to our office in a fancy car wearing fancy suits, and they would take us out to a fancy lunch and they would f show us fancy glossies of like, why their funds were so great.

Tim Ulbrich: It’s like old school pharma,

Tim Baker: Yeah, exactly.

Tim Baker: And they would say, Hey Tim, you know, when Tim Ulbrich rolls over his money, like wink, wink, like in, you know, use our funds and, you know, to, to, to mobilize a sales force like that costs a lot of money. And who pays for that? The investor. And it’s typically in the, in the form of commissions or an expense ratio.

Tim Baker: So, you know. These, that was our criteria to pick, you know, um, you know, large cap, mid cap, small cap, like these different, you know, sleeves of investments. And they were often super expensive. The other, the other, um, mentor that I had was, [01:10:00] you know, it’s more of an active strategy. It’s like, Hey, client, we’re gonna buy x, y, Z ETFs at a hundred dollars per share, and then when it goes to a one 10, we’re gonna basically put a stop gap at 1 0 5 and then kind of lock in our gains.

Tim Baker: And if it goes at 1 0 5, we’ll sell out and then we’ll live to fight another day. And, you know, we’ll look at the VIX and all this kind of stuff. And we have core and we have explorer positions. And the, the problem with that model was like, there was a fla, I remember being in a conference and there was a flash crash where something happened in China and the, and the market went down and then went back up.

Tim Baker: So in this, in this scenario. Had a, let’s say we had a, a, a, a sell order at 1 0 5 by the time we actually got filled, because some of these ETFs were thinly traded, mean not a lot. It got filled at 80 and then the market’s back up and now we’re, we sold at 80 and we’re trying to buy at one 10 or 1, 1 0 2 or something like that.

Tim Baker: And I’m like, okay, mentor, what do we do next? And it’s like, I don’t know. [01:11:00] So, so that was more, you know, more of the active strategy. And I’m like, you know, there has to be a better way. So, um, I’ve read books like the Index Revolution, um, which is a quick read that is kind of like what I would say. It’s like, hey, trust the market.

Tim Baker: You know, if you read something in the Wall Street Journal about a biopharmaceutical stock that’s been priced in many, many weeks ago, like, you’re not, it’s not a hot stock tip. Um, so it’s kind of a, the more born investment is the better, you know, investment should be like. Paying down a debt or watching paint drive, typically the more sexy it is, the the more expensive it is.

Tim Baker: And, and the more I think risky it is. So it should be super boring singles and doubles. Don’t try to hit home runs, you know, and often you wanna do the opposite of how you feel. So, you know, if the market’s crashing, you want to take your investment ball and go home. Don’t. If you have more money to put in, do that.

Tim Baker: You know, not investment advice. If the market is flying high and people are like, I wanna buy, buy, buy. That’s, you have to be cautious. ’cause it [01:12:00] goes in cycles. Right. So, you know, you will often wanna do the exact opposite of how you feel. And, and you know, these are the behavioral things that a lot of people get in trouble that, you know, they’ll, they’ll sell, they’ll sell low, they’ll buy high.

Tim Baker: Right. And, you know, part of our job is to kind of, you know, establish a structure and a framework to potentially talk you off the cliff from doing things that are rash. You know, and I’ve done that in the past before, you know, getting into financial services. I’ve done silly things with my investments, which I, which I regret.

Tim Ulbrich: Tim, it reminded me of, uh, Daniel Crosby, who wrote the Behavioral Investor, had a chance to interview him on the show. I’m drawing a blank on what number it is. We’ll link to it in the, the show notes. But one of the quotes from the behavioral investor that he had was, humans are wired to act, markets tend to reward inaction.

Tim Ulbrich: Um, and I love his take because he, he brings a, a research-based psychology approach to how you think about your money and. A little bit of dose of, of humble pie, right? When you understand the, the limitations of what we can do and great recommendations. You beat me to it. I was gonna mention, uh, the index [01:13:00] revolution, but Charles Ellis, if folks are looking to read more on this, unshakeable by Tony Robbins is another good one, uh, that touches several of the things that we talked about during today’s show.

Tim Ulbrich: Um, but really good stuff. I know we covered a lot of ground. Uh, this is one of our longer episodes, but I, I, I really feel like one that we’re gonna be able to come back to on repeat of, Hey, what are the things that you should be thinking about looking at questions you should be asking when you’re thinking about hiring a financial planner.

Tim Ulbrich: And we’re really proud of what we have built, our team of CFPs, certified financial planners at YFP, the impact that we’re having. And we would love to have an opportunity to talk with you, whether you work with an advisor now or not, and this may be your first engagement. We’d love to have a conversation to learn more about, Hey, what’s going on in your financial plan?

Tim Ulbrich: You can learn more about our services and together we can determine whether or not it’s a good fit. You can go to your financial pharmacist.com and right at the top of the page you’ll see an option to book a discovery call. Uh, we’ll also link to that in the show notes. 

Tim Baker: Yeah. And I would just say, Tim, to add to that, like [01:14:00] sometimes I get the question from prospective clients. They’re like, oh, do I, like, do I need an advisor or should I, you know, do I have enough money? Or things like that. And there’s always gonna be a population of, of people out there that are DIYers and whether that’s, you know, handling your money, um, mowing your lawn, cleaning your house, whatever, whatever that is, right?

Tim Baker: There’s always gonna be that. I would say for the most part though. If you’re a pharmacist and you’re making a six-figure income as a household, and we’re aspiring to be, you know, a seven-figure pharmacist to kind of take from the book, you need an advisor, right? Like pharmacists are pharmacists. You do what you do.

Tim Baker: I think with the amount of money that we’re talking about, and I think the intentionality that we’re really trying to focus on, like. You hire a financial planner. Right. And, and I think sometimes I speak with pharmacists and they’re like, oh, they’re not sure. Or to give themselves permission. Do I have enough?

Tim Baker: And, and like I said, we work with clients that. Are all over the map in terms of their, like, where they’re starting net worth, which is very, very negative or very, very positive. And I [01:15:00] think to me, this is about building in a foundation and intention with your money and letting you know, a professional, you know, do that versus, you know, kind of you doing it on the side.

Tim Baker: ’cause I think there’s a lot of, you know, positive aspects from obviously the technical, um, stuff, but then just like the optimization. And I think one of the things that, you know, the, one of the. Prevailing things that I talk about, that I talk to that’s missing is like, am I optimized? Am is the money that’s kind of flowing through my household, you know, direct it in the best way possible.

Tim Baker: And there’s a variety of ways to look at that. So I would just plug that, you know, if you’re listening to this, you probably do need a financial planner, obviously bias actor, right, Tim? But, um, I would just throw that in there.

Tim Ulbrich: So Tim, I. 

Tim Baker: Yeah, thanks Tim.  [01:16:00] 

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

Note: Referral fees from affiliate links in this table are sent to the non-profit YFP Gives. 

Read the full advertising disclosure here.

Bonus

Starting Rates

About

YFP Gives accepts advertising compensation from companies that appear on this site, which impacts the location and order in which brands (and/or their products) are presented, and also impacts the score that is assigned to it. Company lists on this page DO NOT imply endorsement. We do not feature all providers on the market.

$750*

Loans

≥150K = $750* 

≥50K-150k = $300


Fixed: 4.89%+ APR (with autopay)

A marketplace that compares multiple lenders that are credit unions and local banks

$500*

Loans

≥50K = $500

Variable: 4.99%+ (with autopay)*

Fixed: 4.96%+ (with autopay)**

 Read rates and terms at SplashFinancial.com

Splash is a marketplace with loans available from an exclusive network of credit unions and banks as well as U-Fi, Laurenl Road, and PenFed

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 402: Building a Legacy: The Family Constitution Blueprint with Julia Myers


In this episode, Julia Myers, pharmacist and founder of Generational Wisdom, shares her Family Constitution Blueprint, a tool to help families define values, build traditions, and create a lasting legacy.

This episode is brought to you by First Horizon.

Episode Summary

In this episode, Tim Ulbrich is joined by Julia Myers, a pharmacist and the founder of Generational Wisdom,  a business born out of her own powerful story of transformation. Julia shares her Family Constitution Blueprint, a thoughtful and deeply practical tool that helps families clarify their core values, establish meaningful traditions, and create a vision that lasts for generations.

Julia shares: 

  • Why identifying your family’s values is a powerful first step toward legacy-building
  • How to translate your intentions into everyday actions, especially in the midst of busy professional and family life
  • And how pharmacists and healthcare professionals can use these principles to create more alignment, connection, and purpose at home

Whether you’re raising kids, managing a household, or just want to live with greater intention, this conversation will leave you inspired and equipped to take that next step.

About Today’s Guest

Dr. Julia Myers is an international speaker, founder of Generational Wisdom, and a leading authority on teaching families how to talk to kids about money. Julia received her PharmD from University of Wyoming and her MBA from University of Tennessee. She spent nearly two decades as a board-certified pharmacist and distinguished health care executive before a career-ending diagnosis changed the trajectory of her life. Today, she blends wisdom and common sense to help parents navigate the pressures of raising kids without entitlement. As a mom of five, she brings both insight and authenticity to every stage she steps on.

Key Points from the Episode

  • [00:00] Welcome Back, Julia Myers!
  • [00:40] The Importance of Financial Planning
  • [02:04] Julia’s Professional Journey
  • [04:27] The Genesis of Generational Wisdom
  • [04:41] Defining Generational Wisdom
  • [07:44] Creating a Shared Family Vision
  • [13:47] The Family Constitutional Framework
  • [20:55] Engaging Kids in Family Conversations
  • [22:05] Adapting Family Plans Over Time
  • [23:10] The Three Ps of a Family Constitution
  • [23:30] Aligning Actions with Beliefs
  • [24:45] The Importance of Vision in Decision-Making
  • [25:18] Addressing Financial and Emotional Stagnation
  • [29:14] Taking Responsibility for Change
  • [31:07] Practical Steps for Creating a Family Constitution
  • [36:27] Celebrating and Preserving Family Values
  • [39:48] Final Thoughts and Resources

Episode Highlights

“  What do kids want more than anything in the world? To be treated like a big kid or to be treated like an adult. And so by pulling them into these kinds of conversations, you’re establishing that that’s just part of what we do.” – Julia Myers [21:07]

“  The way we grew up with money, or the stress or the anxiety we feel aren’t our fault, yet it is our responsibility today to decide how do we want to look going forward,  what do we want to focus on? I think there’s power  in being able to decide where you focus.” – Julia Myers [26:20]

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Julia, welcome back to the show.

Julia Myers: Hey, so excited to be here, Tim. Thank you again.

Tim Ulbrich: Well, I am thrilled to have you back. We, we had you on episode three 11 where we talked about kids and money, a topic that’s near and dear to both of our hearts, and we’re gonna continue this theme around personal finance and the family and having a vision around how we handle our money and some of the intentionality.

Tim Ulbrich: Uh, of which we adopt the financial plan in our family. So we’re, we’re not gonna spend as much time on the kids aspect, per se. We will hyperlink to that previous show in the show notes if folks wanna check that out. But I would say this is a continuation, uh, of that theme. And Julia, as I was prepping for this episode, [00:01:00] I couldn’t help but think that one of the things I say on repeat on this show is that a good financial plan has to be accounting for yes, our future sell.

Tim Ulbrich: All the objective things, making sure we have enough in in our retirement accounts and we’re saving for our goals. All the important things we tend to think about, but also prioritizing living a rich life today. It’s the math plus the emotions. And as we talk today, this topic to me is one of those that maybe some folks will, will hear and say, Hey, I don’t know if I can put my arms around this in the same way I can, my retirement account, but oh, so important, right?

Tim Ulbrich: When we think about the financial plan.

Julia Myers: Absolutely, absolutely. One of my, my favorite quotes as we dive in today is Wealth Without Wisdom

Tim Ulbrich: Hmm

Julia Myers: wasted.

Tim Ulbrich: mm-hmm.

Julia Myers: So that’s where we’re gonna dive in today to really help the listeners figure out, okay, we can wrap our arms around our, our 4 0 1 ks, our retirement accounts, but how do we wrap our arms around?

Julia Myers: What’s [00:02:00] that meaning? What’s that legacy? What are we leaving behind?

Tim Ulbrich: I love that, Julia, because I’m convinced. We’re all gonna look back someday. Uh, if we’re, if we’re blessed to live long enough and this type of conversation and what we’re gonna talk about today, these are the things that we’re gonna look back and say, ah, that’s what really mattered. That’s what really mattered.

Tim Ulbrich: Alright, so let, let’s talk about your professional journey briefly. It spans pharmacy leadership business. Now your work with generational wisdom. Remind our listeners for those that didn’t catch episode three 11, what inspired the transition from a traditional pharmacy career to the work that you’re doing now?

Julia Myers: So I joke that I used to read the fine print and now I live it. And so this moment when everything changed for me was when I was handed a consent form from a surgeon as I was waiting for emergency eye surgery to repair a detached retina. So two hours before I was sitting at my work table looking at patient charts, [00:03:00] and the screen faded to black.

Julia Myers: We as pharmacists, we know this, right? If you experience sudden blurriness or changes in vision, you call your doctor right away. I went up two floors, saw the eye clinic. They said, you’re next for emergency surgery, and it was that fine print that basically said. How, you know, like, ready are you to hand everything off?

Julia Myers: And I was like, well, I’ve spent my career. I went to the University of Wyoming for my doctorate pharmacy degree, got my MBA from University of Tennessee, spent 17 years in, um, retail and then academic medical center. Like none of that mattered as I was filling out these forms. And so that moment really pivoted me.

Julia Myers: Because as I was signing, it wasn’t signing that I was prepared ‘ cause I was, I had a financial plan. I had done all the things right as pharmacists. We checked the boxes. I was signing that my family was prepared with the plan of what would happen if an emergency [00:04:00] happened or my unexpected passing. And in that moment, everything changed for me because I was hit with signing these forms and reading the fine print, which.

Julia Myers: You know, we all live the commercials, right? We we’re tired of seeing the family walk across the screen with a happy dog and we’re like, we don’t ignore what happens in the fine print, but we all might have to face that someday. And what hit me and changed everything for me was, is my family prepared or just provided for? Just provided for. And it stuck with me and I’m like, okay, when I’m on the other side of this surgery, what am I gonna do differently? So that they’re not just provided for that, they’re prepared. So that’s the genesis of generational wisdom. ’cause I want that to be the household term. That’s what I want us to pass on.

Julia Myers: ’cause again, wealth without wisdom is wasted.

Tim Ulbrich: Let’s talk about that term, generational wisdom. That’s gonna be the thread of our [00:05:00] interview, our time together today. What does that phrase, generational wisdom, what does that mean to you?

Julia Myers: To me, it means not an amount, but a mindset. It means how do you take accountability? Ownership and responsibility for those gifts that you’ve been given. And so, you know, there are so many ways that we are blessed as pharmacists, and there are so many ways that we have head starts. Our kids are now having head starts, and why did we do all this in the first place?

Julia Myers: You know, I’m the first person in my family to get an advanced degree and my kids only know life. Like that. They don’t know what it was like for me growing up where I tell a story about my first memories of money were counting coins and rolling pennies and stacking them and putting them into sleeves and taking them to the bank.

Julia Myers: Those were my first memories of money, and to me, that’s wealth. That’s what I [00:06:00] learned was that money mattered. Counting money, quantifying money. But now that I’m reflecting on this journey to say I was able to rely on my plan to bridge this gap, but how did I do that? It’s that wisdom that then leads to discernment.

Julia Myers: So the behavior is discernment. How do you know what to buy when you can buy anything? ’cause you can’t buy everything.

Tim Ulbrich: Mm-hmm.

Julia Myers: So discernment, how do you make decisions to me is wisdom. It’s that, you know, quote that talks about the serenity prayer of, you know, the wisdom to know the difference. What can you change and what can you not change?

Julia Myers: And I’m misquoting it, but that has stuck with me and it really is what it all is about.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. And how do we then develop. That vision, that culture for our family, as we think about generational wisdom, right? Passing down that wisdom, what are the behaviors? What are the habits? What are the mindsets? What are the experiences? You and I have talked about several stories on. Previous podcast webinars that we’ve done of core [00:07:00] memories we have.

Tim Ulbrich: You just articulated one right there of rolling coins. You took me right back to doing the same thing at my kitchen table, or when my dad took me to the bank for the first time and I opened up a debit card and it was like, Hey, all of a sudden I’ve got this piece of plastic and it’s accessing money and what is going on here.

Tim Ulbrich: I mean, these experiences, whether they’re intentional or unintentional, very much shape our money mindset. And I think a key piece that you and I have discussed before, how important it is that we start to get more in tune if we’re not already with what those experiences were for us growing up. So we can understand our money mindset and maybe some of the, the good experiences or the baggage that we have growing up.

Tim Ulbrich: Because the more we’re in tune with our own money mindset, our own money scripts, money philosophies, whatever we wanna call it. That’s the mode in which we’re often operating. And then of course, if we’ve got children that are watching, whether we think they’re watching or not, they are watching. They are watching.

Julia Myers: [00:08:00] yes.

Tim Ulbrich: I want to talk about a shared family vision. Thi this really energizes me and I, I think especially in today’s day and age, you know, I think about the phase of life that I’m in, Julia right now, I’ve got four boys. Five to almost 14 every night of the week, we’re running around to different types of activities.

Tim Ulbrich: It feels like from a schedule standpoint, things are constantly in a hurry from a financial standpoint, whether it’s youth activity, sports, you name it, right? There’s always opportunity. We’re just getting thrown so many things at us at once, and in this fast-paced world, it’s so hard. I think for us to slow down as a family and really define.

Tim Ulbrich: What our vision is, where are we going and why are we going there? That’s hard work, right? It’s, it’s, it’s easier to just keep going in the hurry. So tell us about, from your perspective, before we get into the details around the blueprint, if you will, for how families can begin to think about this. Why is it so [00:09:00] important in today’s fast-paced world for families to pause, slow down and define that family shared vision.

Julia Myers: Awesome tee up there, and I think the main problem is the disconnection. So calling out the disconnection of. What we think we’re building by doing these activities with our kids, what we think we’re doing by being in that busy and that hustle or building this retirement account or hitting that net worth.

Julia Myers: The disconnect is what we think we’re building and what actually lasts is not the same. And that’s a gap and that’s a way that we have to close it. Um, came across a crazy statistic. $84 trillion with a T is going to change hands in the next 20 years.

Tim Ulbrich: Transfer. Yeah. Mm-hmm.

Julia Myers: trillion of that is going to millennials, but only 26% of parents feel confident their kids can handle it.

Julia Myers: So that illustrates and really [00:10:00] quantifies this disconnect is going to continue. We will be the statistic, we will be the fine print if we don’t create this vision. We all work for employers that have a shared vision. They have a mission, vision, and values, and it sits on the wall. Personally, we have those things that drive us, but what about when we come together as a family, and what if we say that is the most important reason of why we’re doing all this in the first place?

Julia Myers: It’s not to make your employer more money. It’s not to check your boxes to say, I lived a fulfilled life. It’s always in community, but those people around you, whatever your family unit looks like. That’s the hard work, but the easy work to skip over is creating that foundation, creating that like legacy that lives beyond you.

Julia Myers: What’s your family about? Who are you for? Um, I like to say when the founding fathers, we dust off the US History books. You’ve probably gone through it at least three times by now. Right. And we find [00:11:00] stories of how the constitution was built. It was not with this. Very specific moment in time created. It was actually like the three parts of, you know, the preamble.

Julia Myers: Why are we doing this? What are we doing and how do we keep it current? And when we look at that legacy that is the United States of America and all the things that come with that, almost 250 years later, it’s like that’s a legacy that lasts. We as families should want that too. We really should. And when I’m working with families, I find most of them when I’ll ask, you know, what are you doing to preserve your wealth?

Julia Myers: We know this wealth is shifting. We know we worked really hard and we don’t want it just to be squandered. What are you doing? Most commonly folks are saying, I have a trust. The trust is gonna take care of it. I have an estate plan and the quote that I use is that a trust [00:12:00] controls the money. A constitution controls the meaning, and you might be okay with just a trust, but it’s only as good as the people left to implement it.

Julia Myers: And so that’s, I think where we’re gonna really dive in today is say, what about is our family? Are we doing beyond those check boxes of the trust or beneficiaries? But what’s that vision? What’s that meaning? What’s the alignment that helps us say yes to the right things and no, to anything that doesn’t align with where we wanna go.

Tim Ulbrich: That’s a beautiful picture, Julia. And as we’ve talked about in the show before, those estate planning documents are, are incredibly important, but if they are missing the vision or the constitution as you’re describing it, we, we should really think about those estate planning documents as living underneath.

Tim Ulbrich: I. The vision, the constitution that we’ve defined, that’s the bigger vision. And the estate planning documents are, are an important piece of that. But it, it’s certainly not meant to be all encompassing. [00:13:00] And we, we talk about this at, at YFP as a part of our services, we do what’s called script your plan, which is the, the vision that we have, the torch that we’re gonna light for the financial plan because before we make any decision.

Tim Ulbrich: How much are we saving in our retirement account? Are we gonna pay down this debt or that debt? Are we gonna buy an investment property? Right? You, you name the, the list of decisions and choices we have before we make any one of those, which we often start there and go off and running without having a clear vision.

Tim Ulbrich: That’s where we find ourselves, I think 5, 10, 15, 20 years into the future. And we’ve been in this state of hurry and we’re like, time out. Where are we going and why are we going there? And sometimes we wake up to find out, hey, we’re on a different path than we really even wanna be on altogether. So just a word of encouragement for our folks that are listening.

Tim Ulbrich: You know, kids, no kids. As we talk about family, this idea of a constitution about a vision is such an instrumental part of the financial plan. And I’m gonna dig deeper [00:14:00] into what you have built called the Family Constitutional Framework. And we’re gonna spend a a decent amount of time here, and for folks that are just eager to jump in and kind of learn more, if you go to julia myers.com/constitution, you can learn all about this resource and what we’re gonna be discussing here.

Tim Ulbrich: Over the next several minutes, and we’ll of course link to that in the show notes. So, Julia, this family constitutional framework that you have, it begins with really identifying the core values.

Julia Myers: Exactly.

Tim Ulbrich: Why is this an important first step? And give us some examples. Help, help us understand what you mean by core values and, and maybe an example of what some of these are for your own family.

Julia Myers: Absolutely. And so when I think of values, I think of the foundation, the, the groundwork. So are we building a 4,000 square foot home or are we building a 400 square foot home? And the values you use to do one or the other, very literally need to be different.

Tim Ulbrich: Hmm.

Julia Myers: [00:15:00] When you combine, you know, parents, multi-generational family members, everybody together, different things are important to different people.

Julia Myers: And if we don’t know what we’re building and we’re not all united and on the same page, we’re gonna have, I don’t know what, who knows what it’ll look like? It’ll be abstract. How about that? It won’t be something that’s sustainable and that lasts, or that weathers the challenges that life throw at us. So two of the questions I like to kind of ask is.

Julia Myers: What matters the most to your family? And those are often emotions. And then also, what do you wanna be remembered for? Because do you wanna be remembered for the example of how hard you worked or how much overtime you did? Or do you wanna be remembered for being a coach on a sports team or being the person that you know volunteered in the parent room or the classroom?

Julia Myers: And so when we think about values. It’s really easy to say I want all of those things, but just like I tell my [00:16:00] kids, when you go to the library, you can’t check out all the books and you can’t check out the biggest book just because it says that it’s the biggest book, right? It’s gotta mean something to you.

Julia Myers: And so I, in our family, what we do as our values, and everybody can say this, so that’s the true litmus test, is not just writing it on the wall, but can everybody in your family articulate it? That’s the message of like, now it’s really working. Um, so we value, love, experiences and learning.

Tim Ulbrich: Hmm.

Julia Myers: So those are big buckets that love, meaning, love your neighbor, love your family, love your environment.

Julia Myers: Like love, right? And english means not as many things as it does in other languages, but it’s all encompassing experiences. For us experiences mean that we are prioritizing travel activities, events, um, and we’ll [00:17:00] spend money and time aligned with that and then learning always be learning. So it’s not necessarily just the formal education system, but it could be things that are continuously learning and continuously challenging and trying to find new things.

Julia Myers: So values for us, those are the three, but there are so many, you can pick from so many, like you could chat GPT, it. But in my resource, I’ve really kind of created some buckets to get you thinking of what are those words that you most identify with. Then individually, when you do those, you’ll find that sometimes you’re the same as your kids, but sometimes they’re so very different.

Julia Myers: And the value to me is having those conversations around, why did you pick this word and that word, there’s not a right or a wrong answer. It’s what best identifies our family. So what are your thoughts on kind of foundational values for family and maybe share some of your experiences or what you guys think.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I, I love how you built the [00:18:00] resources I was walking through. It. It, it gives some ideas, as you mentioned inside of the document, so people can come up with some of these words and it gives space. To allow each person in the family to come up with these words and then to have a conversation of, Hey, what are our family values?

Tim Ulbrich: And what I love about that is as we talk about where we started, generational wisdom, right? Generational wisdom implies that we’re beginning to build behaviors and habits that transcend just our family and are able to continue on to other generations. You’re role modeling. Whether the kid kids are five or 15, I know you’ve got kids that are a little bit older than mine, like you’re role modeling this behavior and activity that sure, maybe it looks a little bit different for their family in the future, but this is becoming a core foundation of how they think about money and the financial plan.

Tim Ulbrich: And I can see, as you’re describing, eventually your kids of leading their own families through a similar exercise. That’s what we’re talking about, right? Generational wisdom. Yeah. For, for our family, this, this is a, a [00:19:00] really powerful exercise and. Admittedly, we haven’t gone through, you know, the detailed level of what you recommended in the framework and how to think about it and come to an agreement and consensus on it.

Tim Ulbrich: But as you’re sharing here, I, we’ve talked about these at length before. In terms of the experiences, part is a, is a huge fundamental piece for our family. We love doing lots of things together, whether that’s going to watch one of our kids play soccer or baseball, you know, wherever we can. It’s not divide and conquer.

Tim Ulbrich: Which is a, which is a commitment. It’s, Hey, we are coming as a family to support one another, and we just love watching one another kind of enter into their unique gifts and their space. Um, so when you talk about like continuous learning and really optimizing, I. Your unique innate gifts. How do we as parents, help our kids identify what those are, and then how do we celebrate those as a family?

Tim Ulbrich: So those are some of the things that are really important, you know, to us. And admittedly, this is shifting as [00:20:00] well, right? Because when we talk about, talk about things like experiences and travel, well now that we have boys from five to nearly 14. This is a little bit more feasible than it was four years ago.

Tim Ulbrich: Right, and that was one of the questions I had had for you is when you’re working with families that are going through this exercise, thoughts on kind of the ages. Of the kids and what this might look like, right? I think about where your family’s at, phase of life versus my family, versus maybe others that have much younger kids.

Tim Ulbrich: And not only in that season, but also as that shifts over time. What? What are your thoughts on that?

Julia Myers: That’s actually a question I get a lot is like, how old do they have to be or should they be to participate in these conversations? And there’s a blend of an art and a science. There’s not an actual age, but if they’re little and they can understand sharing, I say that that’s at least a place where we can start.

Julia Myers: [00:21:00] Involving them in the conversation. But usually by the time they’re in elementary, they have passions. They have things they love doing. They have things they either wanna buy or things they wanna do. You ask a 2-year-old what they wanna do, and it’s probably a pretty limited scope, but by the time they’re in school and they’re about five, and maybe you see this with your youngest, it’s a new like developmental level that they can participate.

Julia Myers: And what do kids want more than anything in the world? To be treated like a big kid or to be treated like an adult. And so by pulling them into these kind of conversations, you’re establishing that that’s just part of what we do. Maybe we have a family meeting or maybe we have like a, you know, a family planning session.

Julia Myers: You know, those are things that they might roll their eyes out if they’re teenagers, but if you’re starting them young enough. They’re gonna be like, this is what we do. This is just normal culture. Um, so our youngest is third grade. She turns nine, her oldest turns 21 this month. And I would say that age appropriately, [00:22:00] they get more opinionated.

Tim Ulbrich: Mm-hmm.

Julia Myers: asking them, okay, what’s your opinion at five, it’s really easy to be like, oh, that was really sweet. But then at 15 you’re like, oh. That hits, or ooh, they have their own opinions. And so as parents, we’ve gotta be prepared to kind of pick something that lands for everybody in the season that they’re at.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and this also, as you’re talking, Julia reminds me, just like we talk about in organizations, when you do a strategic planning exercise, it’s not a set it and forget, right? We’ve all, we’ve all been in organizations where you develop the strategic plan. It’s, it’s the beautiful three to five year plan.

Tim Ulbrich: Everyone’s super excited, the energy’s high, and then all of a sudden we check that box, it goes up on the, the shelf somewhere, it collects some dust. Then you have new leadership that comes in and three to five years later you reinvigorate the process and and continue on right with the cycles. And this is really an opportunity as we think about that similar approach in our families, especially as you [00:23:00] give the example of kind of a, the opinions and needs of a five-year-old versus a teenager.

Tim Ulbrich: If you develop something once, 10 years later, those opinions. Who’s under your roof, what that looks like as a family. This may shift over time, and sure, maybe there’s some core fundamental things that don’t change, but accounting for those needs, making sure that voices are heard, really to me, implies that, hey, we’ve gotta be looking at this as a living document on a regular basis.

Julia Myers: So I, I call it the, the three Ps that make up this constitution. So we talked preamble, articles and amendments is what kind of the government set up in the us. Um, so number one P. First P is principles. So we just talked about that. What do you stand for? That’s your strategic plan. Three to five. And then this second one second.

Julia Myers: P practices. What are your actions doing to match your beliefs? And that’s really where you get specific, you get granular. That’s where you go from, you know, [00:24:00] what are the systems that we use, how do we operate? You know, the parents do this or the kids do that. Or you know, every quarter we do some sort of a, you know, date night.

Julia Myers: With each of the kiddos. So what are those things and what’s the frequency that have those actions aligning with your beliefs? So that practices part absolutely needs to get changed because taking a five-year-old out is very different than maybe the 15-year-old or you know, college chores, whatever those expectations are.

Julia Myers: Or now that they’ve graduated, where do you decide to say, yes, this aligns with us. Both in money, both in our calendars, both in with our attention, and then where do we say no? Which I think as the kids get older, it’s that much harder because like what you said is there’s so many things we can do with our financial plan, but if we’re not bringing it back to what’s that end foundation, that end vision, it’s easy to get [00:25:00] off track or out of alignment.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, that vil, that vision is such an important piece. I think about it as a filter, as you’re talking about for making decisions, right? The yes, no decisions. Hey, if we agree on, on the vision, on the framework, you know, it’s often like I talk about with the individual budget, like don’t start with the budget, start with the vision.

Tim Ulbrich: What are the goals or the next one to two years, and then the budget is the way in which we’re going to achieve those goals. And the goals are, are ultimately the thing that we’re pointing towards. And as we’re going through that exercise, we need to have a filter to help us make some of those decisions.

Tim Ulbrich: So I love what you’re sharing there. What, what would you say, Julia, to a pharmacist listening who feels like their family is stuck and old patterns? Uh, you talked about mindset a little bit earlier or perhaps feels disconnected, kind of in that. You know, spinning wheel financially not progressing a whole lot.

Tim Ulbrich: It, it feels the dissonance, but maybe can’t put their thumb on exactly where, where that’s coming from. How, how can this [00:26:00] constitution, how can this framework really help them heal or, or realign in their efforts?

Julia Myers: Ooh, I love the vision pun. By the way, like I see what you’re doing. Um, you’re talking about vision and realignment, and I think it comes down to starting with you as the individual and realizing that what you’re building is bigger than you. And when we do things out of the service of others or out of that bigger vision, it sometimes puts things into context of the problems we’re having.

Julia Myers: Maybe weren’t our fault. The way we grew up with money, or the stress or the anxiety we feel aren’t our fault yet it is our responsibility today to decide how do we wanna look going forward, what do we wanna focus on? And I think there’s power in being able to decide where you focus. So the simple exercise that I do when I’m giving a keynote is, [00:27:00] you know, I say every time you blink.

Julia Myers: You get to decide what you’re focusing on. You have a glass, it’s half full or it’s half empty. Where do you, now that you know what you know, doesn’t change how full or how empty that glass is, but it does give you that power to be in the decision making chair. So able to then say, okay, I’m feeling disconnection, I’m feeling out of alignment, or I’m feeling just overwhelmed.

Julia Myers: What’s the next right step that you wanna try?

Tim Ulbrich: Mm-hmm.

Julia Myers: It could be checking out this resource. It could be telling your kids your very first money story, and it could be sitting with your partner or your spouse and kind of just saying, this is what I’m feeling and this is where I wanna go. What do you think?

Julia Myers: Because often, right, when we have employees that we work with or students or residents that are challenging, we’ll say, we always start with the shared vision. It’s like, where do we really wanna be? Any [00:28:00] problem that comes up is solvable or figureoutable, I think is a Mel Robbins

Tim Ulbrich: It is. Yep.

Julia Myers: that is, we’ve got this shared vision and we know that we wanna go somewhere.

Julia Myers: We wanna complete this residency, or we wanna land this job or finish this degree. Okay? Now that we’re on the same page, now we can take those next steps or those actions, and you don’t have to do it alone. It’s not meant to be done alone.

Tim Ulbrich: That is beautiful. Right, because as you were sharing that, I was thinking about, hey, where do we typically get stuck? Here, here we’re talking about relationally as it relates to the financial plan. But this can apply more broadly than that. And it’s when we’re, when we’re having different conversations and we don’t realize we’re having different conversations, right, because we’re missing that shared vision that we’re talking about.

Tim Ulbrich: And easier said than done. Uh, but, but I love. The vision that you’re casting here for, for why that is such an important place to start. The other thing I wanna go back to real quick to make sure our listeners don’t miss it, you said something really, really, really important from a [00:29:00] mindset perspective, which is, hey, once we can accept and understand that the approach that we take today, especially if I’m listening, I’m feeling stuck.

Tim Ulbrich: I’m not progressing financially. Hey, I’ve made a good income. I should be further along. The shame comes in, the guilt comes in, right? All the emotions, the fear with it, and it’s easy to get stuck in that space when we can recognize that often that comes from the experiences that we’ve had growing up.

Tim Ulbrich: Good, bad, and indifferent. take responsibility from that point going forward. To me, that is where everything changes. And it reminded me, um, one of the guys I file on on LinkedIn that I I like a lot is Sahil Bloom. And he, he just came out with a book called The Five Types of Wealth, and one of the things he posted this past week was, no one is coming to save you.

Tim Ulbrich: Your entire life will change the day you realize. It’s all on you. No one is coming to save you. No one will fix your problems. No one will change your mindsets. No one will hand you the things you want in life. It’s just you. It’s on you. There’s [00:30:00] power in that. And once that mindset shift happens, we’re, again, we’re talking about finance, but that is a much broader application.

Tim Ulbrich: There is such freedom in that and I think people can hear that. And there’s this for some maybe that that idea of freedom and I feel empowerment for others are like. Oh my gosh, that’s weighty. Right. But it’s so important, I think, just to sit with that and, uh, we would love to hear your reflections on that as well.

Julia Myers: I think it reminds us of when we’re a kid and we take the training wheels off the bike.

Tim Ulbrich: Hmm. That’s good. Mm-hmm.

Julia Myers: around you doing it, but until you actually do it yourself and you feel that discomfort and you break through to the other side, so like what you said, sit in that and feel that, that you are exactly where you’re supposed to be and you’re facing exactly what that challenge is.

Julia Myers: Because on the other side of that is gonna be that clarity. It’s gonna be another pun. Hindsight is always 2020. [00:31:00] If we look back in our careers, if we look back where we matched, if we look back at the mentors and people we’ve had in our life, they were all exactly there at the right point. And when did things change?

Julia Myers: When did you get unstuck? It’s when you stepped into that power that it’s you. It’s not what happens to you, it’s how you show up, and you can control that. Absolutely. 

Tim Ulbrich: Julia, one of the questions I have is, is to get a step more practical and actually taking the time to sit down and do this and to develop this. Some folks might be thinking, Hey, this is just another thing to do. I. We’re a busy family. We’ve got lots of things going on and this really should, should be a sacred experience, but it, but it does take time.

Tim Ulbrich: There’s an initial commitment of time. There’s an ongoing commitment of time. What might this practically look like for families getting started in terms of that initial investment and, and any thoughts and re investment of time and any thoughts and recommendations you would have on the experience that is [00:32:00] created?

Tim Ulbrich: To develop this initial constitution, such as get outta the house right, and find somewhere else to do it.

Julia Myers: Yeah, I, you know, I’ve heard a range of options. I’ve heard the next time you’re in the car together on a road trip. Put your phones away, put your screens away. Might be hard to hear all the way in the back, but setting that expectation that, hey, we’re gonna spend some time and I just wanna talk and I just wanna hear you all share.

Julia Myers: It might be around a dinner table that maybe you hit at a restaurant and you kind of go in the back corner and you say, Hey, we’re gonna be here for 90 minutes. And usually having an end time to, it gives your teenagers permissions to roll their eyes and get it outta their system, and then they’re like, okay.

Julia Myers: I can do this for 90 minutes. ’cause that’s about as long as their longest period in high school.

Tim Ulbrich: It’s pro parenting right there, by

Julia Myers: yes. Yes. And so I’ve also seen it where a family wants to take a weekend to do it, or maybe Friday night they all go out and they eat and they talk about it and then they sleep on. [00:33:00] Does that still show up for me the next day?

Julia Myers: ’cause I mean, we’re humans, we have emotions, our priorities, you know, might feel really strong one day and then the next day you’re like, Ooh, I don’t know that. I wanna lean into that one. Um, one family I worked with, they put on that their values was fairness. I want everything to be fair and I want everything to be equal.

Julia Myers: And then the next day they kind of came back and were like, can we revisit that one? Because on the way home it wasn’t fair and nobody thought that that was a good idea anymore. And so I think it can be a commitment that you make, but also to yourself and to your family in the way that when you sign a job offer, you’re like.

Julia Myers: Other duties as assigned. This is gonna fall in one of those buckets that you didn’t know you needed. But at the same time, it is now that foundation that becomes more important than ever. So that would be that challenge, that limit or that belief, limiting belief that you don’t have the time to do it.

Julia Myers: You do have the time, you have to do it. And what are we gonna do [00:34:00] when we don’t have time? We’re gonna keep feeling stuck and we’re gonna stay where we are. And most parents listening to this show don’t wanna stay where they are. They’ve got visions, goals, aspirations, and this is one of those tools to help you get there.

Tim Ulbrich: Great point. We often look at an opportunity like this that there’s a cost to doing it, right? We, in our industry, it’s the same thing. There’s a, there’s a financial investment and a time investment to do the work. The question we don’t often ask, or at least not ask enough, is, what’s the cost of not doing it?

Julia Myers: Mm-hmm.

Tim Ulbrich: We have to look at both sides of this, and for me that that’s somewhat of a, I don’t know, maybe haunting, maybe liberating. I’m not sure which I feel, but when you think about things like this, the cost of not doing it, you know, again, I call it the rocking chair exercise. You wake up in 40 or 45 years, my kids are growing, they’re out of the house, hopefully grandkids, all those things.

Tim Ulbrich: Now, in theory, there’s more time, more money available than there perhaps ever has been. What are those things that while I’m in this [00:35:00] season in front of me, that are opportunities that we wanna make sure that we can take advantage of? Whether it be experiences, whether it be making sure we’re clear on the vision, the constitution of our family, the things that we’re talking about here today.

Julia Myers: I’ll also add that at stake is those statistics that 70% of your wealth that you’ve built is going to be gone by the second generation, and 90% statistically will be gone by the grandkids, the third generation. So that’s the cost of not taking action. That’s the cost of focusing only on the wealth and not the wisdom.

Julia Myers: And I’ve worked with a lot of families that still have kids on payroll at 24, 25, 26. What’s it costing you to have your kids still financially dependent upon you? And there are so many statistics, I can’t even keep up with them, about this middle generation that’s either financially supporting their parents and their kids, or that they don’t know that their kids will ever get off payroll. If that’s a value you [00:36:00] have, let’s do it. But if that’s an accident. Today’s the day. That’s your wake up call that you get to make a choice and you get to decide how do you want that to look?

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. And those statistics highlight, well, the financial costs, there’s a whole nother layer of emotional costs, you know, that are involved in, in this as well. Julia, I’m, I’m curious to hear from your experience, whether it’s your family or others that you’ve, you’ve talked through with this. I. When it comes to completing the Constitution, to me there’s an important opportunity for celebration, uh, of, of that work.

Tim Ulbrich: What, what have you seen in terms of some of the rituals, traditions, celebrations that people have done that really marks the significance of, Hey, we’ve cast this vision that we have as a family and, and this is a commitment that we have ongoing.

Julia Myers: I think that goes to the third and final P of preservation. So how do you keep this alive? And in our house and in a few houses that I’ve worked with, they want a visual reminder. They want that framed on their wall [00:37:00] or put up kind of like a vision board where it’s subconsciously always there as a reminder.

Julia Myers: The goal is not to be interrogated by your in-laws when they come over because again, this is your family, not their family constitution. And so there’s different ways that people have done it. Some people have taken a vacation to basically say, Hey, we celebrate all of these things and we’re gonna do nothing but our values.

Julia Myers: I’ve seen people at the end of the year kind of reflect and look at it. So like that old practice of counting rolling coins, don’t make it sentimental, don’t make it that outdated practice. Make it something that is in the living, breathing, evolving document, and maybe ask and reflect. Sometimes at the end of the year, or for us with our teens, we do quarterly highlight reels.

Julia Myers: They pick the top five pictures from their quarter. And then we talk about it and we’ll say, are these aligned with what our values are? Or is this [00:38:00] out of alignment? And if so, what’s the gap? Because we all have seasons and we can’t always do everything exactly right, but we can say that from the lens of each of the kids’ perspectives, was that aligned or not?

Julia Myers: And having them be involved with the ownership of Take a Picture, what are your five favorite ones and why? How does that align with our values? You’re now reinforcing that behavior. You’re reinforcing those values. You’re also maybe shaking it up. So for us, we’ve done a lot of travel and we had a season where the kids were like, can we just chill more? And I’m like, I never thought about it that way. You know? And when we are traveling, just to always have something on the calendar that’s now missing the purpose of having experiences if we’re not getting that result. So did it get us to where we thought we wanted to be? Why or why not? Okay, let’s pivot.

Julia Myers: Let’s change, let’s do an amendment to say we’re not gonna do date nights every quarter. We’re gonna do them, you know, maybe every six months and they’ll be bigger or something. So just some level of [00:39:00] accountability to say, are we doing it? How often are we checking it? And what are those traditions we’re creating that are unique to us and meaningful to us?

Julia Myers: And giving yourself permission that just ’cause it’s a tradition doesn’t mean you always have to do it either.

Tim Ulbrich: Mm-hmm.

Julia Myers:cause. There are lots of traditions that don’t serve us from our past. And splitting the holidays is maybe a good one that I think of is, you know, gone are the days of running around to 10 different places and you’re just present. You as a family get to decide that focus is power.

Tim Ulbrich: I think that message, Julia, is so important for, maybe I’m projecting a little bit here, but for, for pharmacists who, when we set a plan, by gosh, we’re gonna achieve every part of that plan to the detail we set out and there, and there’s value in that. But ultimately we have to ask the, the question, are we getting out of this what we thought we were going to get out of this?

Tim Ulbrich: And if not, are we willing to kind of pivot? Be flexible, review and, you know, look at some of these components in a different way. [00:40:00] So, great stuff that you shared there. As people think about this as a, as a living document, uh, that will be

Julia Myers: And the role model for the. Is important too, that the kids can see that you’re having conversations and you’re making pivots. We talk about we want our kids to be resilient. That’s a perfect way to teach it, is by amending that constitution and revisiting it for the reasons we just talked about.

Tim Ulbrich: So again, more information on this. You can go julia myers.com/constitution. We’ll link to that in the show notes. Julia, as we wrap up, uh, this has been incredible. I thought it would have, it’s delivered for me on, on every level, uh, as well. Love the work that you’re doing. Uh, where is the best place that our listeners can go to to learn more about you and the work that you’re doing?

Julia Myers: I would say my website, uh, Julia Myers, MYER s.com is where you can get plugged in. You can find those things that support you, that serve you. And if you’re on social, uh, LinkedIn is where I usually like to hang out, but I’m on all the other ones as well under Julia [00:41:00] Myers.

Tim Ulbrich: Awesome. Thank you so much, Julia, and I’m sure we’ll have you back on the show again. Take care.

Julia Myers: Thanks everybody.   

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

Note: Referral fees from affiliate links in this table are sent to the non-profit YFP Gives. 

Read the full advertising disclosure here.

Bonus

Starting Rates

About

YFP Gives accepts advertising compensation from companies that appear on this site, which impacts the location and order in which brands (and/or their products) are presented, and also impacts the score that is assigned to it. Company lists on this page DO NOT imply endorsement. We do not feature all providers on the market.

$750*

Loans

≥150K = $750* 

≥50K-150k = $300


Fixed: 4.89%+ APR (with autopay)

A marketplace that compares multiple lenders that are credit unions and local banks

$500*

Loans

≥50K = $500

Variable: 4.99%+ (with autopay)*

Fixed: 4.96%+ (with autopay)**

 Read rates and terms at SplashFinancial.com

Splash is a marketplace with loans available from an exclusive network of credit unions and banks as well as U-Fi, Laurenl Road, and PenFed

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 397: The Art of Rebalancing: Maintaining Your Investment Portfolio


Tim Baker, CFP®, RICP®, RLP® and Tim Ulbrich, PharmD discuss the importance of maintaining a balanced asset allocation, the nuances of risk tolerance and capacity, and the different accounts you should be rebalancing.

Brought to you by First Horizon.

Episode Summary

In this episode, Tim Baker, CFP®, RICP®, RLP®, and Tim Ulbrich, PharmD, explore the essentials of rebalancing your investment portfolio.

Tim and Tim discuss asset allocation, risk tolerance, and key accounts to rebalance. They also highlight common mistakes and effective rebalancing strategies for long-term investment success.

Key Points from the Episode

  • [00:16] Introduction to Rebalancing Your Investment Portfolio
  • [01:34] Defining Asset Allocation and Rebalancing
  • [02:43] The Importance of Rebalancing
  • [04:37] Accounts to Consider for Rebalancing
  • [09:23] Risk Tolerance vs. Risk Capacity
  • [17:44] Common Mistakes in Rebalancing
  • [22:43] Timing Your Rebalancing
  • [25:38] Conclusion and Financial Planning Services

Episode Highlights

“ What we’re really talking about here is like maintaining the amount of risk that you feel comfortable with.” –  Tim Baker [1:04]

“ Rebalancing is the process of realigning the asset allocation of your investments to maintain whatever your desired level of risk is.” – Tim Baker [2:30]

“ But the question behind that is like, Where are we going with these investment accounts? What’s the overarching goal? What’s the target amount that we’re trying to achieve?” – Tim Ulbrich [7:06]

“ The longer time horizon that you have, the more capacity that you have to take risk because the more likely that that portfolio can recover over those 30 years.” – Tim Baker [11:06]

“ Risk tolerance is what you want to take. That’s kind of your emotional response. The risk capacity is what you should or need to take.” – Tim Baker [11:54]

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Tim Baker, glad to have you back on the show.

Tim Baker: Good to be back with what’s new, Tim.

Tim Ulbrich: I think this is back to back, right? It’s been a while, uh, since we’ve done a back to back. So last week we talked about couples working together with their finances, certainly a relevant and important topic. And today we’re going to go pretty narrow and pretty nerdy.

Uh, as we talk about rebalancing your investment portfolio and Tim, let me start with that. We talk a lot [00:03:00] about. our savings rate and how much we’re going to save and how much we need to save for retirement. And sometimes what we lose in that conversation, certainly not with clients when our team’s doing this one on one, but maybe in a broader education sense is how we actually allocate those assets.

Where, where do those dollars go? And then what do we do when that asset allocation perhaps get it out of whack over time, which is our topic, uh, with rebalancing. So I think, I think naturally there can be a focus on the accumulation, but we might lose some of those details along the way.

Tim Baker: Yeah. I mean, it’s an important thing to consider because what we’re really talking about here is like maintaining the amount of risk that you feel comfortable with, with, and for a lot of people are like, I don’t even know what you’re talking about. So I’m just putting in a target date fund. Um, so if you’re in a target date fund, Um, you know, primarily this episode won’t apply to you, but if you’re kind of pulling the strings and want a little bit more precision, um, want to pay a little bit less, that’s one of the, the, the, the beast that I have with target a fund, this’ll [00:04:00] be an episode to kind of tune in and, and, and listen to in terms of, you know, at least how we approach it.

Tim Ulbrich: So let’s start with just defining rebalancing and maybe at the same time, define asset allocation, because those are going to go hand in hand.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so asset allocation is really just the percentages between stocks and bonds, um, at a high level. Um, so. Um, you know, if you’re, if you’re in, say, an 80 20, um, portfolio, that means 80 percent is in stock. So you think traditionally more exponential growth, um, you know, more, more stocks and an accumulation phase.

And then bonds are, I, we typically explain as more like linear growth, which is where you’re, you know, it’s fixed income, you’re, you’re being set, you know, being paid, um, you know, interest and those types of things. So typically the higher the bonds, the more risk. Um, avoidant you are. Um, and typically this is for people that are approaching retirement or in retirement.

So the percentage of stocks and bonds is really what we’re talking about with [00:05:00] that asset allocation. Rebalancing is the process of realigning the asset allocation of your investments to maintain whatever your desired level of risk is. And, you know, return. So over time, Tim, Tim. The market fluctuates, obviously it goes up and down and certain investments may grow faster than others.

So this causes your portfolio to drift from its original target allocation. So give me an example. Let’s say your target allocation is fairly conservative. It’s 6040. So 60 percent in stocks and 40 percent in bonds, a strong stock market, which we’ve been experiencing lately, um, over the last couple of years, although volatile could shift that to a 7030.

Um, ratio. So if you’re in a buy and hold strategy, which is basically you, you buy and set it and forget it, you’re going to continue to drift 20, um, which, which ultimately increases your portfolio’s risk. So what rebalancing [00:06:00] basically involves is selling some of the stocks and buy in bonds to return it back to that original 60, 40.

So basically. You know, you sign up for a certain amount of risk, you know, whether you’re working with advisor or just in your own mind and as the market does what it does the You know the percentages shift and you just want to basically reset that so In the event, you know, I always kind of think about in the event of um, you know the market taking a significant downturn Um, you’re protected as much as you can be with the the percentages that you signed up for.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. And for the DIYers out there, right? This is something they have to keep on, on their radar to come back to at some frequency. You know what, whatever that might be determined, or of course, we’re big advocates of, Hey, this is one of the many things that a financial planner can help you with. Like, I, I selfishly know that, hey, I’ve got Kim, uh, on our side, you know, in our corner, one of our CFPs, that like, I’m not thinking about risk.

You know, I’m not thinking about the rebalancing, you know, of course we’re constantly re [00:07:00] evaluating what are the goals, what’s the risk tolerance, what’s the risk capacity, but that aspect’s being taken care of as naturally market fluctuations will happen. So Tim, what accounts should people be thinking about here with rebalancing?

You know, perhaps the obvious people are thinking, Oh yeah, my 401k, but it’s, it’s bigger than that. Right, 

Tim Baker: Yeah, it’s pretty much all of your investment accounts. So, um You know, IRAs, HSAs, if you’re invested in your HSA, 401ks, 403bs, TSPs, brokerage accounts, um, you know, and, and, and to kind of drill down a little bit more, Tim, it’s not just like. You know, stocks and bonds. You, if you look in the equity side of your portfolio, you know, it could be that small, small cap has performed, you know, outperformed.

So, you know, we have to sell some off the, some of the small part, a small cap to maybe redeploy that to a merging market or an international exposure. So, um, but it really is anything that you have. You know, investments, right? Which could be IRAs, HSAs, [00:08:00] 401ks, brokerage account. Um, these are the, these are the accounts that you want to pay the most attention to.

Now, I would say that 401ks, Are typically less, there’s a less of a need to rebalance a 401k. And the reason for that is typically 401ks are contributing to every pay cycle. So if you get paid 24 times a year, every time some of your paycheck goes in, it’s almost like a natural rebalance, right? There’s still some drift there.

And it’s still important to look at this because oftentimes this is the biggest asset that many of us have outside of maybe a home. Um, so it’s a big asset on the, on the balance sheet that needs attention, but, but oftentimes you kind of have that natural rebalance because of how regular the contributions are made into your 401k.

Tim Ulbrich: And I would add to this, you know, you mentioned kind of the, the various accounts, right? So 401ks, IRAs, [00:09:00] TSBs, 403Bs, HSAs, 529s would fall in there, right? As well. If we’re,

Tim Baker: Yeah, 457s. Yep, exactly right.

Tim Ulbrich: I think too. It’s worth mentioning this. I’m thinking of the DIY or in particular where, where I often see this overlooked him that there’s a question behind this question that we can’t overlook.

Right? So the question we’re addressing is what is rebalancing? And we’ll talk some about the strategies, what accounts need rebalancing and ultimately how does that connect and relate to your risk tolerance and capacity, all important stuff. But the question behind that is like, Where are we going with these investment accounts?

What’s the overarching goal? What’s the target amount that we’re trying to achieve? And how are we balancing that with all these different goals? Once those decisions are made in those conversations happen, then within that, we can begin to think about, okay, how do we make sure we rebalance and keep on track with the plan that we set?

Tim Baker: Yeah, if you’re, [00:10:00] if you’re looking at a checklist of reviewing your financial plan. You know, this is probably item number

Tim Ulbrich: Right.

Tim Baker: and all of the other things, you know, that are going to be important of like, Hey, where are we at? Where are we going? What’s the purpose of this are the things that we talked about, you know, last year, the year before still important.

So, I, I think this is very much the technical after all of those really value based conversations and questions are answered, but it’s important all the same. Right? So I think that. You know, um, And this changes, right? So, so what, what your, there’s so many people are like, ah, like nothing’s going on. Like I got this, but I always like do the thought experiment is like, you know, even for us, Tim, if we look back at like two years ago, how much things have changed over these last two years.

And I think as humans, we, we think. We kind of, we kind of lose sight of that and we think that the next two years are not going to be, [00:11:00] you know, kind of laissez faire type of thing. So I think, I think, yeah, the, this is, this is a, an item on a long list of things that need to be answered. And I think it’s just important to ask that question, um, kind of do that mental azimuth of like, is this still kind of serving me and what I’m trying to accomplish with my financial plan?

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. And I want to make sure to say that out loud and we don’t miss that because, you know, the thought that was coming to mind, Tim, that stimulated that, that comment was there’s a lot of work that has to be done to determine what percentage of our income are we saving and why are we saving it? And then within that conversation, what vehicles are we going to use?

And then within that conversation, there’s the risk tolerance, risk capacity rebalancing. So making sure we just don’t get lost in the weeds, right? Especially for people that are, that are DIY in this. Um, let’s talk. I keep throwing around these terms, risk tolerance, risk capacity, but so important, right?

Because that ultimately is going to inform What is your [00:12:00] asset allocation, which will then inform, what are we going to do with the rebalance? So talk to us about risk, tolerance, risk capacity, and then even a, uh, peek behind the curtain for those that are financial planning clients, how we handle this through something like an investment policy statement.

Tim Baker: Yeah. So the way that I simply put risk tolerance versus capacity, risk capacity is risk tolerance is a risk that you want to take. The risk capacity is the risk that you should or need to take. So I’ll give you an example, you know, I could be a 35 year old pharmacist and I, I could be very risk adverse, right?

So when I take a questionnaire about how I view my investments and how I view about money, I’m like, I just want to keep, you know, I don’t want to lose anything. I just want to, you know, I’m, I’m much more comfortable putting everything into a high yield savings account and, and, and doing my thing there.

The problem is, is because we know about things with inflation and. [00:13:00] Um, uh, taxes that we have to do more than the 3 percent or whatever high yield savings accounts paying these days. Like, we have to outpace inflation. We have to outpace. Um, if you’re 35 or 40 years old or younger, or even a little bit older than that, you have more capacity.

Take risk. If we’re thinking about it in terms of retirement planning, because I might have 30 years To invest. And the idea is that the longer time horizon that you have, the more capacity that you have to take risk because the more likely that that portfolio can recover over those 30 years. So as you get closer, I could be the most, you know, so I’m, I pretty much like pretty aggressive with my investments, but once I get to, if I’m going to retire at 65, once I get to 55 or 60.

I don’t have the capacity to take the [00:14:00] risk because my time is so short. So even though I’m aggressive, you know, I need to know I, in the back of my mind, I’m, I’m fighting what’s called sequence of return risk, where if my, if I’m 58 and I’m trying to retire at 60 and I’m super aggressive. And my portfolio, you know, drops by a third.

It’s hard for me to recover in a 22 year period. So risk tolerance is what you want to take. That’s kind of your emotional response. The risk capacity is what you should or need to take. And sometimes if you’re 50 years old, 60 years old, and you’re trying to retire in the next 5 or 10 years and you haven’t done much.

Your risk, you have, you know, you have to take more risk because you have no choice or you’re going to just be working forever. So there’s, there’s this Venn diagram, Tim, of what we kind of look at your risk tolerance, which is typically a result of a questionnaire that we do. And then we overlay the demographic of how much you have saved, what your age is, what’s your time horizon.

And we come to that asset allocation [00:15:00] of, you know, the magic percentage of stocks to bonds. And then to kind of answer your question, what we typically do, um, at YFP is we just have a one page document. We call this the investment policy statement. This is kind of our North Star of how we’re going to manage your investments, both the ones that we are managing at our custodian directly, but also held away investments, which are typically 401ks or 403bs that you’re contributing directly, you know, cause you’re still employed.

Um, so that investment policy statement is kind of like our instruction manual of how we’re going to, you know, what the asset allocation is, how we’re going to rebalance. You know, the, how you, how you have visibility yet that you’ll receive statements and all that kind of stuff. So it’s really kind of a, a, um, North star of how we’re going to handle the investments that gives us kind of a, a scalable way to manage millions of dollars for our clients, but also for the client to understand, okay, this is what the [00:16:00] team at YFP, this is how they’re, they’re handling, you know, my long term investments, et cetera.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I think that helps people, especially if they’re new to that relationship, feel comfortable, like, hey, we’ve been through the evaluation of risk process. We’ve agreed upon these set of terms, but I’m also, in part, delegating. This work to the team I hired, but I’m delegating this work to the team that I hired within the sandbox we’ve agreed upon.

Um, which I think is, is really important. And I love your visual, the Venn diagram, right? Because I think it encompasses when we talk about risk capacity, risk tolerance. Yes. We’re thinking about the emotional part, how much risk can I stomach, but we’re also considering how much risk do I need to take Based on all these goals.

And that’s where a third party can really have a valuable role of like, let’s talk about both of those things and where there may be differences. Let’s have a conversation and kind of figure out what gives, right? Are we willing to push ourselves maybe a little bit in a direction that we weren’t thinking, or are we willing to adjust the goals?

Oh, [00:17:00] 2 people doing this partner spouses, thinking of others, you might have 2 different. Risk tolerances and risk capacities that you’re dealing with and to have those conversations can be really valuable.

Tim Baker: Yeah. And I think one of the things that I, you know, ultimately say, you know, when I was working with clients back in the day is at the end of the day, it’s your financial plan. So even though I might reckon, you know, you might come in at a seven 30, a 70 30, and I think that you can be more aggressive, you know, 90, 10, or even a hundred zero, you know, all equity portfolio.

I’ve had some clients will say, like, let’s start at 80 20. And then I just say, like, I’m just forewarning you every time we meet because you’re 28 or whatever it is, like, I’m just going to bring this up that. You know, we need to be more aggressive and, you know, ultimately clients might step into that over a couple of years because I think they realize it’s, it’s working smarter, not harder because again, typically the more conservative you are, the harder you have to work, i.

  1. save. Or work longer to kind of reach that [00:18:00] portfolio amount that we can have a sustainable paycheck. So, and that goes back to, you know, in the past, I’ve talked about aggressive Jane and conservative Jane and everything being equal and the delta between their portfolio after a 30 year career is significant.

Um, and the only thing that really changes is, is the asset allocation. So it’s 1 of the most powerful things. And I think, tending to that. IE through a rebalancing strategy over time is going to be really important as well. So, um, yeah, at the end of the day, you know, you have to feel comfortable, but I think what most people realize is.

Hey, even the portfolio goes down in 2025 and I’m retiring in 2055, who cares, right? It doesn’t matter. We’re not even going to remember that. And in fact, we’re going to probably have, you know, six, seven more of those. It’s just, is this, when we get to that eye of the storm close to retirement, um, that’s when we really need to be hyper focused and conservative on the, on the asset allocation.

So we don’t, you know, again, fall to sequence of return risk.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. And it’s worth noting, Tim, especially for [00:19:00] newer investors, how you think you’re going to feel and how you actually feel might not always line up. Right. Until you go through a dip where you have a sizable amount of assets and kind of experience that. I do think some people go into that thinking. Hey, I’m in this for the longterm.

I can stomach it. And it market drops 30 percent and they still feel the same way. Like that’s fine. You know, I’m in it for the long run. I think other people might go into that with that mind, same mindset, see that number go down on their accounts. And all of a sudden there’s this gut feeling of, of like, whoa, I didn’t think this would impact me in the way it did.

Tim Baker: yeah. And, and sometimes that gut feeling leads to that whole idea that I talk about is like, I want to take my investment ball and go home. And then that could lead to really. Um, the word is not inappropriate, but really, um, unproductive decisions and actions with your portfolio when you’re selling into cash, then you start feeling a little bit better because the markets recover and then you buy back into the portfolio higher.

And it’s [00:20:00] probably 1 of the biggest mistakes that novice investors make. And it’s basically playing on our loss aversion that affects all of us. So.

Tim Ulbrich: Let’s go there to common mistakes investors make when rebalancing, you’re, you’re talking about one really important one right there. And specifically, I’m thinking about the DIY investor where, Hey, when the hands in the cookie jar, you know, we might, might make some mistakes or be more prone to making mistakes than we would be otherwise.

If, if we had, um, a financial planner advisor, someone in our corner kind of talking through some of these things. So what, what are some of those mistakes that folks should be. Aware of that. Hey, we can avoid these if, if at all possible related to rebalancing.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so I think it’s, it’s kind of what I just said is like that emotional reaction, um, to, to this, uh, or taking a short term view of a, of a portfolio that has a long term outlook. Um, you know, I think sometimes like, and rebalance in itself seems [00:21:00] unnatural because you’re taking your highest performing asset class, some of it selling some of it and putting it potentially in your lowest performing asset class.

So it feels weird. Um, Uh, you know, again, if you’re overwatching your portfolio, it could lead to you making irrational decisions to time the market, which we know over the course of a long investing career, you just can’t do. Um, You know, I think the other thing is not considering the shifts in risk tolerance over time.

Right? So if, if you set this and forget it early in your career, and then your mid career and late career, and you’re still in that same asset allocation, there’s a problem there. Um, and I think, I think the other thing too, that is kind of related to this, but tangentially so is. Like if you’re in, if you’re thinking like, oh, I’m going to target date fund.

I don’t have to worry about that. Like in my 401k, that is true to an degree. But the, the other thing is like, we’ve talked about like, not all HSAs or 401ks are create equal, not all target date funds are created equal. [00:22:00] So you could be in a 2060 target date fund. That’s actually too conservative to what you actually need to be in.

And even, you know, all of those as they lead up and they had to have this glide path of, you know, taking out equities and re you know, re um, reinvested in the, in the, Stocks and bond or, uh, bonds. It’s, it’s not necessarily lines up with what you’re thing, it’s all those, it’s the easy button. I would think.

I would say look at the fees and look at the, the actual asset allocation within that fund to make a good decision. Um, I also think not considering tax cons, consequences in certain accounts or chasing something because of a tax benefit. So the big, the big thing that we haven’t talked here, um, is like rebalance is, is different in a brokerage account versus a.

401k or an IRA. Um, and what I mean by that is we’ve always talked about like the, the tax benefits of a 401k or, or an IRA or a Roth IRA, the, in those accounts, [00:23:00] the money that is in those accounts is either tax going in, so that’s in the case of a Roth or tax going out, which is the case of the, the traditional, the, the added tax.

Um in a brokerage account is that when you buy and sell a Stock bond mutual fund inside of a 401k you pay no capital gains. So the growth is tax free, which is which is another benefit Um of those accounts inside of a brokerage account you’re paying capital gains on any gain or or loss Um in the side of those accounts.

So sometimes we do weird things because of tax Ramifications and I think it’s losing, not losing sight of that, you know, as well. And then, um, I think also kind of related to this, Tim is, is account location. So this is kind of related to rebalancing, but having a good amount of, you know, I just, we just signed on a client, um, recently that they’re in [00:24:00] their early forties, forties, they want to retire in their early fifties.

So they have about a decade left, but they have nothing in a brokerage account. Um, which is typically what we’re going to use for an early retirement paycheck. So this is kind of the do we have a Do we have enough in? Uh, a taxable pre tax than an after tax to basically build a sustainable paycheck. So not necessarily related directly to rebalancing, but important to know again, as you’re asking yourself those questions and we’re getting to that 80 second step of rebalancing that we, we could look at the situation and be like, our account location is off.

So we need to, we need to reallocate assets that way. And then obviously rebalance the portfolio in general. 

Tim Ulbrich: That’s a great example, right? Because that’s one of those in the weeds types of things where we can be, you know, neat, neat, deep, and trying to rebalance within an account, thinking about the asset allocation, maybe even trying to think about some of the tax benefits, especially if it’s not in a retirement account all the while, you know, bigger question of, Hey, might I.

Need these funds [00:25:00] prior to traditional retirement age. And do we have the right account locations? A really good example of, of the bigger, the bigger puzzle that we need to be thinking about.

Tim Baker: Yeah,

Tim Ulbrich: Last question I have for you here is on timing, Tim. So we’ve established that, Hey, once we set an Alice asset allocation based on risk tolerance, based on risk capacity, based on goals, that risks, that asset allocation will inevitably shift as the market does its thing over time, which then.

Puts in the, the need for what we’re talking about here, which is rebalancing. Um, so then the next natural question is, well, how often should I do that? Is this a once a year? Is this a twice a year? Is this a, it depends based on market volatility and you know, some seasons of the market may be more volatile than others.

What are your thoughts here on timing?

Tim Baker: yeah. So typically, the three common approaches to rebalancing is time based rebalancing, which is kind of what you’re talking about. So rebalance at regular interviews, you know, I quarterly, annually, maybe in semi annually, it could be [00:26:00] threshold based rebalancing, which is rebalancing when an asset class deviates from the target by a certain percentage.

So if it drifts 5 percent or 10 percent Transcribed by https: otter. ai Then we rebalance and then there’s a hybrid approach. So combining time and threshold methods for more flexibility back in the day, Tim, this was a concern because, um, and even, I think even today it’s a concern depending on how you’re invested is, um, you know, we, we would rebalance in, in my previous firm, we would rebalance like mutual funds.

We didn’t use ETFs, which is what we use now. And those would generate like. Ticket charge and commissions. Um, and some of the listeners might have heard of things called like churning where an advisor is kind of selling, not unnecessarily, but in a rebalancing to kind of earn a commission. Um, and even like even ETFs or stocks, anytime that you, you buy and sell, sometimes there’s a ticket charge.

Now, a lot of those have kind of gone to zero. So you’re able to, to do this kind of at will. [00:27:00] Um, Um, but that was a, that was a, that was a, something that you had to be aware of back in the day of either, you know, what’s the ticket charge related to the trade or like, what’s the commission that you’re going to pay an advisor?

Um, so obviously being fee only, we don’t earn commission since that’s not part of what we do. Um, today, a lot of these, a lot of these methods are going to be. Threshold based. Um, so if you’re working with a robo advisor, it’s going to, it’s going to look at a drift at a certain percentage and then basically realign you.

Obviously, you’re paying a fee for that, which you need to know what that is. Um, but we kind of do a hybrid approach of, of both. Um, you know, some people, Okay. Want to overdo this and rebalance this, you know, if you’re a tinkerer and that’s typically not the best approach. So I would say at a minimum, at a minimum, you know, at least once a year you should be looking at this and rebalancing back to a target percentage.

And again, having those conversations with yourself about, is this what I still want and need? And how is this best supported my financial plan?

Tim Ulbrich: [00:28:00] Awesome, Tim. Great, great stuff. Uh, appreciate your perspective as always. And for those that are listening and saying, Hey, I could use help with rebalancing asset allocation, making sure I’m thinking about my risk tolerance, risk capacity, and other investing goals, as well as other parts of the financial plan.

That’s what our team of fee only certified financial planners do at YFP. Again, we’re talking about a very narrow aspect of the financial plan and there’s so much more opportunity Beyond just this topic. As we look at all of the different parts of the financial plan, whether that’s investing in retirement planning, whether that be debt management, credit, estate planning, insurance, and so on.

So to learn more about what it means and what it would look like to work one on one with a YFP fee only certified financial planner, head on over to our website, yourfinancialpharmacist. com. You’ll see an option there to book a discovery call. We’d love to have an opportunity to talk with you, learn more about your financial situation.

You can learn more about our services and ultimately we can determine together. Whether or not there’s a good fit there again, your financial pharmacist. com and click on the link to book a [00:29:00] discovery call. Thanks so much for listening. Have a great rest of your week.[00:30:00] 

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

Note: Referral fees from affiliate links in this table are sent to the non-profit YFP Gives. 

Read the full advertising disclosure here.

Bonus

Starting Rates

About

YFP Gives accepts advertising compensation from companies that appear on this site, which impacts the location and order in which brands (and/or their products) are presented, and also impacts the score that is assigned to it. Company lists on this page DO NOT imply endorsement. We do not feature all providers on the market.

$750*

Loans

≥150K = $750* 

≥50K-150k = $300


Fixed: 4.89%+ APR (with autopay)

A marketplace that compares multiple lenders that are credit unions and local banks

$500*

Loans

≥50K = $500

Variable: 4.99%+ (with autopay)*

Fixed: 4.96%+ (with autopay)**

 Read rates and terms at SplashFinancial.com

Splash is a marketplace with loans available from an exclusive network of credit unions and banks as well as U-Fi, Laurenl Road, and PenFed

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 396: Managing Money Together: Strategies for Couples


In this episode, Tim Ulbrich, PharmD, and Tim Baker, CFP®, RICP®, RLP® dive into the challenges and rewards of managing money in a relationship.

Episode Summary

In this episode, Tim Ulbrich, PharmD, and Tim Baker, CFP®, RICP®, RLP® dive into the challenges and rewards of managing money in a relationship.

They break down how different approaches—whether merging finances completely, keeping some things separate, or managing everything individually—can impact your financial harmony. Through real-life insights, Tim and Tim highlight the power of open communication, understanding each other’s money habits, and creating a shared financial vision. They also discuss when and how a neutral third party can help navigate tough conversations.

No matter where you are in your relationship—just starting out, engaged, or years into marriage—this episode offers practical advice to help you and your partner build a financial plan that works for both of you.

Key Points from the Episode

  • [00:00] Introduction and Setting the Stage
  • [00:56] Poll Results and Initial Reactions
  • [02:06] Cultural and Societal Influences on Financial Management
  • [03:21] Personal Experiences and Financial Dynamics
  • [04:36] Client Trends and Financial Planning
  • [08:06] Understanding Money Personalities
  • [21:11] Pros and Cons of Merged vs. Separate Finances
  • [30:42] Starting Financial Conversations
  • [31:43] Joint vs. Separate Accounts
  • [32:31] Managing Household Finances
  • [33:57] Setting Financial Goals
  • [35:45] The Importance of a Financial Plan
  • [36:47] Cultural Differences in Financial Planning
  • [40:20] The Role of a Third Party in Financial Planning
  • [42:25] Balancing Present and Future Wealth
  • [49:51] Creating a Shared Vision
  • [59:20] The Value of Financial Planning Services

Episode Highlights

“There is no one right way when  it comes to managing your finances with a partner, significant  other, or spouse.” – Tim Ulbrich [0:50]

“ The more we understand how we grew up around money and how that shapes the perspective we have today, the better chance we have to be able to come together and figure out what this plan looks like going forward.” – Tim Ulbrich [10:05]

“ What I think is best is everything comes into a joint account. So all of the paychecks come into a joint account. And then I think if you do have separate accounts, some dollar amount or some percentage of that can go to  an individual account for you to do whatever you want  with.” -Tim Baker [31:43]

“ If you’re always just living a wealthy life tomorrow, what’s the freaking point?” – Tim Baker [43:37]

“M ost financial planning firms and financial planners are making financial decisions without a vision. And that is backwards.” – Tim Ulbrich [50:24]

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Tim Baker, good to have you back on the show.

Tim Baker: Good to be back. [00:01:00] How’s it going Tim?

Tim Ulbrich: It’s going well, Valentine’s day, right around the corner. And so it’s only fitting that we talk about love and money. And let me, let me just start, Tim, before we get into the weeds on this, that we are coming from our experience and perspective. And of course, we’re going to talk about a broader perspective, hopefully in different options that people can consider as they’re working with a significant other spouse or partner to manage their finances.

But inevitably. We have a bias of what has worked for us, right? For Jess and I, and for you and Shay. And so we’re going to try to broaden that perspective, but I think it’s important that we acknowledge that right up front and that there is no one right way when it comes to managing your finances with a partner, significant other, or spouse.

And Tim, I want to start by getting your take on a poll I recently. Posted on LinkedIn. And I asked the following question for those that are working with someone else on their finances, which of the following best describes your situation is everything merged or something’s merged, something separate, or is everything separate?

And about [00:02:00] half people said everything was merged. 40 percent said some merged, some separate, and about 10 percent responded that nothing was merged and everything was just separate. What, what are your thoughts on that? Does that match with what you hear typically from, from clients and prospects? Hmm.

Tim Baker: think that the The half of everything merged seems really high to me Like I didn’t I didn’t expect that at all. Um, and I think the the 10 percent um You know where nothing is in merge is merged seems pretty low to me

Tim Ulbrich: Interesting.

Tim Baker: I thought I thought that we would see more of an even dish like not an even distribution, but um, the the all merged Is something I don’t want to say I rarely come across but like I feel like the most common the most common is some merge some separate

Tim Ulbrich: Mm hmm.

Tim Baker: in my experience, so I was a little bit surprised when I saw that poll um but that was the outcome because again, I I think most I think [00:03:00] most and I think I think a lot of like our culture and just how like how we We operate these days of affects this right like we’re getting married later.

Tim Ulbrich: Mm hmm.

Tim Baker: you know, I know I’ve talked about my wife being brazilian like in her culture You you know You you live at home until you get married and I know that some some people here in the united states do that too right, so like um, I think some of some of like well just what’s going on with our Socioeconomics like it’s it’s has changed this but I think by and large I probably see more of a hybrid model Which I think we’ll talk about here in this episode

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. I think your point about, you know, timeline of when people get married or when they have a significant other spouse and that shifting is significant, you know, again, speaking from my perspective or Jess and I, we got married relatively young, 24. Uh, and so we didn’t, neither of us had really a strong process of our own.

Right. So it kind of made sense. And, and we’re in, I guess what you’re calling kind of that, that where a smaller group where everything is merged, [00:04:00] but that would have been very different. I think if we got married at 30 or 35, right. And we were doing things on our own for a while.

Tim Baker: Yeah, I think very, and then I also like, like divorce, right, too, if you’ve experienced that, like your, your, especially if there’s money things that have come out of like, you know, so I think if people have been in serious relationships, and then, you know, are not, and then are in another serious relationship later, like, I think, or, you know, I know, divorce can be traumatic, or just trauma with finances growing up, I know, you got one, just like things, you know, with your family business and things like that, I think there’s all paints, Part of how we, how we look at this.

Um, so yeah, I, I know there’s some people that have gone through, you know, relationships. It’s like, I’m, I’ll never merge again. You know, our finances, like it has to be separate. Now they’re still working and trying to row the boat in the, in the same direction, so to speak. But there has to be kind of a little bit of a separation for them to feel comfortable.

And I, I understand that. And again, it’s not necessarily [00:05:00] something that I’ve had to deal with personally, but. Um, I get where that, where that can come from.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. And to be clear, this is not a scientific Gallup poll, right? This was a poll I just put out there and LinkedIn. I do think we had, I’ll have to go back and look. I think there was 150, 170 people that responded. So it was a sizable group, but certainly not representative of a larger group. Tim, the other thing I wanted to just get your pulse on, because you sit in front of prospective clients every day where you’re having conversations in a very intimate way about their finances as they try to Discover or learn more about our services, see if they’re a good fit.

And as a part of that, naturally you get a inside peek and everything that’s going on, you know, financially. And of course doing that confidentially is you aggregate some of those conversations. What, what are some of the trends that you are seeing? You know, is it what one person who’s typically initiating this conversation and they’re, you know, they’re dragging someone along to be there.

Is it maybe one person who’s making all the [00:06:00] decisions and the second person’s not there at all, or do you see. more cases where it’s, it’s really a shared decision making process to people present at the table.

Tim Baker: Yeah. And, and, and again, probably not an even distribution, but all of those things, Tim, like, I think there’s sometimes where, um, and there, I think there might be some gender dynamics at play and I don’t want to like, you know, uh, generalize or anything, but like. Sometimes it’s, you know, a lot of pharmacists are female, so it might be like, Hey, you know, I’ve been listening to you since like our P2 year on the podcast.

So they feel like they know me or know you, but obviously I’m the one mean with them. Um, and then they might tell their husband, we’ll call husband Brian, they might tell Brian that we’re mean with Tim, um, you know, like five minutes before we actually do, and they don’t know who I am from Adam. Right. So, um, You know, there’s some people that are that are both like in it and and most of the time when I asked a question Like hey, like when you hire a financial planner, like who is the decision maker?

Who are the stakeholders? Like a the overwhelming answer. It’s like it’s the two of us, right? We’re gonna be we’re gonna you know, [00:07:00] basically make this decision together now who takes point and who? Might be our main contact that can differ. Um It’s really really hard at least in in where with what we do to work and this is one of the things that happens a lot and i’m i’m i’m Sometimes unsure how to navigate where you know a person will book a meeting They said that i’m married, but i’m looking for a financial planner just for me And I think again we look at the whole picture.

Typically. We’re not looking at just like a project here and there We’re looking at a holistic kind of longitudinal relationship and sometimes it’s hard If the, if the partner isn’t represented in that. And I, I would say at a minimum, like I want, I need, we need to know like what the joint balance sheet is, right?

We know that like retirement accounts, they’re always individualized. You have an IRA in your name, Tim, right? Uh, you know, there’s a 401k in, you know, Shay’s name, like that type of thing. Like those are not joint accounts. Um. But we want the joint, we want the individual and the [00:08:00] shared balance sheet there, and then we also want like the shared goals, right?

What are we, and again, you could have a goal of, I want to do this and this, and Jessica would have a goal. I want to do that and that, and then we can have shared goals. And I think those have to be in the plan or we’re not really not doing you justice. Right? So all of the things that you mentioned, um, are.

Are are present right and I try to weed out people that are going to be less engaged because again like We want people that are engaged that take our advice for the most part You know, we we feel like the advice that we give is in your best interest. That is the client’s financial plan um But you know both partners are are somewhat, you know plugged into what’s going on but uh, yeah, it can be all over the map right and um You know, it’s just interesting to see how people approach.

And, um, again, people have, I don’t know if we talk about this, but people have different money personalities in terms of how they view money, you know, what, how they’re raised [00:09:00] around money, what is the vocabulary for money, like all that kind of stuff. And again, some, some of that could just be inherent to how, you know, how they are, it could be also like the environment in which they grew up in.

Tim Ulbrich: And I wanna start there, Tim, because I think before we talk about strategies or ways that people may think about. Working on their finances together. I think it’s so important that we first just recognize and understand and reflect on how did we grow up around money? And, you know, what I, what I call kind of know thyself in terms of the money personality, because when you bring two different money personalities together.

Right. Even if you end up having accounts that are, let’s say, completely separate or some combination of merge or separate, and we’ll talk about that more detail here in a little bit, inevitably, there’s going to be conversations where things start to overlap. You mentioned kind of shared goals and visions, and we all come with different money perspectives that shape our money personalities that we have today and what I have found, and I’m making this sound much easier [00:10:00] than it is for the sake of just the time on the podcast, like Jess and I came from very different money personalities.

And it took us a while. I think to really be able to articulate that out loud and say, Hey, these are the strengths that I bring to the table growing up in this environment. And these are the weaknesses that I bring to the table growing up in this environment. And I really felt like that took the pressure off some of the conversation that, you know, we can think about, Hey, because we grew up in this environment and our family maybe budgeted this way, or in my finance, my, my household growing up, everything was merged and I have vivid memories.

Of how my parents did the budget and the conversations and how the small business was a part of that conversation. Of course, that shaped the perspective that I bring good and bad right perspective. And so I think I want to get your thoughts on that because my experience, my personal experience says the more we understand how we grew up around money and how that shapes the perspective we have today, the better chance we have to be able to come together and figure out what this plan looks like [00:11:00] going forward.

Tim Baker: Can I, can I put you on the hot seat, Tim? I’m interested to see, like, cause I, I view again, working with you and Jess in the past, like I view you guys as kind of like similar. In terms of like money, if you don’t mind, like walk, walk us through, like, it might, maybe this will be a good way to kind of talk a little bit about the money personalities and like what those are, but like, where, where, where do you see you?

Because so when I think about many personalities, like the umbrella, and I’ve talked about this before, is you kind of have that person that is like open hand, like more of the spender, right? And underneath that, I think that’s the. The spender, um, the risk taker, and then the other umbrella is the closed hands that people are just like saving, you know, are afraid to part with their dollars.

So that’s typically the security seeker, the saver, and then the, the, the, the person that’s kind of in the middle is the flyer, which they’re kind of more like laissez faire, like money is a thing. Like, I don’t necessarily [00:12:00] worry about it too much. It’s very easy going. And you’re kind of like. in the middle somewhere, right?

So walk me through, if you don’t mind, like what, where do you, where would you say you kind of were and then where Jess, Jess was in, in, in those, uh, you know, in the, in those personalities?

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. Let me reference for, for people that are interested in learning more about what you’re talking about. There’s several assessments out there, but what one that matches up with the terms that Tim’s using. Around like saver, spender, flyer, risk taker is called the five money personalities quiz. And we’ll link to that in the show notes as well.

I’ll say that I think where we have similarities, let’s start there as we, we both grew up in households where the finances were merged. Um, and we both grew up in households where I would say there was shared decision making, but one person who was clearly taking the lead. With the finances and so that that’s the similarities.

I think we’re coming with um For for better or for worse. I I would say I grew up in a household that was uh, [00:13:00] very frugal There was more of a scarcity mindset around money and very much a focus on Saving for the future trying to do everything that we can to plan and prep for the future now Some of that I think comes from growing up in a small business.

Like I have vivid memories In conversations that my parents were having, you know, I remember my mom talking about, Hey, how hard my dad is working in the business. And, you know, we, we necessarily can’t do a, B or C. Because we’re trying to save up for this vacation a year or two years in the future. I remember my mom talking about, Hey, we’re able to go on this vacation that, that we maybe did once a year, once every other year, but it was paid for by coupons and clipping coupons.

And I remember mom kind of worked in the coupons on the living room floor. Right? So those are core memories. You know, I think of inside out, right? Core memories like, and I have carried those very much in. To the way I have approached money for, for better or for worse. I think the, I think the frugality has real benefits, but I have really struggled and have had to work [00:14:00] hard to evolve and have had to have your help and the planning team’s help and Jess’s help to really get outside out of that future only mindset and that scarcity frugality mindset to loosen the reins and ask some of the questions of like, what’s the, so what if today, and how do we find this balance, right?

Of living the rich life today and in the future. And I think on the flip side, Jess. I would say grew up in a family environment where there was some stress and fear and anxiety, uh, around the money, but I think there was, uh, more of an openness to the present moment and, uh, some of the experiences that are in front of us today.

But on the flip side, there was some of that scarcity mindset towards the future. Uh, as well, but there was definitely more of a present that I think she really brings that perspective today, where, where I’m kind of balancing us out to think about tomorrow. She’s really helping us focus in the present.

Tim Baker: yeah, and I think, I think, you know, sometimes I think people think that like if you have [00:15:00] multiple personalities in a, in a planning relationship, like, so if you, if you think about the security seeker, you know, someone who values stability, planning, uh, long term financial security and the saver, you know, they have satisfaction saving money and minimize the expenses.

Like, that end of the spectrum, I think, goes a long way in a financial plan, but I think it’s good to be counterbalanced by a spender, someone who views money as a tool for enjoyment, convenience, um, maybe some immediate gratification, YOLO, I’ve kind of talked about this with my own journey, like, I’ve kind of Going back and forth on this risk taker, right?

That might be someone because again, like it’s funny you say that because like the growing up in my household Like if you ran a business like you’re a risk taker if you’re an entrepreneur, you’re a risk taker, right? And maybe not so much right? So risk taker thrives on opportunity Adventure and potential for big financial rewards and again that flyers, you know money’s not a central focus they prioritize other values like [00:16:00] Relationships or passions.

Um, I think it’s good to have, I think if you have all of one thing, if you have two savers or two people, security seeker, you’re, you’re a mess and a fortune hopefully, but for the purpose of what? Right. If you have someone that again opens the hand is spending or taking, you know, big swings and risking it all, you know We want to avoid having to like bag groceries in the future So I think having having that balance in a relationship is good And I think this changes over time like I mentioned, you know I grew up and again, my mom was a teacher.

My dad made some more money. We, we, we were fine. Right. But like my mom did the coupon thing and we scrimped and we saved. And when, if we did go out, it was, you know, we’d order a meal, no, no, no drinks, no desserts. Right. Um, so like, and they put a lot of their money into the house and like where our family spent time.

And, you know, growing up, I was in charge of [00:17:00] like, you need to get to a certain age. I was, I was working like in Russia. I was never allowed to work. Yeah. On a school night. So I’d work on the weekends. I was, I worked at an Irish restaurant where I grew up, but it was like, Hey, if you want to buy a car, like that’s on you, pal.

Like if you want insurance or gas, you know, if you want certain items, that’s on you. So I kind of, you know, fell in line with my mom who was a saver. Um, but then I, when I went into the army and nine 11 happened and it was kind of like Yolo, right? Like it was, I don’t really know if tomorrow’s going to happen.

So like that shaped. Yeah. More where I was more of a spender, right? And then I think I got positives and negatives from both things. And, and, you know, I, I’m kind of at where I am now, which is probably somewhere in the middle, I wouldn’t say I’m a flyer cause I kind of think of that as more maybe like, you know, off, but I would say I look more to the long term and, and Shay, as I’ve said on this as more like, bro, we have kids like,

Tim Ulbrich: This is the

Tim Baker: have one, yeah, this is the season.

We have one shot at this life. And I’ve kind of come around to that [00:18:00] too, because. You know, I do think that because we’re planning and we’re doing the things that we do and, and again, the numbers are, are, um, confirmed by our plan. Like, I feel more at ease. And more, um, um, comfortable spending, spending money, like, you know, especially if it’s for those things that, you know, um, are for our family and, and experiences and things like that.

But this is a hard thing too. And I, like, so we talk about the person that was, I don’t know if a lot of us just have the vocabulary ourselves to have the conversation conversations with ourselves about money versus having it with a. Uh, uh, a person, you know, that you’re in a relationship with, like, we don’t have the vocabulary ourselves.

So how can we expect, especially if we come from different places to be able to, you know, have the conversation, have the vocabulary or ask the right questions. Because again, like, you know, growing up, like money was kind of a taboo thing. Like, I never talked to my parents about how much [00:19:00] money they made, or how we, like, we never really talked, I know we would save, and I think we knew that money was a scarce thing, but, like, we didn’t really talk openly about it, um, and I think that, you know, that not having those conversations is a big deal too, so.

I think that’s why this is really important. This, this topic is really important. It’s, and it’s apropos, we’re doing this around, you know, Valentine’s days because it’s, it’s difficult for ourselves, let alone introducing a completely, you know, new set of beliefs and that type of

Tim Ulbrich: Mm hmm. So, first of all, I need you to stop hitting on people that are bagging groceries. Cause that was my first job and my, my favorite job. Uh, I loved it. I loved it. Like every time I go to the grocery store, I get to get the warm and fuzzy still. Like, I don’t know. There’s just something about like the methodical nature of it.

And I felt like it taught me a ton around communication skills, dealing with people like my mom that show up with their box of coupons. And I’m like, Oh my gosh, this is going to take forever. Right. Not now you just scan like an app and it has all [00:20:00] your coupons

Tim Baker: Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: but, um, I loved it and I’ll give my boys a hard time every once in a while.

I’ll, I’ll throw out a produce code off the top of my memory. It’s

Tim Baker: No way.

Tim Ulbrich: presses them every time. Yeah. It’s awesome. Well, I used to impress them. They’re getting too old for

Tim Baker: So did you like it because it was kind of like Tetris too? Like, like bagging

Tim Ulbrich: yeah. Like I, I can’t stand how kids these days, right? Bad groceries, like so inefficient, so inefficient, but

Tim Baker: man. Maybe, maybe we need to get you, uh, back, back. I mean, the whole point of, of, uh, financial plan is hopefully to have to avoid that, Tim. So you don’t have to moonlight. But maybe a, but maybe no hate. Maybe that’s a, maybe that’s a good kind of a sunset job. I mean, I could see, I could see that being a cool job, especially you’re talking to people.

Um, no hate on

Tim Ulbrich: I liked it.

Tim Baker: my end. Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: So fun fact for the YFP community, my IPMs, which is the items per minute. That’s the KPI for the cashiers. My IPMs were top at the top [00:21:00] supermarket in Western New York. So fun

Tim Baker: Whoa. That’s a quite, quite the, quite the flex.

Tim Ulbrich: but I, I think your point about emotional vocabulary is, is so important, right? Because my experience, Tim tells me that. When the emotional vocabulary isn’t there to be able to first identify yourself, where does some of these money scripts come from to then be able to initiate a conversation? This comes out sideways, right?

And I can think about some early experiences in our marriage where, you know, might, might lead to passive aggressiveness or, you know, internalizing some of what really is underneath that, which is the scarcity or the fear or the other things that has nothing or almost nothing to do with what actually is being spent.

But it’s activating an emotion that may be related to how we were brought up financially and, and being able to put a name to that, I think is so important. So let, let’s shift gears. We talked at the beginning about in terms of, of managing, [00:22:00] practically managing accounts and month to month finances, whether it’s credit cards, checking accounts, you know, some, some partners, some couples decide to have everything separate.

Some decide to merge everything and then others do a little bit of both. And from a high level, what, what do you see as the pros and cons to those approaches and functionally, like what, what does that potentially look like? And I’m, I’m specifically thinking about the group that maybe you said is the, is probably the largest group that has some merge and some separate.

How, how does that practically work?

Tim Baker: Yeah. So we divide these into three groups. We’ll, we’ll kind of go through the completely merged, the completely separate and then the hybrid. So I think if we look at the completely, the completely merged, I think some of the pros. For that group is simplicity and transparency, right? You know when one hand is washed on the other type of thing so you’re managing One a set of accounts to track expenses.

It makes budgeting and saving a lot easier Um, you know, I think full visibility can [00:23:00] foster Trust and reduce the chances of surprises Um, I think it’s easier to kind of align your financial goals. So it encourages more of a teamwork approach um You know, whether it’s a big goal or even something that’s, you know, less so, um, I think it promotes regular conversations.

Like, Hey, can you transfer that, you know, or can you, can you make sure that the money’s there? Because this bill is coming out, um, and it helps partners are on the same page. Um, I think it increases efficiency in, in money man, management. I know one of the things I was jealous about that you said, where you’re taking a lot of those like, um, uh, expenses that you always had, you know, we had to buy paper towels every three months or whatever.

And you’re like automating that with like, Amazon or whatever it is like in my house. So I couldn’t really do that because kind of shade takes care of that. So it’s kind of out of sight, out of mind for me. Right. Um, it could be with managing debt, you know, if you’re again, everything is, if you, if you have a shared credit card that, you know, kind of got out of whack, you’re seeing it, you know, together, um, and even investments again, most, most, [00:24:00] most of it, uh, retirement accounts are, are separate, but you know, you can, you can have joint investments.

Um, I think it helps streamline things like the redheaded stepchild of the financial plan estate planning. Um, that people often, you know, forget about if a partner becomes incapacitated, it’s easier to find stuff. Um, you know, and I think just easier during like life transition. So again, in the case of an emergency, um, a death, hopefully not, you know, the, the surviving partner has immediate access to all funds without any legal hurdles.

I think the cons here are, and I think this is probably the big thing is like loss of financial autonomy. So where, you know, like, hey, I was a grown up. I got my big boy job, big girl job. I’ve been kind of living on my own. And all of a sudden, um, Mary, I’m getting married and you want me to like combine everything like that.

It feels restrictive. I don’t I don’t like that. Um, I feel I feel controlled and that can lead to conflicts and spending habits and things like that. Um, [00:25:00] I think it could be potential for like power imbalances is like if one partner earns significantly more and everything is joint, they might feel entitled to have more control or, you know, the tiebreaker and that could create tension.

Um, the, the, I’ve definitely seen this where the lower earning partner might feel guilty about spending, so they don’t, they, they themselves don’t feel like they’re on the same level because. You know, they feel like that what they’re bringing to the table is not equitable. Um, could be conflicts over spending priorities.

So just, you know, the spender versus the saver can lead to frequent agreement, uh, agreements, disagreements where, you know, if you have kind of your separate playgrounds, your separate accounts that maybe that’s less so. Um, and then complications again, in case of divorce or separation, um, you know, Things, things like that, you know, and, and there’s probably a risk there too.

Like if one partner is less financially responsible, their actions can negatively impact both partners, credit scores and financial stability. So that’s

Tim Ulbrich: merged, right.

Tim Baker: Yeah, if they’re merged, so that would probably be the pros [00:26:00] and cons for the, for the merge. If they’re separate, the pros for it being separate is I think you maintain that financial independence that a lot of people kind of establish for a number of years, maybe before they get married.

Like you said, you and Jess were really young when you got married, right? I was, I was older. Um, you know, it’s simplifies, uh, personal spending. So I think like if you have hobbies or gifts, or I just want to spontaneously buy Shay a gift. I don’t want her to see that on a credit card statement.

I feel like this happens for us at like Christmas where I’m like, I’ll see something on Amazon, but she sees everything that we buy. So it’s like, there’s no surprise. So I’ll just say like, don’t look at the Amazon

Tim Ulbrich: to go take cash out. Although

Tim Baker: Yeah, yeah, exactly. Yeah. She’s like, why are you taking cash out? Like, you know, are you, you know, what are you buying?

Um, it could potentially. Yeah, yeah, exactly. Yeah, that’s those are few and far between. Um, it can reduce those power imbalances. So you’re avoiding situation where one feels partner, one, one partner feels dominant, um, easier in the case [00:27:00] of divorce or separation. Again, we don’t plan for that. Um, and again, potentially protects against financial mismanagement.

I know there we’ve had people that we’ve worked with shades as she has experienced this. I had to a degree where a partner Runs up a huge credit card bill. And if you’re on that account, like you’re on the hook. Um, so cons for completely separation is increased complexity with managing shared expenses, right?

So there’s more coordination when you’re, you’re split in household bills, who pays for what some people, and they can do this. In either scenario, but you have some people that will live off of one income and everything The other income is is is cream. It’s you know, so that doesn’t matter but like it could be there um, there could be potential secrecy and mistrust like You know, sometimes we get scared of something that we don’t understand or see.

So, you know, that, that could be there. I think it takes more of a lift to have alignment in financial goals. Um, it could be inequity and kind of the lifestyle contributions of like, how are [00:28:00] we, how are we doing this? Cause again, in this model, a lot of it is, um, completely separate. So like, if I’m just paying for the electric bill, but you’re paying for the mortgage, like, how does

Tim Ulbrich: do we work that out? Yeah.

Tim Baker: and more complicated in emergencies, that type of thing. So that would be the second, the second bucket. And then probably the most common that I see is kind of some merged, some separate. So the pro here is you kind of get the best of both worlds. You have, you have some financial independence with the benefits of shared financial management.

Um couples can maintain autonomy over personal spending while working together on joint goals So you kind of have you know the venn diagram so to speak you have you know And I think that again, I think for the most part the venn diagram that shared shaded area should be the Biggest and then you have like the outlier of kind of your own maybe accounts um simplified shared expenses Encourages healthy communication.

So couples still need to discuss and agree on contributions um Promotes transparency, but also allows you to [00:29:00] have, you know, a little bit of space Um reduce financial stress. I think the cons here is again. You still have that potential for financial imbalance Um, there’s still complexity in the money management if you’re again managing multiple accounts I think you still have a risk of you know, what’s yours versus ours and then how does that does that create?

A space or, uh, an arm’s length in your, in your marriage, um, and then I think less financial, you know, visibility and things like that. I think regardless of approach, no matter where you, and I, and I think more so than others, like it’s clear communication. Right. So sometimes you’re clearly communicating by default.

So if I have, everything’s like shake and see, she knows that I can, I just spend a hundred dollars on a bottle of Brown, right? And she’s like, dude, what, what the

Tim Ulbrich: She’s used to it by now.

Tim Baker: she’s used to it. So I think clear communication, regardless, I think regular check ins, you know, scheduling periodic financial discussions.

And again, sometimes that’s with the help of financial planner. I [00:30:00] also think that you doing that as a couple is really important. I think clear agreements and setting expectations of, of how things are going to be split or whatever that looks like can prevent conflicts. I kind of think of our partnership charter like, hey, if these things happen, this is what we’re going to do.

I think those are important. And then just being flexible. I think the, the key to any financial plan is not the, you know, nothing is poured in concrete. Right. We need to have flexibility because Things change. Life changes, right? And it is, you know, I’m sure the listeners have heard this, me say this, it’s about planning.

So that’s for you, Corey, planning with an I N G, not the plan, right? Like, cause the plan, once we have it, something happens in the world and you know, the plan goes out the door. So it’s about, it’s about the process of planning.

Tim Ulbrich: Tim communication, and we’re going to come back to talking about the value of a third party. I know it’s something Jess and I have benefited from Tremendously, um, and so we’ll talk about the role is but in terms of couples and [00:31:00] communication, you know, whether you’ve been married for 20 years whether you’re been together for 10 and you’re not married, whether you’re, you know, just started dating.

I think there’s a space for some of these conversations regardless of your situation. And we compile the list of 25 financial discussions for couples. If people want to download that guide, your financial pharmacist. com forward slash a 25. And I often joke with people like, Hey, this is a third party list, right?

So if you’re wanting to start some of these conversations, you know, it’s not, it’s not me coming with the ammo. It’s the, Hey, I read about this. I heard about this on a podcast. We should have these conversations, which, you know, jokingly, but I think that that speaks to some of the value, uh, of the third party.

Hey, give me a visual on the Venn diagram. Cause I do think for a lot of people. That resonates you talked about some merge some separate and in your opinion, you know You want to see that center part to be the the largest part knowing everyone’s situation is different So, you know that might be something like [00:32:00] 70 percent merge 15 15 60 20 20 right something along those lines, but there’s of course variations of that like it is Is all the money coming into the central and then we’re dividing the percentages or are we waiting it, you know, according to what we make.

So, you know, if we’re both contributing toward the mortgage payment, but one person makes 70 percent of the household income, you know, are we contributing equally? Or is it weighted any more details? You can share on that of what you’ve seen people do.

Tim Baker: . What I think is best is everything comes into a, a joint account. So like all of paychecks come into a joint account. And then I think if you do have like separate accounts, some dollar amount or some percentage of that can, you know, go to a, um, an individual account for you to do whatever you want with.

Right. I think what most people do, because again, I think it’s, it’s, you know, the, the inertia of this is here. It’s like, I think what most people do is they put, they [00:33:00] get paid in their normal accounts and then they feed into a joint account. That’s what Shay and I do. And I have always kind of complained about that.

And I think it got to a point, cause again, she’s experienced things in her own life that I think, you know, we are a team and I have no, but like, I think it’s just more of a comfort thing for her. Um, You know, but I don’t even know what the percentage, you know, essentially the way we do and we kind of follow with no budget budget and like we look at all of our expenses and basically she, she’s the tracker, you know, I’m the financial planner, but she actually does all this like so she has a spreadsheet that she says, okay, you know, Zoe’s now in daycare that’s costing us a million dollars a week.

Um, you know, we have this project coming up or whatever. And she basically says, this is how much money you need to put in every paycheck. Right. And then I always push the envelope with like, okay, what are we saving for, for vacations? What are we saving for retirement? Like that’s my role in all of this.

So she kind of does the. the kind of like what is it to run the household and then [00:34:00] we kind of talk about our goals or our major projects and I kind of shared with you how we kind of get up like get the Priority of things and then that’s what we essentially do, right? So that works for us again I think if it were up to me, I would be more of a hey into the joint and then maybe some money out to an individual The percentage is again very widely Um, but I think that for for us, it works because again, it allows me to kind of do some things that have interest that I know she would roll her eyes at.

And I’m just like, you know, she’s like, you know, kind of not absent from that. But I, I look at it as as long as we’re taking care of those. Shorten medium term goals in terms of how we operate the household. And then I know that, hey, we’re maxing out retirement, that’s not even hitting the paycheck, or we’re maxing out an HSA or an IRA, like as long as the, and, and we’re funding, you know, that trip that we’re going on next and we, we calculate that’s gonna be X amount of dollars.

Um, and typically what we just do is we just say, Hey, this is [00:35:00] what we’re paying on the, you know, spending on vacations. We divide that by 12 or or 24, we put that number in and then the, the following year we just kind of check in. We like. Hey, we had to like reach into our pocket a little bit more because mickey mouse is super expensive or or not typically for things like that We’re continuing to push the envelope in terms of what we are saving Um, so having those sinking funds, um, and sometimes we’ll have to you know, they’re not necessarily Um emergencies, but we’ll have maybe we’ll move some money around in our sinking funds that that makes sense So that’s kind of what we do.

I think a lot of um clients They do some version of that in, especially the hybrid clients where it’s mainly like we have separate accounts and we put X amount of dollars in and that’s how we spend our bills. But I think there’s, there’s levels to this in terms of like what’s comfortable. Again, like I feel like if I had my druthers, like I would just have everything joint kind of like you and Jess, but you know, again, it’s a, it’s a little bit different dynamic I think in terms of where we come, where we come from.

Tim Ulbrich: [00:36:00] Yeah. Yeah. And I want to make sure I recap to understand and so our audience can understand as well. So you guys have. Uh, paychecks coming to individual accounts, then you fund through Shea’s kind of monthly process and tracking. You fund the joint account. Um, Shea’s kind of boots on the ground month to month tracking.

What do we need to be doing short term? And then together you’re working on some of the prioritization of the goals. And then you’re pushing some of the conversation of, of the long term. Am I tracking? Okay, cool. And there’s something there that you said, I want to make sure we don’t brush by that is so important where I see a lot of stress and anxiety and frustration and arguments coming in is in the absence of understanding what those goals are long term, short term midterm, and whether or not we’re on track to achieve those.

That to me becomes a space where things get dynamic to say the least. Right. Because, you know, when you talk about like, Hey, we’re, we’re going to see Mickey mouse and we’re, we’re [00:37:00] planning for a, B or C and we’ve got a bucket and it’s the Mickey mouse bucket and we’re planning for it or longer term things like retirement or, and days gone by, you guys were buying the RV, right?

Whatever are those shared goals, if you know what they are and whether or not you’re on track or a progress for them, to me, that just alleviates so much. Of the financial stress and pressure that can come, uh, it’s in the absence of knowing that where I think that uncertainty causes the anxiety and the feelings of, of overwhelmed.

That can be the divide to getting on the same page.

Tim Baker: Yeah, like I always joke around that You know Shea is definitely more of and again, like I think culturally like the idea of saving for retirement is very foreigner because in brazil You kind of just work and then you have a pension like it’s very different. So Like trying to get her on board with that has been harder.

And again, she looks at our young family and she knows that the time is now to really, um, [00:38:00] enjoy them and, and, and the experiences. And, you know, I, I keep joking around with her because I’m like, one day, you’re going to get to a certain age where you can start to see retirement. And you’re going to say, Oh, like Tim, you’re so wise.

For, you know, basically, you know, getting me to put, you know, max out my 401k or

Tim Ulbrich: Words that will not come out of Shea’s

Tim Baker: it will never come out of her mouth, but she will eventually wake up one day and might think that, you know, so, um, so, but I, but I take solace in the fact that, again, knowing the plan and knowing, like, Most people you ask, like, are you on track for retirement?

They’re like, I don’t know. Like I, there’s a calculator when I sign into my 401k that tells me, which I, which I think is very like irresponsible if I can throw that out there because like. You know, Shay, like going through, I’m sharing all the, like the emotional conversations that, but like Zoe, our youngest is 10 months old and she just started going to daycare.

We [00:39:00] had a, um, a live in nanny, an au pair. And if you finally got to the point where we did this, this didn’t work out. So we’ve gone through this emotional thing of like transitioning Zoe to the. Um, to daycare, and that invites an extra expense and, um, sickness and all the, all this stuff, right? And, um, and the emotional sides of that, and, you know, Shay will exasperate it through this process.

Like, oh, I wish I could just stay home and, like, just be with my baby. And I’m like, well, you can. It just means that we have to, like, make changes. Like, we have to tighten the belt a lot. And, um, It’s the same thing with retirement. Like, like you can, a lot of us, if we’re living off of beans and rice and our living expenses are low, like you can retire.

Right. It’s just maybe not a like the lifestyle that you are. But I think like, I know that we are like, I know being more of the longterm planner, like that we’re doing well. Right. And that’s not to say it’s always going to [00:40:00] be like that because things come in cycles and, you know, jobs changes and things like that.

But where we’re at and what we’re doing. Yeah. Yeah. I feel really comfortable. And to be honest, like the rest of it, it really doesn’t matter where it goes. Like we want to, we have the same values that we want to spend it on our family or right now it’s on our house. Um, so like I don’t, I don’t think twice about that because I really, I trust in the plan.

You know, I trust the process to, um, take that adage. And if I didn’t though. You know, it’s the same thing we talk about like student loans or retirement plan and like, unless you have the math, like you have, you have emotions related to money, but unless you have the math to confirm or deny that you’re kind of flying blind.

Right? So like, I have the math and I know that what we’re doing is, is going to set us up for the future. So I don’t care if we spend money, even though that’s not necessarily my money personality. I don’t care if we spend money today. Um, yeah. So I think, [00:41:00] again, it goes back to having a plan and plan in because things consistently change.

And if you don’t have that, and I think again, a lot of, of tension and, and disagreement and, you know, and I, and I think having, I think having these discussions one on one, but I think having them with an objective third party that knows your balance sheet and knows your goals is very, very powerful. And sometimes.

I can, I can say something to Shay, like, why are you like this? Or why do you think this way? Um, and I’m asking the wrong accusatory question or says somebody that is a professional can, and, you know, they can ask some more neutral sounding questions to kind of get to. How does she think about money versus how do I think about money in a non judgmental way?

And again, that goes back to like, a lot of us don’t have the vocabulary or know what questions to ask because we just, we’re not raised like that and we just don’t, don’t know.

Tim Ulbrich: Let’s talk more about that in the value of a third part. I think we’re dancing around it, [00:42:00] but you’re getting, you’re giving a really good example. Um, you know, when we talk about something like nest egg and retirement and I, and if Jess were here, I think she would say as much that for her, like there’s the numbers in the Excel sheet and then there’s the reality of the feelings.

Right. And when retirement is a question mark is an unknown is a, I never think there’s going to be enough. That very much informs how we feel today and how we act, whether or not that’s based on reality. And so I think this is one example where having a third party involved can not only take us jointly through an exercise.

You know, versus me punching in numbers and saying, Hey, look at the sheet. Look at the sheet, look at the sheet. Like let’s walk through this together and challenge the assumptions, but then also include the emotional piece of, Hey, like I recognize that this says we’re on track and perhaps we’re even over saving, which is a conversation we’ve talked about before on the show.

All the while we’re feeling the pressure [00:43:00] today of, Hey, I wish there was some more cash around to experience the things that we want to experience with the boys, well, maybe there could be. Right. Because of what we’re, we’re doing for the future. So to me, that’s just one, one example. And if you want to pay back off that, or otherwise where you’ve seen having a third party, of course, we’re biased in what we do in the planning where it can be so valuable and helping partners work together.

Tim Baker: Yeah, we just signed on a new client recently that, you know, she’s podcast forever and, you

Tim Ulbrich: Shout out.

Tim Baker: Yeah, much, much love for the support. And the big reason that she came, she finally booked an appointment with us was because she just recently found out that her grandparents are gonna be leaving a pretty sizable amount of money to, um, her parents.

And she’s kind of, and she’s, she’s kind of taking advice from like the family. It’s like, save, save, save, like max out your retirement. And they’re feeling the tightness in like the, the day to day of having young kids and a [00:44:00] family and things like that. And she’s like, for what? Like, so that I can pass on millions or hundreds of thousands of dollars to like, what’s the, like, why?

Like, I don’t want to repeat that. Like I want. That balance of I want to live a wealthy life today And she kind of called you out of like that’s kind of what you say live a wealthy life today a wealthy life tomorrow Um, like there’s balance there. So if you’re always just living a wealthy life tomorrow, what’s the freaking point?

Right? What’s the point of? Of taking on this debt or earning this income or or or having a family like you want to make sure that That you know, you got one crack at this and I think for her it was like i’m i’m maxing everything else out and if I told Like if if I if I were to whisper like i’m not going to do this anymore like her family would think she’s crazy I’m like, well, they don’t know you, right?

They don’t know like the, like, it’s just like, oh, like, you know, I should pay off my student loans as quick as possible, or I should invest like this. It’s kind of that water cooler. I should, I should, you know, I should get, I should [00:45:00] claim Social Security this way, like that water cooler, like that. They don’t know your balance sheet.

They don’t know your goals. They’re trying to help you as best they can, but like, that’s not advice. So, and we’ve had clients that have done those things that I’m like, well, maybe we don’t need to do that anymore or right now, right? Maybe when we, when we build a plan, we see that there’s room there for you to take care of Tim and Jess in 2025 and maybe not so much Tim and Jess in 2065.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Tim Baker: And that’s okay, right? Um, but I think, I think sometimes having these conversations, whether they’re the discovery meetings to see if, if like we’re a good fit for, from a, from a planner to a client perspective, or when I used to do what the planning team does a lot better than what I did, like the scripter plan meetings, where there’s a lot of emotion there in both of those meetings, probably more so in the scripter plan where we’re talking about, you know, asking very pointed questions about like, like what are, what are the things that matter to you most?

And I remember those. [00:46:00] Meetings, there was tears, there was kind of the, the one partner like crane in their neck at their other partner, because they’re saying something, they had no idea that they felt, or it was a passion of theirs. Um, and I think that goes back to just not having the vocabulary or sometimes I always talk, I always tell the story of when I got out of the army, I was working in a where I was working.

Uh, I worked for Sears Kmart. They had just merged. We’re like, we’re going to buy for retail supremacy. And I was like, yeah, exactly. I was like, yeah, we’re going to beat Amazon and Walmart and all that. So it’s hilarious now, but I had a great interview with them and it was kind of more operational leadership than what I was experiencing in the army.

And, um, and it was, it was long hours. So I would, I would get up, I would leave my house at five o’clock and I would get there at five 30. Um, and then I would stay until probably six, six 30 drive the 30 minutes home and it was dark both ways, but I don’t ever remember most days. I don’t ever remember the [00:47:00] drive.

It was just like I was on autopilot when I got into my car and then when I, you know, basically part and I think a lot of the times that’s our life because we get so freaking busy, Tim, that we don’t slow down and actually like. Like reflect or ask ourselves these questions and again that goes back if we go back to like the third party And again, i’m biased Like if we’re meeting with you regularly, even if it’s just annually or semi annually Um, obviously we do a lot of work on the front end of a plan But even if we’re just taking the time twice a year To kind of check in and actually view that dashboard and not just stare out the windshield for 30 minutes, you know, on your commute to and from, I think that that action, um, and doing that with a partner to kind of tie it back to Valentine’s day is really, really powerful.

And I think just because of the hustle and bustle and the distractions that we have, um, with technology or whatever else, it’s hard for [00:48:00] us to kind of slow down and say, like, is this really what I want? Shay, is this really what you want? And I think like, you know, one of the things that Shay and I like to do when, so we do like a monthly date night, and then we kind of do ad hoc stuff, but like, we’ll talk about, it’s more of like dreams.

Like, like what, where do we want to go next? Right? So one of the exercises that we’ve done is, you know, we’ll put, I’ll make a list of all like the projects or things that I want to do. So whether it’s buy an RV or redo the kitchen or you know, redo our backyard. So we kind of have this list. And we both basically rank order the list in order, you know, basically what we want the most.

And then I basically combined that in a weighted, a weighted ranking. And then we talk about that and that’s kind

Tim Ulbrich: come up with a shared list first or do you have your own list? And then,

Tim Baker: we come up with a shared list that we’re both basically ranking. And then what’s come, what, what, some of the things that have come out of that. Where, you know, one of the things since we moved [00:49:00] into our house in 2020, she’s like, I hate this chandelier in the, in the front of the house.

And, and I’m just, and I, I could not care less about it, Tim. I, it’s not something that I even noticed, but she’s like, I hate it. It’s like this crystal thing. It’s gets dusty and cobwebby. Like, I don’t like

Tim Ulbrich: get it done and

Tim Baker: And I’m like, well, what is it, what would it cost us just to kind of get a new fixture and replace?

She’s like 1500 bucks. I’m like, why are we even wasting any more? And that, that’s probably not the way, the right way to ask it. Cause that sounds accusatory, but I’m like, what, well, what can we do just to make this go away, like, you know, so, so those kind of get knocked off, but then some of the major projects, like, Hey, we’re redoing our backyard.

Like we both put that at the top of the, uh, top of the list. And like, that’s what we’re attacking next. Right. So then the next one, you know, we’ll attack next, or we maybe we’ll, we’ll do the, the, the ranking again. But I think like, those are more of like the exciting, like nobody wants to talk about, well, some people do, but like.

Like paying off debt is like, nah, like it can kind of be a drag. Um, or some of these other more mundane parts of the financial plan. I [00:50:00] think, you know, aligning things that, and for us it’s like, you know, having a green space that we really want and is invited in that, you know, we see our family, you know, just enjoying was really important.

And we’re not going to move because of, you know, where the market is, the interest rates, like we’re going to put the money in the house that we have. And I think we’re excited about that. So like, those are some of the discussions that we have. And I think, you know, what you do is then you then plug that into a financial planner, um, and you say, okay, like, how can we make this happen?

Where are we, where are we pulling this money from? How long is it going to take for us to save? Do we use debt? Do we leverage, what does that look like? So.

Tim Ulbrich: Tim, one thing you said that is so important and Jess and I experienced this working with you and the rest of the planning team. You said, is this what we want? And a question that we have to come back to. And one of the things I love about our process, you know, step one, as we get organized, we really can’t do anything else until we have a good record and system of, you know, where’s everything at?

What’s the balance sheet? And do we have eyes on everything [00:51:00] that’s out there? Step two, how What’s the vision? We call it script your plan and, and once we set that vision, which I will go on record by saying, most financial planning firms and financial planners are making financial decisions without a vision.

And that is backwards. The

Tim Baker: even without like a balance sheet, 

Tim Ulbrich: without a balance sheet.

Tim Baker: you have a pulse. Let me sell you this insurance product that you don’t need. Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: And the vision, I always describe it, the vision should be the window in which you’re looking through. And the other side is any financial decision you’re making, how are we gonna handle, you know, the debt? What are we looking at in terms of investing and saying for the future?

Should we buy this investment property? What about this vacation? What about that? Right. And that shared vision, which you talked about is so important in terms of two people working together. But once we set that vision, you know, this is not the strategic plan at your workplace where it sits on the shelf and becomes dusty.

Like this comes back in the meetings to say, Hey, Tim and Jess in 2023 or whatever it was last time we did this, you guys said that tangibly, these were [00:52:00] the things that meant. You were living your rich life with your family. Have we done them? Have

Tim Baker: Yeah. You hold the mirror up, right?

Tim Ulbrich: hold the mirror up. And when we think about how we measure the ROI, right?

Of the financial plan. I know, I know a topic you’re passionate about. Sure. There are X’s and O’s that we want to look at. We’re spending so much investing of time and money working with the financial planner and what’s the potential return on that if we didn’t have that relationship. Yes. Let’s have that conversation, but what is it worth?

To say, this is the vision for rich life. And we’re actually going to make this happen and tracking whether or not we’re achieving that. Like we all know when we look back in 30 or 40 years, that is going to be what matters, not did we get our nest egg to 3. 9 versus 3. 6 million. So that vision and having someone that can facilitate the conversations to get to that vision, and then to hold that mirror back up and say, how are we doing?

Right. How are we progressing?

Tim Baker: and, and, and I think it could be a little bit of tough love, you know, a little bit of the [00:53:00] stick of like, Hey, you know, and if I’m talking to myself here, it’s like, Hey, Tim, like nowhere in your script, your plan meeting, your goal session, did you say that you had to lead the league in like bourbon purchases?

If that’s important, then like that should be in the financial planning and we should, we should, you know, we should account for that. But if it’s not, then like, what are we doing? You know, I know people can relate to like shop therapy and things like that. You know, that some of the things that goes on there, but like most of the time people are like, Oh, I have to have like, I don’t have to have these things, but that’s what we typically spend is empty calories.

That’s what we spend our. Our dollars on. It’s more of the and I’ll, I’ll shout out one of our clients. It’s been working with us probably since 2018. Um, I talked to each other yesterday. Like one of the big things to, to major things, um, that we’ve worked on so she good amount of credit card debt. Large amounts of student loans didn’t necessarily love her her job when she was working with us initially.

Um, You know, she w what was uncovered in her script or plan when [00:54:00] she had this passion for horseback riding

Tim Ulbrich: mm

Tim Baker: you have to do this. Like, this is obviously a passion. When you talk about it, you, you’re glowing. And she’s like, oh, but like credit card debt and I have to work more. And, and my student loans and you know, you, you fast forward today, you know, she has, the loans are forgiven.

She’s left that hospital system. She’s working in industry now. She loves their job, a flexibility, better money. Um credit cards are gone She has pickles the horse She she moved from one part of florida to another to be closer to like the national questioning center So like so like that was the big and then that was the big things and then when I talked to her yesterday And you know, her, her other big thing was she wanted to do an African safari with her mom when she booked September, early September, right?

She’s doing it. And she was one of these people where I was talking about like seven figure pharmacist. She’s like, yeah, right, Tim. Like that, that’s, that’s made up, but we looked at her portfolio again. This is not [00:55:00] indicative of like future performance, but her IRAs that were managing grew a hundred thousand dollars year over year.

And she’s like, Oh. Okay. Like I’m now I’m starting to get it, but like super pumped up about like these trips and like the passion and things like that. So like we talk about ROI, like we can see her net worth and her investments growing. Like that’s, that’s, that’s. That’s happened. But if you were to say like, what are maybe some of the things that are better about the life plan that we’ve built out, that’s financial, that’s supported by the financial plan or these passions of like this once in a lifetime trip, the fact that she’s, you know, making it happen with her, you know, with, with showing horseback riding and things like that.

So, and, and again, like, I think this. Can be harder with two, like, with two people to go back to the couples. Right. And you know, I think the way that Shay, I Shay and I do it in terms of rank ordering and, and, and talking through things like that. I think the help of a financial planner goes a long, long way because there’s different dynamics in [00:56:00] different couples.

You know, there’s some people that are a bulldozer, some people that you know, are more timid. And I think bringing. To light both both partners contributions and viewpoints and what their passion are is that’s, that’s what’s going to like save the financial planning profession from the robots, it’s those types of engagements and that type of care and about about our clients and what we’re doing.

It’s not. Some of these other things, right? Like, like invest in or whatever, those things are going to eventually be, you know, everything’s going to be by robots. But, um, I think it’s important again, it’s, it’s really hard to do this by yourself. It’s even harder to do it, you know, with a partner that has a different, you know, value structure.

And I think making sure that you’re rowing that. Boat in the same direction is, is vital. Or you, you know, you get, it’s passive aggressive or, you know, you, you bury, you bury things down deep and, um, you know, you, you hold onto them and [00:57:00] it’s not productive either.

Tim Ulbrich: Tim, perhaps obvious, but I’d like to wrap up here. And I think it needs to be said, knowing that many of our listeners might be the nerd and their relationship, right? Um, and if one person is taking the lead and if that’s you, which is very common that you might have one person kind of take the lead, it’s critical that the other person, the other party is informed, right?

Delegation does not equal uninformed. And I think this is where something like a third party, Um, can be a really valuable asset. This is where making sure you have periodic meetings. You talked about that earlier in the show, making sure you’ve got good systems and documents like legacy folders. We’ve talked about that on the show before.

And it reminds me back to an episode four years ago, we’ll link it, link to this episode in the show notes. One, I often referenced back to with Michelle Cooper, who wrote a book. I’ve still got me a widow’s journey to love happiness and financial independence. And during the show, she shared her personal story.

Of after losing her husband [00:58:00] to suicide and realizing shortly after his death that despite herself being an attorney And working in the financial industry for years She was out of the loop of their family finances and was left to navigate everything while also grieving the loss of her husband And you know again if one person’s taking the lead and that function works great.

But what are the systems? What’s the third party solution? What are the conversations that need to be happening to make sure that both people are are informed in that process?

Tim Baker: yeah. So important, Tim, and, and like I said, you know, I think, I think the best results are when you have two engaged parties most of the time. Um, that more or less take, take our advice. I mean, we do use tools that. Can keep maybe an absent partner or a spotty partner up to speed whether that’s emails or Recap emails or things like that, but I think the goal here just ultimately You know when you’re working as a couple on your money You want to the goal is to win most of the time and I think you know You’re never gonna be perfect.

Some people, you know, will will have bad [00:59:00] months or make bad decisions and and they feel despondent but you know, I think I think it’s really exciting and, and can be very relieving, you know, especially when you have the plan in place to know like, Hey, we’re okay. So we can maybe do things that are outside of the comfort zone, whether it’s saving or spending.

Um, whatever spectrum you fall on. And again, obviously we’re super biased because we believe in what we do. And we’ve seen, you know, great results from a lot of our clients. Um, but you know, it’s something that again, we just don’t do well because we, it’s not something we have the vocabulary for. So I love, I appreciate the topic.

Um, and, and like, like we mentioned at the top, like it’s not a one size fit all like, like there, there’s a lot of ways to kind of a tackle the financial plan and how your, your finances are set up. And I think it’s trying to, it’s the same thing with the budget, trying to find what works best for you. Um, and running with that and then kind of iterating [01:00:00] and making sure that, you know, you feel that all parties are kind of represented and feel good about it.

Tim Ulbrich: Let me end him by putting a plugin for our services. Cause I think our team just does this incredibly well. Shout out to our team of certified financial planners. If you’re listening, thinking, Hey, I’d like to learn more about what it would look like in working. With one of YFP’s fee only certified financial planners, whether you’re single, engaged, married, partner, we’d love to have that conversation.

You go to yourfinancialpharmacist. com. You’ll see an option there to book a discovery call. Uh, Tim leads those discovery calls, opportunity for us to learn more about your situation, uh, learn more about our services and ultimately determine, You know, whether or not there’s a good fit there, we’d like love to have that conversation.

And I think that, you know, we look at our process and our system, as I talked about briefly in terms of making sure we have everything organized, scripting that plan, setting the vision. Uh, we, we just do this effectively. And I think that not only are we trying to move the net worth forward, that’s an important part, but we’re also looking at, you know, beyond the numbers, what does it look like to be living a [01:01:00] rich life and how do we get clear on that?

And how do we develop a financial plan that could support. Living that rich life. So Tim really, really enjoyed the conversation and, uh, we’ll, we’ll catch everyone back here next week. Take care. 

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

Note: Referral fees from affiliate links in this table are sent to the non-profit YFP Gives. 

Read the full advertising disclosure here.

Bonus

Starting Rates

About

YFP Gives accepts advertising compensation from companies that appear on this site, which impacts the location and order in which brands (and/or their products) are presented, and also impacts the score that is assigned to it. Company lists on this page DO NOT imply endorsement. We do not feature all providers on the market.

$750*

Loans

≥150K = $750* 

≥50K-150k = $300


Fixed: 4.89%+ APR (with autopay)

A marketplace that compares multiple lenders that are credit unions and local banks

$500*

Loans

≥50K = $500

Variable: 4.99%+ (with autopay)*

Fixed: 4.96%+ (with autopay)**

 Read rates and terms at SplashFinancial.com

Splash is a marketplace with loans available from an exclusive network of credit unions and banks as well as U-Fi, Laurenl Road, and PenFed

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 394: Crafting a Rich Life in Retirement: Insights from David Zgarrick, PhD


Tim Ulbrich, YFP Co-Founder welcomes back David Zgarrick, PhD to share his journey into “preferment,” balancing retirement, financial planning, and staying engaged through teaching and consulting.

Episode Summary

In this episode, Tim Ulbrich welcomes back David Zgarrick, PhD, as he shares his journey into what he calls the “preferment phase” of life. Dr. Zgarrick opens up about his transition from academia to retirement, the joy of new routines, and the power of early financial planning. He highlights the importance of staying engaged—through consulting, teaching, and meaningful activities—while keeping financial health in check.

Key Points from the Episode

  • [00:00] Welcome Back, Dr. Zgarrick!
  • [00:10] The Preferment Phase Explained
  • [01:56] Living the Rich Life Today and Tomorrow
  • [05:11] The Importance of Early Financial Planning
  • [07:48] Navigating Retirement and Financial Management
  • [10:58] The Value of Community and Personal Fulfillment
  • [14:38] Staying Engaged Through Consulting
  • [38:33] Advice for Different Career Stages
  • [44:42] Final Thoughts and Wisdom

Episode Highlights

“ Dave, take a deep breath. You’re not going to run out of money. And here’s why you’re  not going to run out of money because you  never ran out of money before and you’re not, you know, unless you turn into some different person who starts spending money in a different way, you’re not going to run out of money.” – David Zgarrick [8:37]

“ One of the conversations that my  advisor has been having with us is reminding us it’s okay to spend a little bit more money. It’s okay to, you know, go on that trip or do those things.” – David Zgarrick [9:49]

“ So long as I feel that sense of value I choose to engage myself. And, you know, on the other hand, there are places where  I no longer feel that sense of value  and I have made conscientious efforts to step away from those things.” – David Zgarrick [20:37]

“ Maybe one of the aspects of the transition that has been more challenging is, is  feeling like you are part of something  that is important or has a higher purpose.”  – David Zgarrick [21:55]

“ I’ve come to realize that’s okay,  because the people that I do have influence  with, and the people that I am, shall we say, involved with, is a smaller group of people, but in some ways we have deeper and more meaningful types of relationships.” – David Zgarrick [23:44]

“ Nothing is  forever. And you do want to  make sure that you are taking the time to spend time with people who are important to you and to do the things that are important to you.”-  David Zgarrick [43:37]

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Dave, welcome back to the show.

David Zgarrick: Thank you, Tim. Good to see you.

Tim Ulbrich: Well, we had you on almost two years ago to the date, and that was episode 291. We’ll link to that one in the show notes. And one thing that stood out from that interview for me, David, that I have shared with many other people was your mention of shifting, not to retirement, but a quote, preferment phase after over 30 years in academia, quickly recap for us, what, what you mean by that, the preferment phase, and maybe what’s that looked like now, two years later.

David Zgarrick: perform it. And just to kindly borrow a phrase that many of, you know, Lucinda Maine. She was the executive VP at American Association of colleges and pharmacy. And I served on their board of directors for a number of [00:01:00] years, got to know, listen to many other folks at very well.

We send it. I were kind of on the. Same timeline in terms of making this shift. And she, and I know she, she heard this term from another fellow CEO of another professional association in DC same timeline that she did is there’s the sense that, you know, when it’s time to change paths, so to speak, it wasn’t that I was retiring, you’re totally stepping away and, you know.

Sitting back and not doing much of anything. It was the sense that I’m going to, um, I am going to in some ways step away, but I’m going to also remain engaged in doing things, particularly things that I really like to do and I value doing, and that was that sense of that’s where preferment came from. I’m, I’m doing things that I really prefer to do both for myself as well as things within our profession.

Um, And at the same time, um, you know, [00:02:00] not having the same schedules and the same demands that we did when we were, you know, working as part of other organizations.

Tim Ulbrich: When you say Dave doing the things that I really like to do and value to do, you know, we talk often on the show about the importance of yes, the X’s and O’s financially, but also finding that way that we can live the rich life today and tomorrow. And, and I think we’re saying the same thing in a different way.

What are those things? So when you think about the performance phase, we were talking about skiing before we hopped on the show, but what, what are those things that you’re, that light you up?

David Zgarrick: Well, you know, in some ways, you know, they start with the real basics that I think a lot of us have the routines, maybe that many of us enjoy. You know, it’s interesting as I’ve moved into this. Phase mornings, you know, your your regular everyday working phase mornings can be a very hectic busy time for many families and many people because you’re obviously getting ready to get up and go to work and all that kind of stuff.

In this phase right now mornings are actually [00:03:00] one of my favorite times a day because it’s I, I You know, it’s probably fair to say I ease into my mornings. I have never considered myself a morning person. I’m not one of those people that, you know, jumps up and goes on a 10 mile run and then goes off to work or something like that.

That was not me. Um, I get up, I. Do my Sudoku. I do several of the New York Times puzzles that, you know, the word, all the connections that that kind of stuff. Um, I have a cup of coffee. I eat my breakfast. I think about what I’m going to do. Um, you know, one of the things that preferment has meant for me is taking better care of myself.

Um, and so things like, um, am I going to go to the gym and do a workout? Yeah, I do. The weather’s nice. Am I going to go up for a nice bike ride? You know, those types of things. If it’s a ski day, am I, you know, yeah, I’ll get up and get ready to put my stuff in the car and head off to the mountain and go skiing and all that kind of stuff, [00:04:00] even though so those things I do in the mornings are not nearly as rushed.

They’re just. Basically doing the things that that means something to me in our value to me and, and, and, and, and fit well with, with what I want to do. So, so from a, from a very personal sense, you know, that’s, that’s a lot of what performant is, is meant to me.

Tim Ulbrich: Dave, what I love about that is I think sometimes when we think about retirement or what we’re calling here a preferment phase, we have these grandiose vision of these big things, these big experiences, which there is a time and place for

David Zgarrick: Yeah. Oh, yeah. Very much

Tim Ulbrich: But often, I, I think it’s what you’re talking about.

It’s, it’s the flexibility of the day and kind of how you spend your time. And, you know, you talk about investing more in yourself and kind of the pace of the morning. Like these are the things that when we talk about living a rich life, you know, that really resonates with me. Like, and by the way, like [00:05:00] those aren’t crazy expensive things.

Um,

David Zgarrick: no. Exactly. Exactly. No, no. It’s, you know, doing my Sudoku and the New York Times crossword and a wordle and those kind of stuff. Those are those are pretty inexpensive things to do, uh, you know, going down to the gym to work out. Yeah. I pay a little bit for a gym membership, but in the big scheme of things, that’s, that’s not a terribly high expense.

Tim Ulbrich: Dave, one of the things in our previous conversation that really stood out to me was your mention of how important the early planning was, the, the foundation bricks that you laid early in your career that allowed you to get to a point of financial security, allowed you to get to a point of having the option, right, having this phase that we’re talking about now that you’ve been in this season for a bit of time, how has that planning impacted?

Day to day. Right. We talk so much about the accumulation and getting to this point. We don’t talk as much about, well, what actually happens [00:06:00] when you retire 

David Zgarrick: Those are great points because obviously you’re still planning. You’re still utilizing financial management and financial management skills. It’s it’s not like you get to the end of the road. It’s like, okay, I’ve got all my money and now I don’t have to do anything to worry about. You know, you still have to be engaged in in plan.

Um, you know, now probably more, you know, let’s just say this. I’ve always been engaged. Um, not just in saving money. I mean, I re I was reflecting on it. It wasn’t in our previous conversation, but I think you had posted this once. It’s like, you know, what’s, what’s your favorite fun way to spend money? You know, does every, everyone has a fun thing they like to spend money on and everything.

And I, I kind of answered that in a kind of a smarty pants way. But it’s like my, my favorite thing to do was actually save money. It made me feel good when I actually had some extra money that I knew that I could. And, and that was, um, you know, that sense of it’s going to give me options [00:07:00] down the road, you know, you know, whether it be maybe going on some fun vacation or something like that, or buying something that’s important to me, or, you know, being able to move into performance earlier than I probably had planned on doing.

And, um, you know, you know, having done that. You know, save that money really gave me those options, you know, spending money. Of course, you know, spending money is part of life. We all spend money and managing those skills, you know, the way you keep tracking your funds and the kinds of things you spend money on are things that I still pay attention to.

I still use Quicken, you know, all the time to basically track my expenses and, and keep tabs on what’s going on. Um, You know, I, I think it’s, it’s good to really remain engaged in that. I, you know, what, what I had a conversation with my financial advisor a few weeks ago, as we were going through, [00:08:00] you know, as we do most of the time, he goes to the Monte Carlo simulations of.

You know, how long is your money going to last under various situations and that kind of stuff. And, you know, his experience has been, you know, what, one of the things that most people who, especially people who retire relatively early, they, they do get somewhat, I don’t know if paranoid is the right word, but they’re, they’re concerned or somewhat overly concerned about running out of money.

Everyone thinks, Oh my God, I gotta be really, really careful. I’m going to run out of money. And my financial advisor basically told me, sit back, Dave, take a deep breath. You’re not going to run out of money. And here’s why you’re not going to run out of money because you never ran out of money before and you’re not, you know, unless you turn into some different person who starts spending money in a different way, you’re not going to run out of money.

I mean, yeah, maybe the markets go up and down. Maybe, maybe your resources become different. [00:09:00] You know what, you know what we all do in situations like that. We adjust, you know, um, you know, you know, one of the good things, I guess, about our lives. I mean, both myself and my wife were both pharmacists. So we were fortunate to have a fair amount of resources to be able to work with.

And when those resources are working with us, we’re. Enables us to do some really nice things, and that’s great. If, for whatever reason, those resources were not available to us, you know, we have a fair amount of, let’s say, discretionary in there, and we can certainly cut back on those discretionaries if we had to, and focus on, you know, what are the real absolute needs.

And, um, like I said, you know, I’m not really worried if anything, one of the. Conversations that my advisor has been having with us is reminding us it’s okay to spend a little bit more money. It’s okay to, you know, go on that trip or do those things. [00:10:00] Or, you know, our big thing this last year was buying a generator.

There’s an exciting way to spend. 20, 000, but you know, it’s, it’s actually something that was important. Um, especially given our, our move that we made over this past year, uh, moving from Colorado to Maine.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. And, and I’m glad you’re mentioning this, this behavior of learning how to spend on some level. Well, at the same time, like Dave’s not going to become a different person that got him to this point. Right. And I think that’s important that we objectively look at the facts, not only in the Monte Carlo simulation, but also in like, how have you gotten to this point?

David Zgarrick: Exactly, exactly. I, I got to this point because yeah, I, I, you know, saved money and I was judicious of how we spent it and, and I, I remained that way, you know, those things have not changed because I’ve moved into the performance stage. [00:11:00] Mm

Tim Ulbrich: about that because we had a really good brief conversation before we recorded about, you know, yes, it’s the X’s and O’s when we talk about retirement, but it’s also about. You know, community for many people and everyone’s plan is a little bit different.

And for some, you know, it’s, Hey, let’s get to the warm, warm weather and be a snowbird and that’s a good fit. Others, you know, we were joking. It’s, Hey, let’s get in the RV and travel and see the country. That’s a good fit. But for many other people, it’s, Hey, what, what is the sense of community and why is that important to us?

And I think your move to Colorado and then your move back to the Northeast is a really good example of that.

David Zgarrick: That’s that’s a great example of that. You know, I’ll go back in time, you know, two, three years, um, when we first started thinking about, you know, going down this path and my wife and I were having conversations about where did we want to be? It’s funny, you know, we lived in Boston for a number of years and, Had originally thought, yeah, we’re probably gonna end up in Maine somewhere in retirement and all that kind of stuff.

And we were out driving around one day and my wife was like, well, [00:12:00] why don’t we check out? Colorado is in Denver is placed to retire. And it’s like, I love to ski. That would be great. And we did. And so we made the move out to Colorado and, um. Let’s say, obviously, there are a lot of positives from about Colorado, especially from a skiing standpoint and being out in nature and all kinds of things, but but there were things that we really missed, too.

And I think that sense, you know, having been in particularly the Northeast for as long as we had, you know, there were there were a lot of things that we missed about the Northeast and and. You know, again, I consider ourselves very fortunate in that we, you know, we made this decision to move out to Colorado and then a couple of years later, we made a decision decision to move back and I’m glad that we did, that we, you know, didn’t feel locked into our original choice.

You know, we are happy, very happy to be back [00:13:00] to the Northeast. Um, we do have, you know, you know, community here, you know, between folks we knew in Boston and folks we knew in other parts of the mid Northeast. Um, we, we’ve had, you know, people come and visit us here. I mean, I, I was joking, you know, we, we had more people probably visit us in our first two months in Maine than we did in our two years in Colorado.

And, um, And, and so it was, it was just nice to be able to host people here. We did something here when we moved to Maine that we had not done. And my wife and I’s essentially 35 years of being together. And that was actually build a house. You know, the house that we are here in Maine is we, we worked with a builder and essentially designed and built something, you know, literally from the ground up, um, it was.

Kind of good. I feel very happy that we waited that long, you know, to do that. I know a lot of people build new houses fairly early on and that kind of [00:14:00] stuff. And, you know, sometimes, you know, it, let’s just say it helps to know what you want as well as to know what you don’t want when, when you build a home.

And that’s probably a conversation for a whole nother episode of your, of your podcast to people that are thinking about building homes and, um, You know what, you know what goes into that process. And I’d love to be part of that if you never want to go down that road. Um, but, but, you know, yeah, we moved here back to the northeast and built a home.

It took about a year to get that home built. But, you know, we’ve been here since last May and are really, really happy to be back.

Tim Ulbrich: shift gears, Dave, and talk about your decision to stay engaged in consulting work while your financial plan doesn’t require it. You just talked about your conversation with your advisor. It’s going to be okay. You, you’ve made an intentional decision to stay engaged in doing consulting work. Tell us more about that decision.

Mm

David Zgarrick: I’ll say [00:15:00] what part of it goes back to what we were just talking about with community and we have various different types of community. I mean, you know, for many of us, it’s our friends and neighbors and people that we knew in the areas where we lived and that kind of stuff, you know, a community.

That’s very important to me is is the higher education community, particularly the pharmacy education community. It was a very. Mm hmm. Important part of my, of my being for, you know, essentially 35 years and, and there are, um, many folks within that community that I’m still very much connected to, um, and I, and I stay engaged with them.

And now, in some ways that staying engaged is through doing little bits of teaching. I still, um, you know, have colleagues at various, I think this last year, I, um. Taught anywhere between one in six courses at six different universities. So, [00:16:00] um, you know, and much of that online. Some of it. Some of it. I actually did go, you know, visit campuses and that’s that’s I can’t begin to tell you how much I appreciate that.

I like. The teaching in person as opposed to, you know, what so many of us have done over zoom and all that kind of stuff over the pandemic. So, so getting back into classrooms and physically meeting with students. Um, other, you know, a couple of universities I’ve been working as a, as a consulting, doing some faculty development work, doing some leadership development work.

Um, again, it keeps me engaged and involved. Um, yeah. You, we and our listeners know that, you know, there are challenges and very significant challenges in pharmacy and particularly pharmacy education right now. And, you know, what, one of the things I recognize as a consultant is I don’t have all of the answers.

I don’t have a magic wand. I’m not, you know, bringing me in as a consultant is not going to make your problems go away. Um, [00:17:00] But, um, but what I do bring is a perspective. You know, I bring a perspective by bringing experience. Um, I can help others who are dealing with issues similar to what I and other experienced leaders have dealt with over the course of our careers.

And we, we share a little bit about what we’ve learned. And at the end of the day, I, you know, I, you know, especially when you’re a consultant, I, you know, I recognize Transcribed What I am and what I’m not, and you know, what I’m not is a savior. I’m not, you know, somebody who comes in and solves all the problems.

What I do bring is a perspective. And at the end of the day, you know, I take a step back and say, ultimately, this is your problem to solve. It’s not my problem to solve. I’ll, I’ll provide you with this information and this feedback and this help, and at the end of the day, you’re, you’re, you’re, you on your end, they’re going to decide what you want to do.

And, and that’s, I guess that’s another nice thing about being in the performance [00:18:00] stage of life is I’ve gotten very good at saying that’s not my problem.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. Yeah. Or here’s what I can do and I can’t do.

David Zgarrick: Here’s what I can do and here’s what I can’t do or won’t do. So, I mean, you know, one of the things from the teaching, I mean, I’ve made a conscious decision. I’ve had colleagues at other universities come to me and say, Hey, Dave, would you like to? Teach this course, you know, not just a lecture or two, but come in and teach an entire course.

And that’s something I’ve taken a step back from and say, no, I won’t do that. I don’t want to be in charge administratively of all of the aspects that are involved because because teaching a course is, as you well know, is so much more than just coming into a classroom and giving lectures

Tim Ulbrich: You’ve served your time there. You’ve done it. Ha ha ha.

David Zgarrick: Exactly. And, and that’s, yeah, no, that’s, that’s, that’s not an area that I, that I want to be involved in anymore. Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: And your story is such a good one, Dave, for me, uh, and it’s an inspiration to me when I, when [00:19:00] I think about retirement, um, I don’t foresee a point in time, you know, outside of, of health concerns or something that doesn’t allow me to work of not doing, you know, something, money aside, you know, I, I just value.

That feeling of being engaged, of contributing, and it’s a two way street, right? So when you’re consulting with universities, whether you’re teaching or, you know, consulting, uh, with the leadership teams, whatever you may be doing, of course, you’re providing your experience and offering value. But that’s a two way street back to you of, of that sense of feeling of, of contribution and, Hey, you built a career and have gained these experiences and skills and to be able to share those.

Yes, you’re going to get paid for it as a consultant, but I would argue there’s, there’s perhaps even a greater value that comes from a sense of contribution.

David Zgarrick: Yeah. No, I mean, it all comes down to, I mean, I, I have a pretty simple mantra these days. I mean, I, I want to do things that I value and I want Okay. [00:20:00] What I do to be valued by others. I mean, and there’s all kinds of ways to define value. I mean, you know, there’s, there’s what one gets paid, of course, but, you know, there’s other things that you and I both do that, you know, maybe the sense of value isn’t in what we.

Get paid for doing, but it’s in how we’re making that contribution. And is that contribution important to yourself? And is that contribution important to the others that, that you work with? And, um, you know, so long as I feel that sense of value, I, I choose to engage myself. And, and, you know, on the other hand, you know, there are places where I no longer.

Feel that sense of value and I have made conscientious efforts to step away from those things. Um, you know, I, I don’t, you know, again, it’s, it’s, it’s a, it’s very nice being at a [00:21:00] point in your life where you don’t feel you to do something.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. Dave, I remember probably three months or so ago, you and I had had touch base. And one of the things you mentioned was how stark of a transition it was. To go into retirement where you’re no longer day in, day out, interacting with colleagues. Uh, and I know that shifted a little bit with the pandemic.

Maybe that was a, a, a, a little bit of an off ramp, you know, and, and reduced that. But tell us more about that. Was there anything else that really surprised you about the transition?

David Zgarrick: Well, I was gonna say, when I when I think about the transition, I mean, on one hand again, I think about mornings and working out and taking better care of myself and all those good things that I know that I’m doing a better job of now that I that I was doing before, um. Maybe one of the aspects of the transition that has been more challenging is, is feeling like you are [00:22:00] part of something that is important or has a higher purpose.

Um, you know, when we, most of us, when we work within our jobs or careers, we are working as part of organizations and there’s a reason we’re there. We want to be there. We want to contribute to, to something that we know is, is important. Bigger than ourselves, whether it be taking care of patients or, you know, educating students or, or doing the research that we’re involved in and that kind of stuff, we, we know that there’s that higher, bigger purpose to, to what it is that we’re doing.

And as, as you transition into retirement preferment, um, you know, you’re, you’re kind of stepping away from that. And, um, one of the things I, I had this realization a few months ago and, and. You know, we, we think about our spheres of influence and, you know, when I was, um, doing my work in higher education, you know, there’s a lot of value that’s put into how big [00:23:00] that sphere of influence is and, and how many people are you influencing?

What types of influence are you having on them, and that kind of stuff. Yeah, as I’ve, as I’ve made this transition, one, one thing you, you have to realize is, you know, for the vast majority of us, our, our spheres of influence are, if anything, becoming smaller as, as we step away, as we make that transition, I’m no longer, you know, in a position to, you know, influence as many people or, you know, make as many decisions that, that I had, um, previously, um, Um, And I’ve come to realize that’s okay, because the people that I do have influence with, and the people that I am, shall we say, involved with, is a smaller group of people, but in some ways we have deeper and more meaningful types of relationships, you know, the people that come and visit us here in Maine, the people that I go and visit [00:24:00] In, in other places and that kind of stuff, they’re, they’re the people that we have really made conscientious decisions about staying engaged and involved with, and I’m, I’m not going to name names here.

I mean, those people know who they are and I know who they are and we, you know, make very much, um, Decisions to to be part of each other’s lives. And I and I can’t begin to tell you how much I value those relationships. And I and I get the sense that those people value me. That’s that’s why they’re they choose to have me involved in their their circles as well.

And, um, again, I, you know, as we I’m now I I judge not so much about it. You know, what’s the number of people that I influence or the number of clicks I get or anything like that. It’s just how much do I value the ones that are really, really important to me.

Tim Ulbrich: [00:25:00] Yeah, what I’m hearing there, Dave, is, is depth over volume, right? Obviously in the,

David Zgarrick: much

Tim Ulbrich: in the role that you were in, you had a significant opportunity at the institution level, at the association level with your involvement to have a volume impact. And not to say you also didn’t have a depth of impact. Of course you did.

But here we’re talking about a more intimate number of individuals with an opportunity to go. Go much deeper. So that’s beautiful. I do want to talk about X’s and O’s for a moment. And you know, you, you retired at a time, as we often say that the time at when someone retires is one of the most important decisions are going to make.

David Zgarrick: it is.

Tim Ulbrich: There’s things that are out of our control sometimes, but there are things that are in our control. Like how have we prepared for entering into something like a volatile market? And while you retired into a market that has continued to overall trend up, it’s, it’s had its fair share of volatility. And so how have you planned for that in advance and how has that played out?

So that the volatility really isn’t impacting [00:26:00] you a whole lot.

David Zgarrick: You know, one of the things I’ll go back to it. I know this is something I touched on in the previous podcast is the important role of working with others, including financial advisors. There’s a tax advisor that I also have for many, many years. My tax advisor was actually my father. Father, um, my, my father, while he’s still alive and is still doing others, people’s taxes, I, I, I have a good laugh.

He actually dropped me as a client, uh, the, the, the, the year that my wife and I, um, had three different state tax, um, you know, taxes to filing in addition to our federal and, and move to from one part of the country to another part of the country, that kind of stuff, my, my dad said, you know what, I’ve had enough, you find yourself somebody with, uh, you know, who can help you deal with all of that.

The different things of that kind of stuff. And so it’s important to work with those things. I mean, we’re pharmacists, we’re smart people, we like to think that we [00:27:00] can do a lot of this work ourselves, and we do a lot of this lifting ourselves. But there’s also things that are Very, very helpful to get advice on that are not inherent to who we are, the kind of work that we do.

And I have certainly come to appreciate the contributions that our financial advisors add, um, farmer, um, that our, our tax person has had, um, you know, they, they keep me, they give me information. That’s, that’s very, very helpful. Um, so that you don’t necessarily have to, shall we say, worry about. A volatile market, you know, you know, the, the, you know, you know, starting with, let’s say, the value of having some cash sitting around.

So, so that, you know, one of the realities of life, of course, whether you’re retired or not, is you will have expenses and you will need cash for those expenses. And so how, how you deal with. You know, having that cash [00:28:00] and where that cash is and how accessible it is to you and those types of things that, you know, I’ve gotten very good advice over, over the course of the years, um, from the folks that I work with and, um, and they, they’ve really helped us, um, you know, not worry about, gee, the market went up.

2 percent the other day or down 3 percent the other day or something like that, you know, um, you know, I’m, I don’t worry about, gee, do I have to time that out or anything like that? I mean, yeah, timing is important and you always want to sell into an upmarket. So to speak, um, and, and so, so the good news is, yeah, making sure that you have a cash reserve set aside so that you’ve got the cash when you need it.

And when you need to raise some more cash, you can have the luxury of waiting until, yeah, the market’s doing a little bit better. Let’s, let’s sell off some assets now and, and then keep that back in our [00:29:00] cash reserves.

Tim Ulbrich: The, the visual that’s coming to mind for me, Dave, as you’re talking and thinking back to our previous interview is, you know, if we think about your nest egg. You’ve, you’ve built this bubble kind of around it, uh, to protect it and, and to give you some options and flexibility of if, or when you need to pull from it.

Right. It’s the cash on hand. Uh, it’s the consulting work that you, you’ve been doing, obviously the hard work and diligence that you’ve done to maintaining a lifestyle that you have, uh, some margin, you know, uh, month to month. And in two 92, you talked about, you know, what was your WTF fund and how your emergency fund.

That thankfully you didn’t have to pull from very much, was able to just grow, grow, grow. You didn’t borrow from it. And then eventually that became an important cash resource when you got into

David Zgarrick: is. And essentially it’s, you know, when we think about a nest egg, of course, you know, a nest egg is no one single, you know, asset for, for most of us. It’s, it’s a variety of assets. Um, it was the WTF fund. It’s our. [00:30:00] Base retirement savings funds. It was equity that we had in real estate and other types of assets for us.

There’s some, uh, life insurance assets in there as well. You know, there, there’s a variety of different assets and, you know. Good news is, I mean, we, you know, you know, we had retirement savings. We have not touched a single dime of those retirement savings yet. And that’s by plan. Um, you know, you know, we’re honestly the, the other assets that we had that allowed us to make this transition, you know, we’re, uh, you know, the, the plan was that we would have five to seven years of assets, um.

Set aside before we would even think about starting to utilize our retirement assets and, and that’s still very much the plan. Um, you know, we’re, we’re sitting here right now, you know, still, in essence, using the WTF fund to finance, you know, what our life is now. And in terms of. You know, real estate. [00:31:00] Yeah, we were able to make the transition from Massachusetts to Colorado back here to Maine, essentially working within the equity envelope of the real estate that we owned and still still work within that envelope.

It’s, you know, you know, making this move did not create, you know, additional obligations or additional expenses. You know, really, you know, we’re, you know, honestly, the cost of living in Maine is even a little bit lower than what the cost of living in Colorado was. So we’re, you know, probably even coming out ahead a little bit, even though we had, of course, you know, expenses involved in making that transition.

Tim Ulbrich: rename Dave, my emergency fund bucket, my WTF fund, because what I like about calling it that is it, it’s a mindset shift, right? Because when, when things happen, you know, I’m thinking about an issue we’ve got going on right now with our roof and, uh, you know, it’s those moments, especially when you’re working so hard on other goals that [00:32:00] if we have prepared for that.

And we can be somewhat lighthearted about it, which is like, that sucks, but let’s write the check and move on. That’s a totally different mindset shift than like, uh, like I’m so mad and frustrated.

David Zgarrick: I’ll go back to one of the things I mentioned a little bit earlier. I mean, my wife and I, it’s not exactly the sexiest or most desirable purchase that we made over the course of a year, but, but we, we made a decision to, to buy a whole house generator, um, for this house. And one of the things we learned relatively quickly after moving to Maine is the power goes out.

And the power may go out for days at a time and, um, and you want to be prepared for that. And yeah, one could go down to Costco and buy just a little generator that might keep your house, you know, keep something going or something like keep your refrigerator running or something like that. But that’s probably not what you really wanted to rely on or depend on.

Um, so, so we did buy a whole house generator [00:33:00] and yeah, there were expenses involved in getting the generator and having it professionally installed and all that stuff. But at the end of the day, I was, I was happy that, yeah, not only that we could do that, but we just had the resources to be able to do that.

Um, Going back to even the, the, the major decision about when to retire, you know, one, one thing I reflect on it, you know, most of us don’t, you know, it’s interesting. A lot of us think, yeah, I’m going to, I’m going to work at age 65 or 67. And, and if you do that, that’s great. You know, I, I, I think in, in our case, you know, we had just both gotten to a point where our, our personal values, let’s say we’re increasingly becoming different than those things that were valued by our employers and, and there was.

Not much that either of us were going to do to change how our employers actually did things. The only people we could actually influence or change were ourselves. [00:34:00] And, and the decisions we made was to consciously step away. Um, and, and we, you know, again, our ability to be able to do that was predicated by a large amount by the fact that we did have a fund set aside that set was, yeah, maybe originally was like, if there was some emergency pop up or something like that, like I said, we were very fortunate.

We never had that emergency. The fund kept growing. And at the end of the day, the fund was such that it It provided us with a bridge to be able to step into performance, maybe a bit earlier than, than either of us had originally envisioned. And, um, at the end of the day, I was really, really happy that we had that fun.

Tim Ulbrich: Dave, a subtle, but important thing I’m picking up on is the, the frequency of the we and our language. And I bring this up because I would remiss if I didn’t ask, you know, transitioning into retirement for couples. [00:35:00] It’s a household decision, and sometimes those timelines align, sometimes they don’t.

Sometimes people are on the same page. Sometimes there’s not. Uh, and everyone’s situation of course, is different, but any any wisdom you can shed there in terms of how you have navigated this?

David Zgarrick: terms of how we navigated it. It was interesting because I think for many, many years, my wife and I had actually quite different visions about how we were going to approach this. I, you know, retirement was probably something in retirement. Financial planning was probably fair to say a little bit more on my radar than it was on my wife’s.

You know, I. Yeah. My father was a good example for me in that he too retired relatively early age 57 and 27, 28 years later is still around and is still a retired still doing what he likes doing and is doing very well. And that was a great example for me. Um, I think my [00:36:00] wife originally was going to. Had every intention on keeping on working even after I took a step back.

Um, it’s fair to say then COVID happened and, um, you know, for all of us that work in healthcare and work in the healthcare fields, um, you know, that was a real seminal event. for a lot of people. And it was interesting, you know, while I as a college professor made this transition and was, you know, all of a sudden started working from home and doing zoom meetings and all that kind of stuff, um, which had its own set of challenges.

Um, my wife was a pharmacist at a hospital. Um, and as we all likely know, hospitals kept Working during the pandemic and those people that worked at hospitals kept on going in and, um, which, of course, had its own set of challenges. And I think going through those challenges, um, really. Change my wife’s mindset as well, [00:37:00] in terms of, you know, how much longer do I want to keep doing this?

And do I feel valued by, um, the organization that I, that I work for? And, um, you know, we, you know, as 2020, 2021, 2022 is happening. I think we both Increasingly, we’re on the same page that, you know, this, this is a good time to make a make that switch. And we, we know that there have been many others of us that have have joined us.

If anything, it has created, I’ll say one challenge in retirement and moving from one part of a country to another part. Now, back to this part is finding health care. Uh, we, we know that there have been many other health care professionals that have taken the last few years and have said, yeah, I’m going to step away.

And, um, that has, of course, created some challenges for a health care system that was challenged to start with in many ways. Um, and so, um, yeah, there is, [00:38:00] there’s been a challenge. It’s been, um. You know, getting health insurance, um, finding health care providers, getting appointments with those health care providers and all that stuff.

But again, that could be a whole nother show for another day. Okay,

Tim Ulbrich: I didn’t give you a heads up about this one, but I think it’s so important that we lean on your wisdom as we think about our listeners in different phases of their career. So Dave, I’m thinking about three groups.

Obviously everyone’s on their own path, but I’m thinking about those that are in the first five to 10 years, new practitioners, those that are in the middle of their career, and then those that are coming up on retirement. Uh, in the next five or so years. And so let, let’s start with those that are on that front part of their career, first five to seven years, new practitioners, they’re facing, you know, significant amounts of student loan debt, expensive phase of life might be starting a family, trying to buy a home.

[00:39:00] Getting started with investing, all these things. What advice would you have for that group? 

David Zgarrick: Start early. Jump in. Don’t be afraid. I mean, yes, you you do have obligations, particularly student loan debt and everything that you that you are going to have to take care of and do take care of those things. But get into the habit of saving money being, you know, being mindful of how you spend money.

And that’s not to say don’t do things that you want to do. It’s not just It’s about taking care of your needs. It’s about, um, you know, having your wants and, and making sure that you’re taking care of those as well. But, but jump in, don’t, um, don’t get into, um, analysis or paralysis by analysis. Don’t, don’t, you know, basically say, oh my God, there’s all these things that I have to do.

And then at the end of the day, you end up not doing anything. Um, jump in.

Tim Ulbrich: How about those pharmacists, Dave, like myself and that midpoint of their career where, where they’re looking at retirement and it’s [00:40:00] still perhaps off in the distance, but they can feel it. It’s, it’s coming, uh, often in a very expensive. You know, phase of life, maybe, maybe the student loans are gone. Maybe they’re not.

Uh, you know, I think about our situation, uh, for, for kids in the house, expenses are, are high. We’re thinking about kids college where maybe perhaps some listeners, they’ve got elderly parents, they’ve got young kids or they’re kind of in that middle. What, what about advice for them?

David Zgarrick: Have a plan, develop a plan, and then let that plan work out. Uh, you know, one of the things that Really helped us was, shall we say, being able to save for retirement to do things without having to make a lot of day to day conscious decisions. I mean, you know, for example, you know, most of us work for organizations where we can set aside money.

And and have that money, you know, basically, you know, it’s going to go into certain pots and it’s going to work and do certain things and just so have a plan. Let it [00:41:00] do that. You know, don’t don’t necessarily. You’re right. We all people in the middle of their careers are have very, very busy lives and a lot of other obligations.

And so the less you know, the less that you have to even Think about, you know, financial management is probably a good thing at this stage of your life, yet still having that plan in place. I’m not saying don’t be engaged in financial management and don’t do these things, but but have a have a pathway or a plan such that, you know, try to make things as automatic as possible so that you don’t have to put a lot of day to day effort into into managing these things.

Uh,

Tim Ulbrich: well, like put the plan in place and then automate it so important and Dave, that final group, those coming up on retirement, maybe in the next five or 10 years about to make that transition. Yes, financially, but also for the things beyond the numbers.

What, what advice would you have

David Zgarrick: [00:42:00] you know, take some time to think about what you want your life to be moving forward. I mean, there is, you know, most of us are not in situations where we have to retire or step away at a, at a certain time at a certain date. Um, you know, and, you know, to those folks that are still really enjoying what they are doing every day, if that’s, if that’s what makes you, you.

Then then do that. Keep doing that. I guess in some ways, you know, when it comes out to have that conversation with yourself, what makes you you? What is it that that you really value and is really important? Is it time with your spouse time with your family time taking care of yourself? Um, your community?

Where do you want to be? Who do you want to be with? You know, ask yourself those types of questions and and then think about how do you make Those things happen. Um, I’ll say people in our age [00:43:00] frame right now is the ones that are getting later in our careers and so forth. Um, you know, we, we still have a variety of obligations.

We think about to, you know, one of the things that I think is very incumbent upon many of us in our age age, we’re, we’re fortunate in many ways and it’s that many of us still have parents around and so forth, but they are aging. And one of the things we see is my, my wife’s, uh, my wife’s mother passed away about a month ago.

And you’re constantly reminded of Nothing is forever. And you do want to make sure that you are taking the time to spend time with people who are important to you and to do the things that are important to you. Whether it may be take that big trip or go spend time with family or whatever, because, because you do realize.

You know, even though we plan for, yeah, retirement could be 20, 30, 40 years. Um, nothing’s guaranteed. Nothing will be forever. [00:44:00] And, and, and so I think as you approach, you know, moving into making that transition with the mindset of who do I want to be, what’s important to me, what are my values and then how do I live those values?

Um, You know, that that’s certainly been our mindset as, as we’ve approached, um, you know, especially the last two, three years. And, and I anticipate that’s what it’s going to be as we continue moving forward.

Tim Ulbrich: Dave, such wisdom there. We really appreciate you taking time to come on the show. I know you’ve been an inspiration to me and this is certainly going to be valuable to our listeners and our community. So again, thank you so much. And, uh, looking forward to following up in the future again.

David Zgarrick: Thank you. Thank you so much, Tim. Uh, again, you provide such a wonderful service to, to so many of us, um, in our profession and beyond, you know, there’s so many people that can benefit from the type of work that you do, and I’m just happy to be part of it.

Tim Ulbrich: Thank you, Dave. Take care.

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

Note: Referral fees from affiliate links in this table are sent to the non-profit YFP Gives. 

Read the full advertising disclosure here.

Bonus

Starting Rates

About

YFP Gives accepts advertising compensation from companies that appear on this site, which impacts the location and order in which brands (and/or their products) are presented, and also impacts the score that is assigned to it. Company lists on this page DO NOT imply endorsement. We do not feature all providers on the market.

$750*

Loans

≥150K = $750* 

≥50K-150k = $300


Fixed: 4.89%+ APR (with autopay)

A marketplace that compares multiple lenders that are credit unions and local banks

$500*

Loans

≥50K = $500

Variable: 4.99%+ (with autopay)*

Fixed: 4.96%+ (with autopay)**

 Read rates and terms at SplashFinancial.com

Splash is a marketplace with loans available from an exclusive network of credit unions and banks as well as U-Fi, Laurenl Road, and PenFed

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]